Escolar Documentos
Profissional Documentos
Cultura Documentos
O P E R A T I N G
Row filter
IF-PJS-SR-030-01-04375-S-NNS-S
Translation of the original operating instructions
en-GB
Vokuhlstrae 63
. 42555 Velbert-Langenberg
Operating instructions
1.1
Introduction ............................................................................. 5
1.2
1.3
Designs ................................................................................... 9
1.4
2.1
General ................................................................................. 13
2.2
Filter ...................................................................................... 15
2.3
Cleaning ............................................................................... 17
2.4
2.5
Fan ....................................................................................... 21
Safety .....................................................................23
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
Commissioning/decommissioning .....................29
4.1
Commissioning ..................................................................... 29
Operation ...............................................................31
5.1
Introduction ........................................................................... 31
5.2
5.3
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating instructions
5.4
6.1
Introduction ...........................................................................39
6.2
6.3
6.4
Overhauling .......................................................... 49
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
7.10
7.11
8.1
General .................................................................................81
8.2
Disassembly ..........................................................................81
8.3
Disposal ................................................................................83
Appendix A ........................................................... 85
9.1
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating instructions
9.2
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating instructions
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating instructions
Design and function
Introduction
1.1
Introduction
The filters are dry filters for separating dust from a gas stream.
Operating
principle
The following figure shows the operating principle of a filter and its components.
Figure 1:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Valve block
Diaphragm valve
Bag bottom
Clean gas area
Filter bag
Supporting cage
Raw gas inlet
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Operating instructions
Design and function
Functional description
1.2
Functional description
Raw gas
The gas stream to be cleaned enters the raw gas plenum through the raw gas
inlet and is divided by the raw gas baffle plate so that it flows evenly through
the filter bags.
Bag Bottom
The bag bottom separates the raw gas plenum from the clean gas area. The
filter bags are the only connection (filter media).
Filter media
There must be a seal between the filter media and the bag bottom and
between the bag bottom and the housing. The dust-laden raw gas flows
through the filter media from the outside in. The dust is then deposited on the
outside of the filter medium.
Dust collection
area
As a consequence of regeneration, the dust particles precipitated on the surface of the filter medium get into the dust collection area by sedimentation.
The dust collection area is designed funnel-shaped; the angle of inclination
is adapted to the flow properties of the precipitated particles.
Dust discharge
Screw conveyor
Air slide
Clean gas
Rotary valve
In row filters, the sedimented dust is normally sent through a screw conveyor
to a central discharge system.
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating instructions
Design and function
Functional description
The gas stream exits the filter media through the bag bottom, flows into the
clean gas area and continues to the clean gas outlet.
Figure 2:
1
2
3
4
Cleaning control
5
6
7
8
Valve block
Cover door
Nozzle tube
Clean gas area
Regeneration is done by means of compressed air from the clean gas side.
It can be done in offline mode or online mode.
The dust cake is ejected under the influence of the purge air flowing through
the filter medium, and by the mechanical movement of the filter medium.
Another gas, for example nitrogen (N2) can be used for regeneration instead
of compressed air.
The Technical data chapter indicates which compressed gas is actually
used.
Offline mode
Online mode
In online mode, the filter media to be cleaned are cleaned during operation
without parts of the filter being blocked off by clean gas flaps.
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating instructions
Design and function
Functional description
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating instructions
Design and function
Designs
1.3
Designs
General
Design
classification
Figure 3:
Bag series filter with dust collection chamber and filter screw conveyor
Series double filter
1.3.1
Modular design
General
The components of the row filter are standardised and can be individually
combined into a complete filter according to the required level of performance
and design requirements.
Clean gas plenum with bag bottom, hung filter bags and supporting cages,
injector pipe and inlet nozzles.
Filter compartment
Dust conveying
sytem
Screw conveyor
Dust discharge
system
Rotary valve
Double pendulum flap
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating instructions
Design and function
Designs
Steel structure
Supporting
Guard rail / railing
Penthouse
Heating and
insulation
Compressed air
supply
Compressor
Compressed air maintenance unit
Compressed air safety valve
Diaphragm valve
Distributor
Shut-off equipment
Cleaning control
system
JetBus Controller
Pilotbox
Differential pressure transmitter
10
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating instructions
Design and function
Characteristic properties of filter media
1.4
The filter media quality resulting from the technical data has been adapted to
requirements and may not be modified.
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
11
Operating instructions
Design and function
Characteristic properties of filter media
12
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating instructions
Technical data
General
Technical data
2.1
General
Order information
Operating data
The dust removal installation is to be operated in such a way that the process
temperatures or the wall temperatures in all operating states are at least 20C
over the water dew point or, as the case may be, over the acid dew point of
the waste gas..
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
13
Operating instructions
Technical data
General
14
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating instructions
Technical data
Filter
2.2
Filter
Identification
Type: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IF-PJS-SR-030-01-04375-S-NNS-S
Serial no. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34436
Total weight: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1419,087 kg
Design data
Operating data
Filter bag
Supporting cage
Weight: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222,320 kg
2.2.1
Cover doors
Gas spring
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
15
Operating instructions
Technical data
Filter
16
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating instructions
Technical data
Cleaning
2.3
Cleaning
General data
Cleaning cycle
Compressed air
consumption
Air pressure
before filter maintenance unit:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .at least 6.5 bar
Permissible pressure in valve block: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 bar
Compressed air
quality classes in
line with ISO
8573-1:2001-02
2.3.1
Class
Value
Partikel size
<5
Concentration
<5
mg/m
Pressure dewpoint
< +3
Concentration
total oil
<1
mg/m
Humidity class
Oil class
Control unit
Manufacturer, type: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reco, RM-BV12-6 DP
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
17
Operating instructions
Technical data
Cleaning
2.3.2
Valve chamber
Valve block
Diaphragm valve
Compressed air
maintenance unit
18
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating instructions
Technical data
Dust discharge systems
2.4
2.4.1
Rotary valve
Operating data
Sealing
Geared motor
Proximity switch
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
19
Operating instructions
Technical data
Dust discharge systems
20
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating instructions
Technical data
Fan
2.5
Fan
Identification
Operating data
Motor
Sound data
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
21
Operating instructions
Technical data
Fan
22
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating instructions
Safety
Preliminary comment
Safety
3.1
Preliminary comment
These safety instructions are provided for the protection of persons and
objects against damage and dangers. These dangers result from unintended
use, incorrect operation, inadequate or improper maintenance of the plant.
3.2
Intended use
The plant is suitable for separating dusts in accordance with the specifications listed in the technical data.
Gas springs
The gas springs are used solely for support while the cover doors open and
close and for locking the cover doors once open.
Dust discharge
system
Dust discharge systems are suitable only for discharging dust in accordance
with the specifications listed in the technical data.
Conversions and
changes of the
plant
3.3
If potential hazards change with respect to the original design of the plant, the
safety equipment must be checked and safeguarded by qualified persons.
3.3.1
Only operate the plant in perfect working condition and while observing
the operating instructions.
Avoid any form of work that endangers the safety of people or impairs
the safety of the plant.
Explosion protected plants are to be checked and released before commissioning by a qualified person (Atex, occupational safety regulation).
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
23
Operating instructions
Safety
Basic safety regulations
Generally applicable, national and local safety laws, accident prevention laws
and operator's regulations must be observed in addition to the regulations in
these operating instructions.
3.3.2
Area of applicability
Data, instructions and safety-relevant notes in these operating instructions
apply exclusively to the plant supplied.
3.3.3
Target groups
When operating the plant, responsibilities for different activities must be clearly
defined and adhered to.
The operator must ensure that only qualified personnel operate the plant and
that recognised rules for occupational safety are adhered to. Only qualified
personnel may be located within the plant's hazard area.
Operator
Maintenance
personnel
Repair defects
Qualifications
Service personnel
Qualifications
24
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating instructions
Safety
Meaning of safety instructions
3.4
3.4.1
DANGER
Indicates a dangerous situation leading to death or
serious injury.
CAUTION
Indicates a dangerous situation that can lead to
death or serious injury.
WARNING
Indicates a potentially dangerous situation that can
lead to minor or moderate injury.
NOTE
Indicates a situation that can lead to damage to
objects.
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
25
Operating instructions
Safety
General safety regulations
3.5
3.5.1
26
Before any work is carried out on the plant, all personnel involved must
have read and understood the contents of the operating instructions.
The responsibilities for working on the plant must be clearly defined and
adhered to.
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating instructions
Safety
Product-specific dangers and danger zones
3.6
3.6.1
Electric dangers
CAUTION
Voltage-carrying components
Electric shock when touched
Switch off the filter at the main switch.
Secure the switch against being accidentally switched back on.
When the main switch is OFF, the socket in the switch cabinet is still
live.
The switch cabinet may be opened only by trained, authorised expert
personnel.
3.6.2
Mechanical dangers
CAUTION
Heavy components with sharp edges
Crushing and cutting injuries
Wear suitable clothing or protective clothing.
Wear gloves when changing components with sharp edges.
Use a crane for heavy components.
When working on the system, do not wear clothing that can get caught on the
components: e.g. neckties, scarves, jewellery, loose clothing and the like.
Protect long hair by wearing a suitable head covering.
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
27
Operating instructions
Safety
Product-specific dangers and danger zones
3.6.3
Pneumatic dangers
CAUTION
The pneumatic system is under pressure - even in EMERGENCY OFF
condition
Eye injuries from compressed air
Do NOT change the specified pressure settings.
Before beginning maintenance and overhauling work, switch off the
compressed air supply and vent the system.
When working on the pneumatic system, always wear safety goggles.
3.6.4
CAUTION
Overload from excessive dust load
Material damage from destruction of the filter
Death or serious injury if the filter falls over
Clean the dust collection chamber regularly.
Monitor the fill level in the filter.
The manufacturer is not liable for damage resulting from such use;
the risk is the responsibility of the user alone.
28
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating instructions
Commissioning/decommissioning
Commissioning
Commissioning/decommissioning
4.1
Commissioning
Functioning
Cold commissioning
In cold commissioning, the design and function of the filter and its aggregates
are checked and tested without subjecting the system to dust. First, the function of individual aggregates is tested. Then the function of the aggregates
when interacting is tested via the system control.
The cold commissioning is performed by Intensiv-Filter staff.
Warm commissioning
During the warm commissioning, the entire system is tested under operating
conditions. Settings are adjusted when necessary.
Warm commissioning includes functional tests that cannot be performed
during cold commissioning.
Examples:
Shutdown of
the system
(temporary)
Temperatures
Operating pressures
Volume flows
Mobility of the flaps (e.g. clean gas flap, raw gas flap, etc.)
When the system is shut down, the assumption is that the system will later be
re-commissioned. The system shutdown can be planned or unplanned.
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
29
Operating instructions
Commissioning/decommissioning
Commissioning
Re-commissioning
Decommissioning
(final)
In decommissioning, the assumption is that the system will not be re-commissioned. Following decommissioning, the system will be disposed of. The necessary measures are described in the chapter Disassembly and disposal.
4.1.1
Prerequisites
The assembly of the filter and its aggregates is completed successfully and
has been confirmed by the assembly acceptance
Compressed air pipes are blown clear with compressed air
CAUTION
Danger from foreign bodies in the filter
Physical injury from foreign bodies ejected from rotating components
Material damage from foreign bodies entering rotating components
Spark formation
Remove foreign bodies from the filter and ducts before commissioning
Equipment
Compressed air
30
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating instructions
Operation
Introduction
Operation
5.1
Introduction
Continuous
operation
5.2
Inspection door
CAUTION
Discharge of large dust quantities
Suffocation due to inhalation of dust
Keep inspection door closed during operation
Closed doors
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
31
Operating instructions
Operation
Inspection door
32
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating instructions
Operation
Measures in case of alarm signals and warnings
5.3
General
For all error messages, the affected aggregate must be checked first. This
test must be carried out as promptly as possible to avoid jeopardising plant
safety and reliability.
To prevent damage to the filter bags, the filter must be removed from the
process immediately.
If the dust concentration in the clean gas is exceeded, the filter must be
removed from the process
CAUTION
Danger due to inhalation of dust or contact with dust
Irritations to eyes, respiratory system or skin by dust
Wear protective equipment.
After the filter has cooled, the cover door should be opened and the filter bags
checked for seal seat, material damage etc.
Dust discharge
systems stoppage
If possible, the dust discharge system should be removed from the process
by closing slide valves. The fault on the affected discharge system should be
resolved immediately.
Faults in the cleaning system must be resolved in line with the instructions in
the JetBus controller section.
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
33
Operating instructions
Operation
Causes of malfunctions
In case of an alarm signal from one of the fan monitoring systems (acceleration sensor, fan bearing temperature monitoring, motor winding temperature
monitoring or motor bearing temperature), it is essential to shut down the filter
to resolve the fault.
5.4
Causes of malfunctions
The following table of possible malfunctions should provide quick assistance
to the operator.
Malfunction
Possible cause
Remedy
play is defective
Design data has not been
adhered to
- Unacceptable increase in
the volumetric flow
- Unacceptable increase in
temperature
- Unacceptable increase in
the raw gas dust concentration
- Display is defective
34
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating instructions
Operation
Causes of malfunctions
Malfunction
Possible cause
Remedy
high
tions
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
35
Operating instructions
Operation
Causes of malfunctions
Malfunction
Possible cause
Remedy
Bag damage
an angle
Bags blocked
Temperature
- too high
Regulate temperature
- Temperature control is
defective
- too low
Leaks
- Air leaking in
Rectify leaks
- Insulation is defective
Repair insulation
- Seals damaged
Replace seals
- Unsuitable seals
loosened
Condensation
formation
too low
ficient insulation
- Air leaking in
36
Rectify leaks
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating instructions
Operation
Causes of malfunctions
Malfunction
Possible cause
Remedy
- Halogenated hydrocarbons
are present
Pitting corrosion
(pitting)
Signs of wear
- At the bags
- Flow at an angle
plate
- Impermissible filter
lection area
medium
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
37
Operating instructions
Operation
Causes of malfunctions
Malfunction
Possible cause
Remedy
Dust clogging
- Inadequate heating
- Moist dust
tions
Dust bridges
Dust discharge
- Dust discharge
blocked
- Dust bridges
38
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating instructions
Inspection and maintenance
Introduction
6.1
Introduction
General
Accident prevention
To ensure the safety of staff and of the filtering installation, measures for accident prevention must be observed for all maintenance work.
Documentation
Prerequisites
WARNING
Hot surface
Risk of burns on contact
Only carry out maintenance work on components that have cooled off
Wear protective clothing
CAUTION
Live components
Electric shocks on contact
Before working on live components, switch off the main switch and
secure it against being accidentally switched back on.
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
39
Operating instructions
Inspection and maintenance
Introduction
CAUTION
Pressurised plant parts
Bodily injury from compressed air or spontaneously released components
Depressurise any pressurised plant parts before maintenance work
Wear protective equipment
CAUTION
Maintenance work on rotating components
Strangulation from loose articles of clothing or hair being caught in rotating
components
Wear close-fitting clothing
The following articles of clothing must not be worn: neckties, scarves,
jewellery etc.
Protect long hair with adequate head covering
40
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating instructions
Inspection and maintenance
Cover door
6.2
Cover door
For inspection and maintenance work in the clean gas area, the cover door
must be open.
6.2.1
Safety
WARNING
Danger from open cover door during operation in case of overpressure in the filter
Burns caused by escaping hot gas
Contact with escaping dust
Open cover door only when the plant is at a standstill.
CAUTION
Accidental closure of the cover door
Injury due to crushing of limbs
Covers doors must be secured to stabilise them and prevent them from
closing automatically.
The positioner of the cover door must engage in the securing position.
General
Gas springs support and limit the opening of the cover door.
CAUTION
Pressurised gas spring parts (gas spring internal pressure up to
160 bar) can come loose when the cover door is slammed shut.
Gas spring parts can cause bodily injury
Open the cover door to the end position
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
41
Operating instructions
Inspection and maintenance
Cover door
Opening
Open the cover door and secure it against accidentally falling shut.
Figure 4:
1
2
3
42
4
5
6
Handle
Cover door
Gas spring
2.
Hold cover door (5) back against the spring force until the end position
has been reached.
Once the end position is reached, the protective tube (1) falls onto
the piston rod of the gas spring (6) and thus stops the piston and piston rod from accidentally closing the cover door (5).
The cover door is opened and secured against accidentally falling shut.
Check if seals are brittle or damaged (see the Overhauling chapter for
information on how to exchange the seals).
2.
Check the funktion of gas springs (see the Gas spring section).
Inspection of the seals and gas springs is complete.
3
Inspecting
Protective tube
Linkage point
Clean gas chamber housing
1.
3
Inspecting
Check the functioning of the gas springs (see the Gas spring section).
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating instructions
Inspection and maintenance
Cover door
Closing
CAUTION
Cover door falling shut
Crushing of limbs
Slowly close the cover door
Do not allow the cover door to fall
1.
3
6.2.2
Lift protective tube (1) and slowly close the cover door (5) at the same
time.
Never allow cover door (5) to fall.
The cover door is closed.
Gas spring
The gas spring consists of the following components:
Figure 5:
Gas spring
General
Malfunction
Cause
Remedy
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
43
Operating instructions
Inspection and maintenance
Cover door
Maintenance
44
Each time the cover door is opened and closed, make sure the gas
springs function correctly.
Lubrication of the linkage points when the cover door is actuated in the
context of other maintenance work.
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating instructions
Inspection and maintenance
Filter bags
6.3
Filter bags
Inspection
2.
Open the cover door and secured against accidentally swinging shut
(see chapter Inspection and maintenance, section Cover door).
3.
4.
5.
6.
If there are no dust deposits that could indicate damaged filter bags, the
filter bags could be clogged. Replacing clogged filter bags (see chapter
"Overhauling")
7.
8.
9.
After the guaranteed service life of the filter bags has expired (see
"Technical Data"), they must be replaced (see "Overhauling") in order to
guarantee the secure operation of the plant
10. Close the cover door (see chapter Inspection and maintenance, section Cover door).
3 The functioning of the filter bags has now been checked
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
45
Operating instructions
Inspection and maintenance
Filter bags
46
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating instructions
Inspection and maintenance
Inspection cover
6.4
Inspection cover
6.4.1
Figure 6:
1
2
3
4
5
CAUTION
Discharge of large dust quantities
Suffocation due to inhalation of dust
Environmental damage due to discharge of harmful dust
Before opening the inspection door, dismantle a filter bag to see
whether any dust has amassed.
Open the inspection door only when the plant is at a standstill.
Opening
2.
3
Inspecting
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
47
Operating instructions
Inspection and maintenance
Inspection cover
3
Closing
Position the inspection cover in the opening of the dust collection area
The seal is located between the inside section and outer section of
the inspection cover
2.
48
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating instructions
Overhauling
Overhauling
General
To ensure safe operation of the filter and its aggregates, components that
have reached their service life through wear, corrosion, mechanical stress,
fatigue etc. must be replaced immediately. It is recommended to use only
original spare parts.
If the filter and its aggregates are still operated despite a defect being identified, the operator is solely responsible for any resulting damage to personnel
or the filtering installation.
Accident prevention
To ensure the safety of staff and of the filtering installation, measures for accident prevention must be observed for all overhauling work.
Protecting the
working area
The responsible staff will ensure that no unauthorised people or unnecessary objects are in the working area.
Documentation
Customer service
For any queries on spare parts, repairs and optimisation of filtering installations, please contact Intensive-Filter customer service.
To order spare parts or send questions to customer service, please contact
us at the following address:
Intensiv-Filter GmbH & Co KG
Vosskuhlstrasse 63
D-42555 VELBERT (Langenberg), Germany
Commission no.
Machine no.
Filter type
Shipping address
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
49
Operating instructions
Overhauling
Type plate
Delivery date
The type plate located in a clearly visible location on the filter. The type plate
contains the following information:
Figure 7:
1
2
3
Data fields
Company logo
Address
Type code number
4
5
6
Machine number
Commission number
Year of construction
Figure 8:
Spare parts list
Prerequisites
WARNING
Hot surface
Risk of burns on contact
Only work on cooled components
Wear protective equipment
50
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating instructions
Overhauling
Measures in case of alarm signals and warnings
CAUTION
Live components
Electric shocks on contact
Before working on live components, switch off the main switch and
secure it against being accidentally switched back on.
CAUTION
Pressurised plant parts
Bodily injury from flow of compressed air or spontaneously released components
Before working on pressurised plant parts, make sure they are depressurised.
Wear protective equipment
WARNING
Walking on uneven surfaces
Slipping or stumbling
Wear personal protective equipment
7.1
General
For all error messages, the affected aggregate must be checked first. This
test must be carried out as promptly as possible to avoid jeopardising plant
safety and reliability.
To prevent damage to the filter bags, the filter must be removed from the
process immediately.
Exceeding dust
concentration
CAUTION
Danger due to inhalation of dust or contact with dust
Irritations to eyes, respiratory system or skin by dust.
Wear protective equipment
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
51
Operating instructions
Overhauling
Measures in case of alarm signals and warnings
After the section has cooled, the cover door should be opened and the filter
bags checked for seal seat, material damage etc.
Filter wall heating
fault
Dust discharge
devices stoppage
If possible, the dust discharge device should be removed from the process
by closing slide valves. The fault on the affected discharge device should be
resolved immediately.
Activation of level
indicator
CAUTION
Danger due to inhalation of dust or contact with dust
Irritations to eyes, respiratory system or skin by dust.
Wear protective equipment
Before opening the inspection doors, make sure that there is no accumulated dust behind them.
Faults in the cleaning system must be resolved in line with the instructions in
the JetBus controller section.
In case of a warning signal from a fan monitoring system (acceleration sensor, fan bearing temperature monitoring, motor winding temperature monitoring or motor bearing temperature), immediate measures are required to
resolve the fault. If safe operation of the plant is not impaired, these can be
carried out during operation.
In case of an alarm signal from one of the fan monitoring systems (acceleration sensor, fan bearing temperature monitoring, motor winding temperature
monitoring or motor bearing temperature), it is essential to shut down the filter
to resolve the fault.
52
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating instructions
Overhauling
Cover door
7.2
Cover door
General
Prerequisites
CAUTION
Cover door falling shut
Death or severe bodily injury if the cover door falls shut
Also secure the cover door against falling shut during work on the positioner or gas spring
7.2.1
Implementation
2.
3.
Glue cover door seal with silicone into the groove of the cover door
Observe the temperature resistance of the silicone: temperature of
the filtering installation (see chapter "Technical data")
Cover door seal has been replaced
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
53
Operating instructions
Overhauling
Cover door
7.2.2
Gas spring
General
Implementation
Figure 9:
1
2
1.
2.
54
3
4
Cover door
Gas spring
Unscrew the screw (2) of the gas spring (4) on the gusset plate (1).
Figure 10:
1
2
3
Gas spring
Cap spring (folding spring bolt)
Clean gas chamber
4
5
Unscrew folding spring bolts (2 and 4) on the bottom end of the gas
spring (1)
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating instructions
Overhauling
Cover door
3.
4.
5.
If it is necessary to turn the piston rod in order to insert the eye into the
clevis (5), then the piston rod may be turned clockwise only.
6.
Fasten the eye of the gas spring in the clevis of the clean gas chamber
with the folding spring bolt
7.
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
55
Operating instructions
Overhauling
Cover door
56
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating instructions
Overhauling
Nozzle tube
7.3
Nozzle tube
Prerequisites
The cover door is open and secured against accidentally swinging shut (see
chapter Inspection and maintenance, section Cover door)
Removal
Removing the nozzle tube, flat packing, valve tube nipple and O-ring
Figure 11:
1
2
3
1.
4
5
Bushing
Hexagon cap nut
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
57
Operating instructions
Overhauling
Nozzle tube
Figure 12:
1
2
3
4
Valve block
Clean gas chamber front wall
Bag base
Flat packing
5
6
7
2.
Pull the nozzle tube (7) out of the valve tube nipple (5) by means of
short turns to the right and left
3.
CAUTION
Valve block may collapse if it is not fastened securely
Injury to persons or damage to objects due to collapsing valve block
Only ever remove one valve tube nipple per valve block at one time
After removal, reinstall valve tube nipple immediately
4.
58
Unscrew the valve tube nipple and remove the flat packing (4)
Nozzle tube, flat packing, valve tube nipple and the O-ring are now
removed.
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating instructions
Overhauling
Nozzle tube
Installation
Installing the flat packing, valve tube nipple, O-rings and nozzle tube
1.
Screw in the valve tube nipple (5) with new flat packing (4).
2.
Insert the new O-ring (6) into the valve tube nipple
3.
Push the nozzle tube (7) into the valve tube nipple
4.
Fasten nozzle tube with screw, bushing and hexagon cap nut on the
cover door frame (see illustration Nozzle tube fastening)
Torque setting 30 Nm
The flat packing, valve tube nipple, O-ring and nozzle tube are now
installed.
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
59
Operating instructions
Overhauling
Nozzle tube
60
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating instructions
Overhauling
Filter bag
7.4
Filter bag
7.4.1
Prerequisite
The cover door is open (see section Opening and closing the cover door)
The blast connection or nozzle tube has been removed (see section Blast
connection)
The inlet nozzle and supporting cage are removed. (see sections Supporting
cage, Inlet nozzle and Fastening the inlet nozzle)
CAUTION
Contaminated filter bags
Risk of poisoning due to inhalation, eye injuries or skin irritations
Wear protective equipment
Removal
3
Installation
Pick up the filter bag by the wire ring and pull it upwards out of the bag
base
The filter bag is now removed
Insert filter bag still folded together (as when delivered) through the corresponding hole in the bag base.
Figure 13:
1
Filter bag
Bag base
2.
3.
Place the filter bag onto the bag base with the ridge
Turn the seam in the direction of the tension bar or star-shaped ten-
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
61
Operating instructions
Overhauling
Filter bag
Concluding tasks
62
sion bar
Filter bag is installed
1.
2.
Insert the inlet nozzle (see sections Inlet nozzle and Fastening the
inlet nozzle)
3.
Mount the blast connection or nozzle pipe (see section Blast connection)
4.
Close the cover door (see section Closing the cover door)
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating instructions
Overhauling
Supporting cage
7.5
Supporting cage
7.5.1
Prerequisite
The cover door is open (see section Opening and closing the cover door)
The blast connection or nozzle tube has been removed (see section Blast
connection)
The fastening of the inlet nozzles has been released (see section Fastening
the inlet nozzle)
Removal
Figure 14:
1
2
3
4
5
6
1.
Remove the supporting cage (5) with inlet nozzle (4) from the filter
bag (3)
In case of low removal height or very long supporting cages: Split the
supporting cage at the intermediate ring
2.
Pull the supporting cage out of the filter bag until the intermediate ring is
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
63
Operating instructions
Overhauling
Supporting cage
Figure 15:
3.
Prevent the supporting cage from slipping back down by inserting a rigid
bar at the supporting cage section below the intermediate ring
4.
Splay the lengthways wires apart right and left of the split at the top supporting cage section with the mounting lever and remove the top supporting cage section
Figure 16:
64
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating instructions
Overhauling
Supporting cage
(example illustration)
1
2
3
4
5.
6.
Hold the lower supporting cage section steady, remove the bar and pull
the supporting cage section out of the filter bag
The supporting cage is now removed
3
Intermediate ring
NOTE
Connection coming loose from supporting cage sections
Damage to filter bags
Replace damaged intermediate rings
1.
On the supporting cage section, splay the lengthways wires apart right
and left of the split using the mounting lever
Figure 17:
1
2
Intermediate ring
Supporting cage
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Mounting lever
65
Operating instructions
Overhauling
Supporting cage
2.
3.
Insert new intermediate ring from above into the supporting cage
4.
3
Installation
NOTE
Damage to filter bags
Specified value for residual dust content in clean gas is not maintained
Straighten bent supporting cages
Replace damaged supporting cages
Prerequisites
The filter bag has been installed (see section Filter bag)
The inlet nozzle has been installed in the supporting cage (see section Inlet
nozzle)
1.
Insert supporting cage lower section with intermediate ring into the filter
bag
Figure 18:
66
2.
Prevent lower supporting cage part from falling into the filter bag by
inserting a rigid bar
3.
Place the upper supporting cage section on the lower supporting cage
section
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating instructions
Overhauling
Supporting cage
Figure 19:
1
2
Concluding tasks
3
4
4.
On the top supporting cage section, splay the lengthways wires apart
right and left of the split with the mounting lever and press the upper
supporting cage section into the intermediate ring groove
5.
6.
7.
8.
Remove bar and insert supporting cage into the filter bag
1.
Fasten filter bag, inlet nozzle and supporting cage (see section Fastening the inlet nozzle)
2.
Mount the blast connection or nozzle tube (see section Blast connection)
3.
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
67
Operating instructions
Overhauling
Supporting cage
68
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating instructions
Overhauling
Inlet nozzle
7.6
Inlet nozzle
7.6.1
Prerequisite
The cover door is open (see section Opening and closing the cover door)
The blast connection or nozzle tube has been removed (see section Blast
connection)
The supporting cage has been removed (see section Supporting cage)
Removal
On the supporting cage, splay the lengthways wires apart right and left
of the split using the mounting lever
Figure 20:
1
2
2.
3
Installation
Inlet nozzle
Supporting cage
Mounting lever
On the supporting cage, splay the lengthways wires apart right and left
of the split using the mounting lever
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
69
Operating instructions
Overhauling
Inlet nozzle
Figure 21:
1
2
Inlet nozzle
Supporting cage
Mounting lever
3.
Stop splaying the lengthways wires apart and remove the mounting
lever
70
2.
Figure 22:
Concluding tasks
1.
1.
2.
Close the cover door (see section Opening and closing the cover
door)
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating instructions
Overhauling
Fastening the inlet nozzle
7.7
Prerequisite
The cover door is open (see section Opening and closing the cover door)
The blast connection or nozzle tube has been removed (see section Blast
connection)
Removal
Figure 23:
1 Wing nut
2 Tension bar
3 Inlet nozzle
1.
2.
3.
Turn or move the tension bars so that they are no longer lying on the
inlet nozzles
The inlet nozzle fastening is now released
3
Installation
Prerequisites
The filter bag has been installed (see section Filter bag)
The supporting cage has been installed (see section Supporting cage)
The inlet nozzle has been installed (see section Inlet nozzle)
1.
2.
3.
3
Concluding tasks
1.
Mount the blast connection or nozzle tube (see section Blast connection)
2.
Close the cover door (see section Opening and closing the cover
door)
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
71
Operating instructions
Overhauling
Fastening the inlet nozzle
72
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating instructions
Overhauling
Valve chamber
7.8
Valve chamber
Introduction
The valve block, the diaphragm valves and the pilot boxes / pilot valves are
situated in the valve chamber. The latter is closed with a cover plate.
Execution
WARNING
Closure of the valve chamber's cover plate
Crushing of limbs
Open the valve chamber's cover plate more than 90
Wear protective equipment
1.
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
73
Operating instructions
Overhauling
Valve chamber
74
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating instructions
Overhauling
Diaphragm valve
7.9
Diaphragm valve
Figure 24:
1
2
3
4
Screw
Connection, compressed air hose
Diaphragm valve cap
Valve block
5
6
7
Membrane
Connection, valve tube nipple
Diaphragm valve housing
WARNING
Danger due to sudden release of pressurised parts or due to being
blasted with compressed air
Physical injuries
Wear protective equipment.
Depressurise valve block before performing work on diaphragm valve
Ensure pressurised parts are connected securely
Prerequisites
The following prerequisites must be met when working on the valve block's
diaphragm valves:
The shut-off valve (2) is closed.
The valve block has been depressurised by several cleaning cycles.
Membranes
Replacing membranes
1.
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
75
Operating instructions
Overhauling
Diaphragm valve
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Insert screws
Torque setting 20 Nm
The membrane has now been replaced.
76
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating instructions
Overhauling
Pilot valves
7.10
Pilot valves
General
NOTE
The seal must sit on the holder.
The reliable function of the pilot valves is ensured only if original spare parts
are used.
Figure 25:
Pilot valve
1 Valve
2 Coil
3 Pilot box housing/holder
4 Seal
Removal and
installation the
pilot valves
5 Nut
6 Hose
7 Coil connection
Pull off the hose (6) from the push-on connector by pushing back the
unlocking.
2.
Undo the fastening nut (5) and remove the whole valve (1) upwards.
3 The pilot valve is now removed.
3.
Insert the new valve (1) and screw it tight with the fastening nut (5).
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
77
Operating instructions
Overhauling
Pilot valves
78
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating instructions
Overhauling
Inspection cover
7.11
Inspection cover
General
Prerequisites
7.11.1
Figure 26:
1
Implementation
Seal
2.
Glue new seal (1) with silcone around the edge of the opening in the
dust collection area wall (2)
Cut off the end so it fits exactly
Inspection cover seal has now been replaced
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
79
Operating instructions
Overhauling
Inspection cover
80
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating instructions
Disassembly and disposal
General
8.1
General
Correct procedure
Filters and their components that have reached the end of their life circle due
to e.g. wear, corrosion, mechanical stress or fatigue must be dismantled and
disposed of professionally and correctly.
Responsibility
The owner and operator are responsible for disassembly and disposal of
components.
8.2
Disassembly
CAUTION
Live components
Death or serious injury from electric shock on contact
Work on live parts such as disconnecting a fan from its electrical connections may only be performed by specialist electricians.
CAUTION
Heavy components
Collapsing and falling components may lead to serious injuries
Use lifting gear
Secure heavy components before and during disassembly
Prerequisites
All supply lines and all disposal lines for the component to be disposed
of have been disconnected
8.2.1
Residual dust
Environmental
protection
Remove any toxic or environmentally harmful dust residue from the inside of
filters.
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
81
Operating instructions
Disassembly and disposal
Disassembly
8.2.2
Prerequisites
CAUTION
Cover door swinging shut
Death or severe bodily injury may occur if the cover door swings shut
Secure the cover door against swinging shut during work on the gas
spring too
Removal
2.
Release the folding spring bolt on the lower end of the gas spring
3.
3
Gas springs
Figure 27:
1
1.
Piston rod
Piston
2.
82
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating instructions
Disassembly and disposal
Disposal
WARNING
Flying chippings, oil splashes
Eye injuries due to chippings
Pollution due to oil
Environmental harm due to leaking oil
Wear protective equipment
Cover up work area
Collect any leaking oil
3 The gas spring is depressurised once the piston rod can be moved
freely by hand.
3.
4.
The gas spring has been depressurised and the oil has been removed
from the gas spring.
8.3
Disposal
Regulations
National and regional laws and guidelines must be observed for disposal.
8.3.1
Material groups
Separating materials
Filter media
8.3.2
NOTE
Improper disposal of operating resources
Environmental damage
Consult the manufacturer's instructions on correct disposal
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
83
Operating instructions
Disassembly and disposal
Disposal
Environmental
protection
8.3.3
Third-party documentation
When disposing of assemblies that have not been manufactured by IntensivFilter, the relevant instructions in the third-party documentation should be
observed.
8.3.4
Feedback
Notify responsible waste disposal authorities and other bodies of any disposals.
Please notify the manufacturer (Intensiv-Filter) about any disposals.
E-mail: linda.martin@intensiv-filter.com
84
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating instructions
Appendix A
Spare parts
Appendix A
9.1
Spare parts
9.1.1
Recommendation
9.1.2
General
Spare parts are generally ordered using the spare parts list.
Note on ordering
Due to the variety and special application of the sleeve row filters, not all
spare parts and wearing parts can be kept in stock in all quantities. For this
reason, we stress the importance of keeping an anticipatory stock (reserve).
Specifications for
the spare parts list
Commission no.
Machine no.
Filter type
Shipping address
(including inventory no., receiving person and installation site)
Delivery date
Filter
Rotary valve
Gear
Motor
Fan
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
85
Operating instructions
Appendix A
Additional information
9.2
Additional information
This operating instructions (BA) has appendices containing documentation
for the following units.
Filter
Valve block
Compressed air maintenance unit
Control unit
Dust discharge
systems
Rotary valve
Gear
Motor
Proximity switch
Components
Fan
Motor
86
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Notes
. 42555 Velbert-Langenberg
Tel. +49 2052 910-0 . Fax +49 2052 910-248
Vokuhlstrae 63
.
.
Row filter
IF-PJS-SR-030-01-04375-S-NNS-S
Vokuhlstrae 63
. 42555 Velbert-Langenberg
INTENSIV-Filter
GmbH&Co KG
Kunde:
Customer: Loesche GmbH
Cliente:
INTENSIV-Schlauch-Reihenfilter Typ:
INTENSIV-Sleeve-Series-Filter Type: IF-PJS-SR-030-01-04375-S-NNS-S
INTENSIV-Filtro de mangas tipo:
D-42555 Velbert
TEL.: 0049 2052/910-0
FAX: 0049 2052/910-248
ERSATZTEILZEICHNUNG
SPARE PARTS DRAWING
DIBUJO DE REPUESTO
Auftrags-Nr.:
Order-No.:
14148
N pedido:
DATUM
DATED
DATE
Machinen Nr.:
Machinery-No.:
N mquinas:
14.02.2012
34436
Blatt 1 von 3
Sheet 1 of 3
Page 1 de 3
INTENSIV-Filter
GmbH&Co KG
Kunde:
Customer: Loesche GmbH
Cliente:
INTENSIV-Schlauch-Reihenfilter Typ:
INTENSIV-Sleeve-Series-Filter Type: IF-PJS-SR-030-01-04375-S-NNS-S
INTENSIV-Filtro de mangas tipo:
D-42555 Velbert
TEL.: 0049 2052/910-0
FAX: 0049 2052/910-248
ERSATZTEILZEICHNUNG
SPARE PARTS DRAWING
DIBUJO DE REPUESTO
DATUM
DATED
DATE
Machinen Nr.:
Machinery-No.:
N mquinas:
Auftrags-Nr.:
Order-No.:
14148
N pedido:
Blatt 2 von 3
Sheet 2 of 3
Page 2 de 3
14.02.2012
34436
12
15
14
INTENSIV-Filter
GmbH&Co KG
Kunde:
Customer: Loesche GmbH
Cliente:
INTENSIV-Schlauch-Reihenfilter Typ:
INTENSIV-Sleeve-Series-Filter Type: IF-PJS-SR-030-01-04375-S-NNS-S
INTENSIV-Filtro de mangas tipo:
D-42555 Velbert
TEL.: 0049 2052/910-0
FAX: 0049 2052/910-248
ERSATZTEILZEICHNUNG
SPARE PARTS DRAWING
DIBUJO DE REPUESTO
Auftrags-Nr.:
Order-No.:
14148
N pedido:
DATUM
DATED
DATE
Machinen Nr.:
Machinery-No.:
N mquinas:
Blatt 3 von 3
Sheet 3 of 3
Page 3 de 3
14.02.2012
34436
16,17,18
36
INTENSIV-Filter
GmbH&Co KG
D-42555 Velbert
TEL.: 0049 2052/910-0
FAX: 0049 2052/910-248
ERSATZTEILLISTE
SPARE PARTS LIST
LISTA DE PIEZAS DE REPUESTO
Kunde:
Customer: Loesche GmbH
Cliente:
Schlauch-Reihenfilter Typ:
Auftrags-Nr.:
INTENSIV-Sleeve-Series-Filter Type: IF-PJS-SR-030-01-04375-S-NNS-S Order-No.: 14148
INTENSIV-Filtro de mangas tipo:
N pedido:
NR.
ERSATZTEIL NR.
DESIGNATION
NO.
SPARE PART NO.
DESIGNATION
NO.
Designacin
72873
DATUM
DATED
Blatt 1 von 3
Sheet 1 of 3
Page 1 de 3
14.02.2012
DATE
Maschinen-Nr.:
Machinery-No.:
N mquinas:
EINGEBAUT
INSTALLED
34436
BEMERKUNG
DESIGNATION
Cantidad
Einlaufdse
Inlet nozzle
Tobera de entrada
30
148x95x150
1006077
Spannstern, 4 armig
10
3x105x105
1006306
Spannstern, 2 armig
11
10x46x78
50469
Spezial nut
Tuerca de mariposa
21
M 8-5-A2K
1009335
30
123x2163
1009334
30
123x2200
1009337
Zwischenring
Intermediate ring
Anillo intermedio
30
124x32
8*
2000972
Schlauch
Bag
Manguera filtrante
30
ProTex PES
9*
51480
O-Ring
O-ring
junta trica
47x3, Viton
10
1005428
Dsenrohr
Jet tube
fila de injectores
48,3; PJS-030
Ersatzteilliste.XLS, Formblatt
INTENSIV-Filter
GmbH&Co KG
D-42555 Velbert
TEL.: 0049 2052/910-0
FAX: 0049 2052/910-248
ERSATZTEILLISTE
SPARE PARTS LIST
LISTA DE PIEZAS DE REPUESTO
Kunde:
Customer: Loesche GmbH
Cliente:
Schlauch-Reihenfilter Typ:
Auftrags-Nr.:
INTENSIV-Sleeve-Series-Filter Type: IF-PJS-SR-030-01-04375-S-NNS-S Order-No.: 14148
INTENSIV-Filtro de mangas tipo:
N pedido:
NR.
ERSATZTEIL NR.
DESIGNATION
NO.
SPARE PART NO.
DESIGNATION
NO.
Designacin
DATUM
DATED
Blatt 2 von 3
Sheet 2 of 3
Page 2 de 3
14.02.2012
DATE
Maschinen-Nr.:
Machinery-No.:
N mquinas:
EINGEBAUT
INSTALLED
34436
BEMERKUNG
DESIGNATION
Cantidad
11*
51513
Dichtung
Sealing
junta
50x70x2
12*
54239
Dichtung
Sealing
junta
5,05 m
13
72864
Membranventil
Diaphragm valve
valvula de membrana
DN 1 1/2"
14*
77284
Membrane
Diaphragm
valvula de membrana
1/4", VITON
15
2001168
Control unit
modulo de mando electrnio
RM-BV12-6 DP
16
88063
Wartungseinheit
Air set
unidad de mantenimiento
1/2", B74G-4GK-AP3-RMN
17
88178
Verschleiteilsatz
1/2", 4383-700
18
88179
Filterelement
Filter element
24 V
20 x 20 > 100C
elemento filtrante
26
2000735
Ersatzteilliste.XLS, Formblatt
Magnetventil
Solenoid valve
vlvula magntica
INTENSIV-Filter
GmbH&Co KG
D-42555 Velbert
TEL.: 0049 2052/910-0
FAX: 0049 2052/910-248
ERSATZTEILLISTE
SPARE PARTS LIST
LISTA DE PIEZAS DE REPUESTO
Kunde:
Customer: Loesche GmbH
Cliente:
Schlauch-Reihenfilter Typ:
Auftrags-Nr.:
INTENSIV-Sleeve-Series-Filter Type: IF-PJS-SR-030-01-04375-S-NNS-S Order-No.: 14148
INTENSIV-Filtro de mangas tipo:
N pedido:
NR.
ERSATZTEIL NR.
DESIGNATION
NO.
SPARE PART NO.
DESIGNATION
NO.
Designacin
35
57280
36
1007295
DATED
Blatt 3 von 3
Sheet 3 of 3
Page 3 de 3
14.02.2012
DATE
Maschinen-Nr.:
Machinery-No.:
N mquinas:
EINGEBAUT
INSTALLED
34436
BEMERKUNG
DESIGNATION
Cantidad
U-Rohrmanometer
U-tube manometer
manmetro en tubo U
1.500-0-1.500 PA
Gasfeder
Gas spring
resorte de gas
10-23-230-1-1000-355-585-A-WG
* Verschleiteil
* Part subject to wear
*Piezas de desgaste
Ersatzteilliste.XLS, Formblatt
DATUM
Notes
. 42555 Velbert-Langenberg
Tel. +49 2052 910-0 . Fax +49 2052 910-248
Vokuhlstrae 63
.
.
Rotary valve
ZS-F 190/5
Vokuhlstrae 63
. 42555 Velbert-Langenberg
Item
Piece
Denomination
EDV-No.
Weight
[kg]
[Piece]
Remark
76950
16
RD189,5xRD45x276,5
76951
4,2
RD45x348
bearing
76949
0,390
6208-2RS1
shaft seal
76948
0,035
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Part
subject
to wear
29
30
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_001_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Notes
. 42555 Velbert-Langenberg
Tel. +49 2052 910-0 . Fax +49 2052 910-248
Vokuhlstrae 63
.
.
Parts List
01 264 09 97
EN
Page 1 / 3
EG
03.08.2011
2-stage
3-stage
When ordering spare parts always quote nameplate data with serial number and designation with part number!
Mount-on gear units have motors, variable speed gear units or special input shaft assemblies mounted on the drive end. For parts see
appropriate parts list.
Copyright reserved! All rights reserved according to DIN ISO 16016.
SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Postfach 3023. D-76642 Bruchsal Tel. (07251) 75-0. Fax (07251) 75-1970. http://www.sew.de
Parts List
01 264 09 97
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
7
7
8
8
8
9
9
Description
Pinion
Gear
Pinion shaft
Gear
Pinion shaft
Gear
Output shaft
Output shaft
Output Shaft (inch)
Key
Key
Key (inch)
Oil seal
Oil seal
10
10
Oil seal
Oil seal
11
14
14
16
16
16
16
17
19
20
20
22
23
24
25
29
31
32
33
34
35
37
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
45
47
59
Additional specifications
EN
Page 2 / 3
EG
03.08.2011
Part No.
06413900
00452548
06413919
00100226
13228188
08069212
00106569
0017565X
Qty.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
00106224
00174882
1
1
00104965
00110450
00110256
06413838
00438073
06413854
06413870
06413927
00115991
00130303
00136239
06413382
00124036
01675966
00117374
09102558
00114839
06413935
00102695
13241265
00102652
00105058
13295128
00103152
00103152
09102558
00130087
00104744
00134899
00104744
00130087
0011426X
1
6
6
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
*
*
*
*
*
*
stainless; ASEPTICplus
stainless; ASEPTICplus
25x50 mm
25x50 mm
1,000x1,97 in.
DIN6885-1 A8x7x40 +C
DIN6885-1 A8x7x40 Niro
W4190 B1/4x1/4x1-5/16 +C
DIN AS35x47x7-NBR
W AS35x47x7-FKM
* Gearing parts have embossed part numbers. These must always be quoted!
X) if required
When ordering spare parts always quote nameplate data with serial number and designation with part number!
Mount-on gear units have motors, variable speed gear units or special input shaft assemblies mounted on the drive end. For parts see
appropriate parts list.
Copyright reserved! All rights reserved according to DIN ISO 16016.
SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Postfach 3023. D-76642 Bruchsal Tel. (07251) 75-0. Fax (07251) 75-1970. http://www.sew.de
X)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
X)
1
1
1
1
1
5
Parts List
01 264 09 97
No.
61
61
81
88
100
101
102
131
181
515
516
517
521
522
523
530
531
Description
Circlip
Circlip
O-ring
Circlip
Gearcase cover
Hex head screw
Gasket
Closing cap
Closing cap
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Additional specifications
2-stage
3-stage
2-stage
2-stage
W4300 1-37x7
W4300 1-28x7
DIN988 19x26x0,1-St
DIN988 19x26x0,3-St
DIN988 19x26x0,5-St
DIN988 25x35x0,1-St
DIN988 25x35x0,3-St
DIN988 25x35x0,5-St
DIN988 16x22x0,1-St
DIN988 16x22x0,3-St
EN
Page 3 / 3
EG
03.08.2011
Part No.
00102687
00102660
00108537
00102741
06413951
00110221
0641396X
00124966
00106887
00113301
00113433
00104140
00103691
00103934
00104167
00123439
00123447
X) if required
When ordering spare parts always quote nameplate data with serial number and designation with part number!
Mount-on gear units have motors, variable speed gear units or special input shaft assemblies mounted on the drive end. For parts see
appropriate parts list.
Copyright reserved! All rights reserved according to DIN ISO 16016.
SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Postfach 3023. D-76642 Bruchsal Tel. (07251) 75-0. Fax (07251) 75-1970. http://www.sew.de
Qty.
1
1
1
1
1
6
1
1
1
X)
X)
X)
X)
X)
X)
X)
X)
Parts List
08 114 07 05
AC motor
DR.71S+M/FG/FM/2W/C/AL/LN/Z
Gear unit version
EN
Page 1 / 3
EM
13.07.2011
Parts List
08 114 07 05
AC motor
DR.71S+M/FG/FM/2W/C/AL/LN/Z
Gear unit version
No.
1
2
2
3
3
4
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
9
9
9
10
11
12
13
13
16
22
30
30
32
35
35
35
36
36
36
41
42
42
44
100
100
100
100
100
100
103
103
103
103
103
103
106
106
107
108
109
Description
Rotor
Snap ring
Snap ring
Key
Key
Key
Flange
Flange
Flange
Flange
Flange
Flange
Flange
Screw plug
Screw plug
Screw plug
Circlip
Deep groove ball bearing
Circlip
Machine screw
Machine screw
Stator
Hex head screw
Oil seal
Oil seal
Circlip
Fan Guard
Fan Guard
Fan Guard
Fan
Aluminum fan
High Inert.Flywheel
Equalizing ring
B bearing end shield
B bearing end shield
Deep groove ball bearing
Hexagon nut
Hexagon nut
Hexagon nut
Hexagon nut
Hexagon nut
Hexagon nut
Stud
Stud
Stud
Stud
Stud
Stud
Oil seal
Oil seal
Oel finger
Nameplate
Grooved Pin
Additional specifications
EN
Page 2 / 3
EM
13.07.2011
Part No.
*
for pinion shaft end 10 b)
for pinion shaft end 12 b)
for pinion shaft end 10
for pinion shaft end 12
2W
AL; a)
GG; a)
AL; a)
GG; a)
a)
a)
a)
for flange FG100, FG130 a)
for flange FG165, FG215 a)
for flange FG265 a)
a)
a)
a)
DR.71S
DR.71M
W4173 SW10x1-FS
W4173 SW11x1-FS
DIN6885-1 A2x2x12 +C
DIN6885-1 A3x3x14 +C
DIN6885-1 A4x4x16 +C
FG100 D120
FG100 D120
FG130 D160
FG130 D160
FG165 D200
FG215 D250
FG265 D300
W4085 M10x1-St-ADC3K
W4085 M12x1,5-St-ADC3K
W4085 M22x1,5-St-ADC3K
DIN983 17x1-FS
6303-2Z-C3-K08
DIN472 47x1,75-FS
W4018 M5x131-6.8-ADB3
W4018 M5x156-6.8-ADB3
00115193
00115207
00100005
00100692
00135232
01844768
13613014
01844784
13613030
13615106
13612662
13615122
0011426X
00114308
00114316
0011460X
13236563
00103187
13237160
13237179
EN1665 M5x10-8.8-A2F
W BAOFSF16x28x6/7-NBR
W BAOFSF16x28x6/7-FKM
DIN471 15x1-FS
6203-2Z-C3-K08
EN1661 M6-8-A2F
ISO4032 M6-8-St-A2F
EN1661 M8-8-A2F
ISO4032 M8-8-St-A2F
ISO4032 M10-8-St-A2F
ISO4032 M12-8-St-A2F
DIN939 M6x18-8.8-A2F
W4061 M6x16-8.8-A2F
DIN939 M8x20-8.8-A2F
DIN835 M8x20-8.8-A2F-MV
DIN939 M10x22-8.8-A2F
DIN939 M12x30-8.8-A2F
W A17x30x7-NBR
W A17x30x7-FKM-FKO
W4291 17-A2F
13237616
13262041
13262351
00102679
13610503
13614487
13611690
13611550
13611968
13611593
00115894
13626132
13611615
13236601
19052677
00101982
13309722
00101990
00102008
00102016
00134074
00131687
00100749
13262572
00118451
00100811
00106062
13225820
00116602
ISO8746 2x4-A-Niro
00107646
2W
LN
AL
Z
D=101
D=112
J=0,00213 kgm
W4253 33x39,1x0,5
AL
GG, only for Production in Brazil
for flange FG100 AL a)
for flange FG100 GG a)
for flange FG130 AL a)
for flange FG130 GG a)
for flange FG165 a)
for flange FG215, FG265 a)
for flange FG100 a)
for flange FG100 gear unit size 27, W37
for flange FG130 a)
for flange FG130 gear unit size W47
for flange FG165 a)
for flange FG215, FG265 a)
a)
a) for 2-pole version
a)
* order-dependently
a) not necessary with W20/W30/R07/R17
b) not necessary with W20/W30
Refer to spare parts list for parts of the bed plate kit 08832__10
When ordering spare parts always quote nameplate data with serial number and designation with part number!
Copyright reserved! All rights reserved according to DIN ISO 16016.
SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Postfach 3023. D-76642 Bruchsal Tel. (07251) 75-0. Fax (07251) 75-1970. http://www.sew.de
Qty.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
4
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
1
1
1
2
Parts List
08 114 07 05
AC motor
DR.71S+M/FG/FM/2W/C/AL/LN/Z
Gear unit version
No.
111
112
112
113
115
116
117
118
119
123
129
129
131
132
134
156
262
392
611
705
706
707
998
1234
1234
1234
Description
Gasket for lower part
Terminal box lower part
Terminal box lower part
Screw
Terminal Block
Terminal clip
Screw
Lock washer
Screw
Screw
Screw plug
Screw plug
Gasket for cover
Terminal Box Cover
Screw plug
Reference Plate
Terminal clip
Gasket
Drain hole plug
Protection canopy
Distance support
Pan head screw
Synthetic grease
Bed plate kit
Bed plate kit
Bed plate kit
Additional specifications
EN
Page 3 / 3
EM
13.07.2011
1x M25x1,5 ; 1x M16x1,5
2x NPT 1/2"-14
W4041 CE-M5x16-TX-A2F-GM1
W4720 KTM4-4.08-AS-KB-
W4041 DE-S-M5x16-A2F-GM1
W4146 5-A2F
W4041 CE-M5x16-TX-SZ-A2F-GM1
W4041 DE-S-M5x16-A2F-GM1
W4411 M25x1,5-PA6.6GF30W4411 M20x1,5-PA6.6GF30-
for TF version
2 pole
DH
C
C
C
for Item no. 30
DR.71S FM
DR.71M FM
DR.71M FM80M
W4411 M16x1,5-PA6.6GF30W4499 - TF
Part No.
01355635
13610570
13612018
00130591
13226193
00104426
13237136
00118206
00130591
13237136
00131385
13256300
01355627
13611763
00131334
01366815
01823183
13740369
13618865
13611623
13618598
13262599
04963458
17534488
17534585
17534682
* order-dependently
X) if required
a) not necessary with W20/W30/R07/R17
b) not necessary with W20/W30
Refer to spare parts list for parts of the bed plate kit 08832__10
When ordering spare parts always quote nameplate data with serial number and designation with part number!
Copyright reserved! All rights reserved according to DIN ISO 16016.
SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Postfach 3023. D-76642 Bruchsal Tel. (07251) 75-0. Fax (07251) 75-1970. http://www.sew.de
Qty.
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
4
4
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
*
1
4
4
X)
1
1
1
S
N
O
PJS
Translation of the original operating instructions
en-GB
Valve block
Vokuhlstrae 63
. 42555 Velbert-Langenberg
Operating manual
General .....................................................................3
Commissioning .......................................................6
Installation ...............................................................9
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_Rev_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating manual
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_Rev_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating manual
General
General
Rentention of documents
You must take great care to retain the operating manual and the declaration
of conformity supplied with it.
The positions described here only refer to the essential requirements for a
pressure vessel. Notes applying to all equipment are treated in a separate
operating manual for the filtering installation.
The pressure vessel is labelled by the plate on the vessel and by the CE
label.
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_Rev_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating manual
Design characteristics
Design characteristics
Component: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Valve block
Design: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30l; 6 circuit points 1
Type of fluid:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Air or nitrogen
Type of strain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Cyclical
Permitted number of stress cycles: . 2 million (rated for endurance strength)
Inner pressure deviation range: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 bar
Time period for decrease of pressure: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ca. 0.1 s
Content: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 liter
Permissible operating overpressure: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 bar
Calculated overpressure: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 bar
Permissible operating temperature: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -10/+50C
Calculated temperature: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50C
Capacity usage of the permitted calculated tension: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85%
Material: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0570/1.0038
Wall thickness allowance c1: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . permitted minus tolerance
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . accordance with the DIN ormanufacturer's specifications
Wear and tear allowance c2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 mm
Test overpressure: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7 bar
Testing medium:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . air
The effects of earthquakes, wind, snow and frost on the vessel were not
taken into consideration in the design of the vessel.
The effects of external fire or similar sources of heat were not taken into consideration in the design of the vessel.
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_Rev_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating manual
General safety information
NOTE
It is not permissible to weld additional components to the vessel or to otherwise modify vessel construction.
You must ensure that the installation conditions are adhered to by applying
suitable safety devices, regulations or procedures.
Notes on dangers
of incorrect operation
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_Rev_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating manual
Commissioning
Commissioning
Personell
Inspections
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_Rev_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating manual
Mode of operation
Mode of operation
The vessel is designed for a cyclic pressure load in accordance with the technical data.
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_Rev_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating manual
Operational safety and maintenance
Recurring checks
For recurring checks, please adhere to the regulations which apply in the
country of operation.
It is recommended, however, that external checks are carried out at least
every 2 years and that internal checks are carried out every 5 years, whereby
the condition of the walls and weld seams which are subject to pressure
should be checked.
The competent operator may extend or shorten the intervals at which checks
are carried out in accordance with the prevailing conditions and operational
experience.
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_Rev_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating manual
Installation
Installation
The assembly and transportation of the vessel may only be carried out by
suitably trained personnel. During assembly and transportation (including lifting), the vessel may only be subject to its own weight. In addition, the regulations which apply in these cases must be observed.
Furnish the valve block with valves which are suitable for the maximum operating pressure.
The fastening of the vessel is carried out with threaded or flange connections
between the valve tubes and the nozzle pipe connection.
Screw connections are to be tightened with the corresponding torque.
Connections
onside
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_Rev_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating manual
Installation
10
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_Rev_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Notes
. 42555 Velbert-Langenberg
Tel. +49 2052 910-0 . Fax +49 2052 910-248
Vokuhlstrae 63
.
.
B74G
EXCELON 74
Filter/Regulator
3/8", 1/2", 3/4" Port Sizes
EXCELON design allows in-line or modular
installation
Quick release bayonet bowl
Highly visible, prismatic liquid level indicator lens
Full flow gauge ports
Balanced valve design minimizes effect of variation in
the inlet pressure on the outlet pressure
Modular installations with EXCELON 72, 73, and 74
series can be made to suit particular applications
Technical Data
Fluid: Compressed air
Maximum pressure:
Transparent bowl: 10 bar (150 psig)
Metal bowl: 17 bar (250 psig)
Operating temperature*:
Transparent bowl: -20 to 50C (0 to 125F)
Metal bowl: -20 to 80C (0 to 175F)
* Air supply must be dry enough to avoid ice formation at temperatures below +2C
(+35F).
4/98
Materials:
Body: Aluminum
Bonnet: Aluminum
Valve: Brass
Bowl:
Transparent: Polycarbonate with steel
bowl guard
Metal: Aluminum
Metal bowl liquid level indicator lens:
Transparent nylon
Element: Sintered plastic
Elastomers: Neoprene and Nitrile
Ordering Information
See Ordering Information on the following
pages.
ISO Symbols
N/AL.8.200.300.01
B74G
100
OUTLET PRESSURE
OUTLET PRESSURE
100
6
80
60
40
6
80
60
40
20
bar g
psig
bar g
psig
FLOW CHARACTERISTICS
20
0
0
0
20
40
40
80
60
120
80
160
100
200
dm3/s
scfm
20
40
40
60
80
AIR FLOW
120
80
160
100
dm3/s
200
scfm
AIR FLOW
Ordering Information. Models listed include ISO G parallel threads, knob adjustment, automatic drain, metal bowl with liquid level
indicator, 40 m element, relieving diaphragm and 0,3 to 10 bar (5 to 150 psig) outlet pressure adjustment range*.
Model Number
B74G-3GK-AD3-RMN
B74G-4GK-AD3-RMN
B74G-6GK-AD3-RMN
Weight kg (lb)
1,19 (2.62)
1,17 (2.59)
1,16 (2.55)
Typical flow with 10 bar (150 psig) inlet pressure, 6,3 bar (90 psig) set pressure and a 1 bar (15 psig) droop from set.
B 7 4 G - - -
Alternative Models
Port Size
3/8"
1/2"
3/4"
Substitute
3
4
6
Threads
PTF
ISO Rc taper
ISO G parallel
Substitute
A
B
G
Adjustment
Knob
T-bar
Substitute
K
T
Drain
Automatic
Manual, 1/4 turn
Substitute
A
Q
N/AL.8.200.300.02
Gauge
With
Without
Substitute
G
N
Outlet Pressure
Adjustment Range*
Substitute
0,3 to 4 bar (5 to 60 psig)
F
0,3 to 10 bar (5 to 150 psig)
M
0,7 to 17 bar (10 to 250 psig)**
S
Diaphragm
Relieving
Non relieving
Substitute
R
N
Element
5 m
25 m
40 m
Substitute
1
2
3
Bowl
Substitute
Metal with liquid level indicator
D
Transparent with guard
P
** Units with 17 bar (250 psig) outlet pressure range are available only
with the T-bar adjustment; therefore substitute T at the 7th digit and S at
the 12th position.
4/98
B74G
Accessories
Quikclamp and
Quikclamp Wall Bracket
Panel Nut
4324-50
4314-52
4348-89
4355-51
Seal Wire: 2117-01
50 mm
R1/4
Pressure Gauge Connection
R1/8
Connection
1/4 PTF
Connection
18-013-011
18-013-013
18-013-014
18-013-208
18-013-209
18-013-210
80 (3.15)
37 (1.45)
74 (2.89)
Optional
Gauge
56 (2.20)
Dimensions mm (inches)
151 (5.95)
177 (6.95)
246 (9.69) *
127 (4.98)
43 (1.69)
161 (6.35)
230 (9.06) *
31 (1.24)
50 (2.00)
Automatic Drain
Manual Drain
4/98
N/AL.8.200.300.03
B74G
Bracket Mounting
Mounting Bracket
69 (2.72)
Port CL
51 (2.01)
82,5 (3.25)
101 (3.98)
Port C
L
79 (3.11)
51 (2.00)
24 (0.95)
61 (2.40)
20 (0.77)
Port C
L
6 (0.24)
25 (1.00)
4 (0.16)
50 (1.97)
5 (0.20)
37 (1.46)
Part Number
4324-50
4314-52
Service Kits
Item
Service kit
Replacement elements
Liquid level lens kit
Replacement drains
Type
Relieving
Non relieving
5 m
25 m
40 m
Prismatic
Automatic (1/8 NPT outlet)
Automatic (G 1/8 outlet)
Manual quarter turn
Part Number
4383-700
4383-701
4338-04
4338-07
4338-05
4380-050
3000-10
3000-97
619-50
Warning
These products are intended for use in industrial compressed air
systems only. Do not use these products where pressures and temperatures
can exceed those listed under Technical Data.
Before using these products with fluids other than those specified, for
non-industrial applications, life-support systems, or other applications not
within published specifications, consult Norgren.
Through misuse, age, or malfunction, components used in fluid power
systems can fail in various modes. The system designer is warned to
consider the failure modes of all component parts used in fluid power
systems and to provide adequate safeguards to prevent personal injury or
damage to equipment in the event of such failure.
System designers must provide a warning to end users in the
system instructional manual if protection against a failure mode
cannot be adequately provided.
System designers and end users are cautioned to review specific
warnings found in instruction sheets packed and shipped with these
products.
Water vapor will pass through these units and will condense into liquid
if air temperature drops in the downstream system. Install an air dryer if
water condensation could have a detrimental effect on the application.
N/AL.8.200.300.04
4/98
Documentation
RM-BV 12 DP
Filter control
Documentation RM-BV 12 DP
Table of contents
1 Safety instructions .....................................................................................................................................3
2 Device description .....................................................................................................................................3
2.1 Function in "as delivered" condition................................................................................................3
3 Design versions .........................................................................................................................................4
4 Assembly ...................................................................................................................................................5
5 Indicating and configuration elements / electrical connections .................................................................8
6 Parameter setting ....................................................................................................................................13
6.1 Parameter list................................................................................................................................14
7 Operating modes .....................................................................................................................................15
7.1 Differential pressure controlled cleaning (parameters 05, 06)......................................................15
7.2 Permanent cleaning (parameter 05).............................................................................................15
7.3 Downtime (parameters 09, 10) .....................................................................................................15
7.4 Forced cleaning (parameter 11) ...................................................................................................15
7.5 Stopping a running cleaning via the "Stop" input..........................................................................15
8 Technical specifications...........................................................................................................................16
Regulations
VDE 0160
EN 50178
2004/108/ EC
Legends
Important note
Important warning
RDN 10000416
04.10.2011
Documentation RM-BV 12 DP
1 Safety instructions
Improper installation of the RM-BV 12 DP or associated equipment may cause the failure of the device,
serious or even fatal injuries. In addition to general safety rules for equipment in industrial electrical
installations pay particular attention to the following points:
-
The RM-BV 12 DP must only be installed by qualified persons according to the provisions of the
standards IEC 364 and DIN VDE 0105 for electrical equipment.
All applicable laws, conditions, rules and regulations governing the installation of electrical equipment
must be observed.
Equipment with protection rating IP00 without covers must only be configured by authorised expert
staff when disconnected and whilst observing the local safety and accident prevention rules.
Switch off the supply voltage before replacing the RM-BV 12 DP or components connected to
it. Failure to do so may cause equipment damage.
2 Device description
The RM-BV 12 DP filter controller is used to control solenoid valves on filtering separators. One
RM-BV 12 DP can control up to 12 solenoid valves featuring a rated voltage of 24 VDC.
2.1 Function in "as delivered" condition
The start input for downtime cleaning (terminals 25, 26) is factory-bridged. Cleaning starts when the
filters differential pressure p has reached the "Press.thresh." value (factory setting: 10 mbar). The
solenoid valves are controlled one after the after. By cleaning the differential pressure drops after a
certain period of time. When the differential pressure has reached the value Press.thresh. minus
dP Hysteresis (factory setting: 4 mbar), i.e. the differential pressure is 10 mbar - 4 mbar = 6 mbar,
cleaning stops.
If a different function is desired or additional functions shall be activated, the parameter setting of the
"Parameterisation keys" on page 11 and section
RM-BV 12 DP must be changed. For this, refer to
6 "Parameter setting" on page 13.
RDN 10000416
04.10.2011
Documentation RM-BV 12 DP
3 Design versions
RDN 10000416
04.10.2011
Documentation RM-BV 12 DP
4 Assembly
RDN 10000416
04.10.2011
Documentation RM-BV 12 DP
RDN 10000416
04.10.2011
Documentation RM-BV 12 DP
RDN 10000416
04.10.2011
Documentation RM-BV 12 DP
RDN 10000416
04.10.2011
Item number
in figure 8
Documentation RM-BV 12 DP
Description
Supply voltage
There are separate controller models for the supply voltages 230 V AC / 110 V AC and
24 V DC. Before connecting the supply voltage, check whether the rated voltage of the
controller matches with the supply voltage (see nameplate).
24 VDC version
Valve outputs
It is possible to connect up to 12 solenoid valves featuring a rated voltage of 24 VDC to the
terminals 1 ... 24.
Start input
The start input for downtime cleaning (terminals 25, 26) is factory-bridged. When a contact (NC)
connected to this input is opened, the set downtime cycles are started, beginning with the pulse
time. Downtime cleaning is resumed with the valve following to the last controlled valve. The
pause time during downtime can be set by the "10 DT pause" parameter.
RDN 10000416
04.10.2011
Item number
in figure 8
Documentation RM-BV 12 DP
Description
Stop input
When a contact (NO) connected to the input (terminals 27, 28) is closed, a running cleaning
process (p-controlled cleaning, permanent cleaning and forced cleaning) is immediately stopped.
When the contact opens again, cleaning is resumed with the valve that follows to the last operated
valve. Active downtime cycles remain unaffected by the stop input.
Cleaning output
The potential-free relay output "Cleaning", terminals 29 (NO), 30 (COM) and 31 (NC), is active
during a running cleaning process (p-controlled cleaning, permanent cleaning, downtime
cleaning and forced cleaning).
Alarm output
The potential-free "Alarm" relay output, terminals 32 (NO), 33 (COM) and 34 (NC) is used for selfmonitoring of the RM-BV 12 DP. This output is energised during trouble-free operation. Following
events will cause the relay contact to drop off:
LED "ON"
The LED "ON" lights when the supply voltage is applied. This LED blinks during the downtime
cleaning.
LED "Stop"
The "Stop" LED lights when the "Stop" input is energised (refer to
"Stop input").
LED "ON"
Lights when the supply voltage is applied.
RDN 10000416
10
04.10.2011
Item number
in figure 8
Documentation RM-BV 12 DP
Description
LED "Service"
Blinks when the set service hours have expired.
LED "Alarm"
Blinks when one of the following alarms occurs:
p max alarm (the set "p max alarm" switch point is reached)
p pre-alarm (the set "p pre-alarm" switch point is reached)
Valve alarm (broken wire or short-circuit on the valve output indicated by a number on the
display)
On the display, clear text indicates the alarm type. The valve alarm remains stored.
With the key, you can clear (acknowledge) the alarm. The "dP max alarm" and
"dP pre-alarm" messages are not stored. They are automatically cleared when the
pressure values drops under the "p max alarm" or "p pre-alarm" switch points again.
Parameterisation keys
Parameter selection: Press
Simultaneous pressing of the key and the key longer than 3 seconds. Then, select your
desired parameter by short pressing on the keys (scroll up) or (scroll down).
Parameter value setting:
After parameter selection, by simultaneous pressing of the keys and longer than
3 seconds. Then, set your desired value by short pressing on the keys (scroll up) or
(scroll down). Then, confirm the set value by simultaneous pressing of the keys and
longer than 3 seconds. The new value is stored. You can select further parameters for setting
or checking by short pressing on the keys -or .
Returning to the "Operation" mode: Press
Simultaneous short actuation of the keys - and .
The program automatically returns to the "Operation" mode when no key has been
pressed for 1 minute.
RDN 10000416
11
04.10.2011
Item number
in figure 8
Documentation RM-BV 12 DP
Description
4-20 mA output
4-20 mA output (4 ... 20 mA
max. 500
RDN 10000416
12
04.10.2011
Documentation RM-BV 12 DP
6 Parameter setting
RDN 10000416
13
04.10.2011
Documentation RM-BV 12 DP
Parameter
3
4
Meaning
Factory setting
Setting range
D, GB, F, E
Acc. to order
2 - 12
10 s
5 - 99 s
100 ms
50 - 200 ms
01 01 Language
02 02 No. of valves
Number of valves
03 03 Interval
Pause time
04 04 Pulsetime
05 05 Press.thresh.
p ON
10 mbar
01, 5 - 20 mbar
06 06 dP Hysteresis
p OFF
4 mbar
0.5 - 8 mbar
07 07 dP pre-alarm
0 mbar1
01, 10 - 19 mbar
08 08 dP max alarm
20 mbar
01, 15 - 30 mbar
09 09 Downtime cyc.
0 - 11
10 10 DT pause
5s
5 - 30 s
11 11 Forced cycle
0 min1
12 12 Relay funct.
/dP+valve alarm2
4 functions2
13 13 Operation hrs
14 14 Service hrs.
Service interval4
25000 h
mbar
mbar, Pa,
inch H2O, hPa
15
Display text
15 Maintenance
acknowledge
16 16 dP unit
17 17 Software vers
Software version
0 = function deactivated
dP+valve alarm (contact closes at p alarm and valve alarm),
dP alarm (contact only closes at p alarm),
/dP+valve alarm (contact opens at p alarm and valve alarm),
/dP alarm (contact only opens at p alarm),
The operating hour counter runs when the supply voltage is applied.
The service hour counter runs when the differential pressure p is 2 mbar or higher and the "14 Service hrs." parameter is not
set to "0".
RDN 10000416
14
04.10.2011
Documentation RM-BV 12 DP
7 Operating modes
7.1 Differential pressure controlled cleaning (parameters 05, 06)
In "Operation" mode, the filter's current differential pressure p is displayed in the text display (row 2) of
the p module. Cleaning starts when the differential pressure has reached the value "05 Press.thresh.".
The solenoid valves are controlled one after the other using the interval set in parameter 03. By cleaning
the differential pressure drops after a certain period of time. When the differential pressure has reached
the value "05 Press.thresh." minus "06 dP Hysteresis", the current cleaning cycle is run up to the end.
Then, the cleaning process stops.
RDN 10000416
15
04.10.2011
Documentation RM-BV 12 DP
8 Technical specifications
Item
Data
Terminals
Supply voltage
Outputs for
solenoid valves
Signal input
Signal outputs
35 (L)
37 (N)
38 (PE)
36 (L)
37 (N)
38 (PE)
35 (-)
37 (+)
1 (valve 1)
3 (valve 2)
5 (valve 3)
to
23 (valve 12)
2, 4, 6 24 (COM)
25, 26
27, 28
29, 30, 31
32, 33, 34
M1, M2
Fuse
Temperature range
Weight
Installation height
Measuring range
Dimensions
M3, M4
Disclaimer
The contents of this documentation has been verified for correctness and completeness. Nevertheless, errors can not be excluded
so that we cannot guarantee the correctness of this information. Subject to alterations at any time.
RDN 10000416
16
04.10.2011
I N S T R U C T I O N S
O P E R A T I N G
Rotary valve
ZS-F 190/5
Translation of the original operating instructions
en-GB
Vokuhlstrae 63
. 42555 Velbert-Langenberg
Operating instructions
2.1
2.2
Function .................................................................................. 6
Commissioning .......................................................9
Maintenance ..........................................................11
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_Rev_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating instructions
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_Rev_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating instructions
Technical data
Technical data
Operating data
Sealing
Geared motor
Proximity switch
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_Rev_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating instructions
Technical data
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_Rev_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating instructions
Construction features
Constructive design
Construction features
Rotary valves type ZS are used on filter plants, separators, hoppers, screw
conveyors and a wide range of applications where a continuous discharge of
dust or granular material is required, at the same time providing an air seal.
2.1
Constructive design
Figure 1:
1 Housing
2 Rotary wheel
3 Shaft
4 Bearing cover
In the housing (1) is a rotary wheel (2) which has 6 blades forming segments.
The rotary wheel (2) is keyed to the shaft (3) and the bearing covers (4) bolt
to each end of the housing to form an air tight unit.
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_Rev_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating instructions
Construction features
Function
2.2
Function
The dust falls into a rotary wheel segment formed by the dividing vanes in the
rotary wheel and is moved to the bottom of the valve by the rotation of the
rotary wheel, with the vanes forming a seal against the housing wall. The dust
can be discharged when the segment points downwards. As a general rule,
the valve will operate on a continuous basis. The filling level depends on the
type of dust and the rotary wheel speed.
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_Rev_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating instructions
Erection of the rotary valve
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_Rev_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating instructions
Erection of the rotary valve
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_Rev_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating instructions
Commissioning
Commissioning
The following items must be checked before carrying out the commissioning:
Oil level in the gear box (see the separate instructions supplied by the
manufacturer)
Ensure that there are no installation residues left in the conveyor unit or
in the valve itself.
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_Rev_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating instructions
Commissioning
10
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_Rev_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating instructions
Maintenance
Maintenance
Rotary valve
Gears
Gears are delivered lubricated and ready for use. For lubrication intervals
refer to the lubricating point list and manufacturer's lubricating instructions.
NOTE
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_Rev_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
11
Operating instructions
Maintenance
12
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_Rev_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating instructions
Spare parts and customer service
Storing spare parts
6.1
6.2
Comm. No.
Job No.
required quantity
delivery date
Note that due to the variety and special application of the rotary valve not all
spare parts and parts subject-to-wear can be stored in unlimited quantities.
For this reason we urgently recommend keeping an anticipatory stock.
We can only guarantee original spare parts delivered by INTENSIV-FILTER.
6.3
Customer service
Contact INTENSIV-FILTER customer service for all problems which effect
the screw conveyorsrotary valves.
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_Rev_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
13
Operating instructions
Spare parts and customer service
Spare part and customer service addresses
6.4
14
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_Rev_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Operating instructions
Separate documentation
Separate documentation
1. Gear motor
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_Rev_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
15
Operating instructions
Separate documentation
16
Intensiv-Filter
14148_A03_Rev_en-GB_Item-No 1.3.7.81
Notes
. 42555 Velbert-Langenberg
Tel. +49 2052 910-0 . Fax +49 2052 910-248
Vokuhlstrae 63
.
.
Gear Units
R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Edition 06/2010
16970411 / EN
Contents
Contents
1
1.2
1.3
1.4
Exclusion of liability..................................................................................... 6
1.5
Copyright..................................................................................................... 6
Preface........................................................................................................ 7
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
Transport..................................................................................................... 9
2.7
Extended storage........................................................................................ 9
2.8
Installation/assembly................................................................................... 9
2.9
Startup/operation ........................................................................................ 9
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
Mechanical Installation..................................................................................... 17
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
Startup................................................................................................................ 61
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Contents
Inspection/Maintenance ................................................................................... 63
6.1
6.2
Inspection/maintenance intervals.............................................................. 64
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
10
7.2
7.3
Key............................................................................................................ 83
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
8.2
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
General Information
How to use the operating instructions
General Information
1.1
The operating instructions are an integral part of the product and contain important information on operation and service. The operating instructions are written for all employees who assemble, install, startup, and service this product.
The operating instructions must be accessible and legible. Make sure that persons responsible for the system and its operation, as well as persons who work independently
on the unit, have read through the operating instructions carefully and understood them.
Consult SEW-EURODRIVE if you have any questions or if you require further information.
1.2
1.2.1
1.2.2
Meaning
Consequences if disregarded
DANGER
Imminent danger
WARNING
CAUTION
Minor injuries
NOTICE
INFORMATION
SIGNAL WORD
Type and source of danger.
Possible consequence(s) if disregarded.
1.2.3
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
General Information
Rights to claim under limited warranty
1.3
1.4
Exclusion of liability
You must comply with the information contained in these operating instructions to ensure safe operation of the R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W series gear units and
to achieve the specified product characteristics and performance requirements.
SEW-EURODRIVE does not assume liability for injury to persons or damage to equipment or property resulting from non-observance of these operating instructions. In such
cases, any liability for defects is excluded.
1.5
Copyright
2010 - SEW-EURODRIVE. All rights reserved.
Copyright law prohibits the unauthorized duplication, modification, distribution, and use
of this document, in whole or in part.
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Safety Notes
Preface
Safety Notes
The following basic safety notes are intended to prevent injury to persons and damage
to property. The operator must ensure that the basic safety notes are read and observed. Make sure that persons responsible for the system and its operation, as well as
persons who work independently on the unit, have read through the operating instructions carefully and understood them. If you are unclear about any of the information in
this documentation, please contact SEW-EURODRIVE.
2.1
Preface
The following safety notes are primarily concerned with the use of gear units. If using
gearmotors, please also refer to the safety notes for motors in the corresponding operating instructions.
Also observe the supplementary safety notes in the individual sections of these operating instructions.
2.2
General information
DANGER
During operation, the motors, gearmotors and brakes can have live, bare and movable
or rotating parts as well as hot surfaces, depending on their enclosure.
Severe or fatal injuries.
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Safety Notes
Target group
2.3
Target group
Any mechanical work may only be performed by adequately qualified personnel. Qualified personnel in this context are persons who are familiar with the setup, mechanical
installation, trouble shooting and maintenance for this product. Further, they are qualified as follows:
Any electronic work may only be performed by adequately qualified electricians. Qualified electricians in this context are persons who are familiar with the electronic installation, startup, trouble shooting and maintenance for this product. Further, they are qualified as follows:
All work in further areas of transportation, storage, operation and waste disposal must
only be carried out by persons who are trained appropriately.
All qualified personnel must wear appropriate protective clothing.
2.4
Designated use
The gear units are intended for industrial systems and may only be used in accordance
with the information provided in SEW-EURODRIVE's technical documentation and the
information given on the nameplate. They fulfill the applicable standards and regulations.
According to the 2006/42/EC Machinery Directive, the gear units are components for the
installation in machines and plants. In the scope of the Directive, you must not take the
machinery into operation in the proper fashion until you have established that the end
product complies with Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC.
Using these products in potentially explosive atmospheres is prohibited, unless specifically designated otherwise.
2.5
"Gearmotors" catalog
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Safety Notes
Transport
2.6
Transport
Inspect the shipment immediately upon receipt for any damage that may have occurred
during transportation. Inform the shipping company immediately. It may be necessary to
preclude startup.
Tighten installed eyebolts. They are only intended for the weight of the motor/gearmotor;
do not attach any additional loads.
The built-in lifting eyebolts comply with DIN 580. Always observe the loads and regulations listed in this standard. If the gearmotor is equipped with two suspension eye lugs
or lifting eyebolts, then both of the suspension eye lugs should be used for transportation. In this case, the tension force vector of the slings must not exceed a 45 angle according to DIN 580.
Use suitable, sufficiently rated handling equipment if necessary. Remove any transportation fixtures prior to startup.
2.7
Extended storage
Observe the notes in section "Extended storage" (page 109).
2.8
Installation/assembly
Observe the notes in section "Mechanical Installation" (page 17)!
2.9
Startup/operation
Check the oil level before startup as described in chapter Inspection/Maintenance
(page 63).
Check that the direction of rotation is correct in decoupled status. Listen out for unusual
grinding noises as the shaft rotates.
Secure keys for test mode without output elements. Do not deactivate monitoring and
protection equipment even in test mode.
Switch off the gearmotor if in doubt whenever changes occur in relation to normal operation (e.g. increased temperature, noise, vibration). Determine the cause and contact
SEW-EURODRIVE, if required.
2.10
Inspection/maintenance
Observe the notes in chapter "Inspection/Maintenance" (page 63)!
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
3
3
3.1
[20]
[24]
[101]
[515]
[516]
[517]
[100]
[47]
[2]
[181]
[42] [3]
[41]
[1]
[102]
[45]
[59]
[43]
[6] [25]
[88]
[22]
[11]
[12]
[17]
[9]
[19]
[8]
[521]
[522]
[523]
[7]
[59]
[31]
[32]
[34]
[30]
[4]
[5]
[506]
[39] [507]
[131]
[508]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[11]
[12]
[17]
10
Pinion
Gearwheel
Pinion shaft
Gearwheel
Pinion shaft
Gearwheel
Output shaft
Key
Oil seal
Roller bearing
Circlip
Spacer tube
[19]
[20]
[22]
[24]
[25]
[30]
[31]
[32]
[34]
[37]
[39]
[41]
[37]
19194251
Key
Breather valve
Gear unit housing
Lifting eyebolt
Roller bearing
Roller bearing
Key
Spacer tube
Roller bearing
Roller bearing
Circlip
Circlip
[42]
[43]
[45]
[47]
[59]
[88]
[100]
[101]
[102]
[131]
[181]
[506]
Roller bearing
Key
Roller bearing
Circlip
Screw plug
Circlip
Gear cover plate
Hex head screw
Seal
Closing cap
Closing cap
Shim
[507]
[508]
[515]
[516]
[517]
[521]
[522]
[523]
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
3.2
[515]
[516]
[517]
[42]
[41]
[181]
[20]
[45]
[43]
[59]
[22]
[1]
[3]
[161]
[30]
[4]
[32]
[59]
[31]
[506]
[37]
[507] [39]
[508]
[131]
[5]
[165]
[183]
[160]
[19]
[94]
[92]
[91]
[93]
[25]
[102]
[88]
[521]
[522]
[523]
[100]
[101]
[7]
[59]
[17]
[9]
[6]
[11]
[81]
[14]
[16]
19298059
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[9]
[11]
[14]
[16]
[17]
[19]
[20]
Pinion
Gearwheel
Pinion shaft
Gearwheel
Pinion shaft
Gearwheel
Hollow shaft
Oil seal
Roller bearing
Hex head screw
output flange
Spacer tube
Key
Breather valve
[22]
[25]
[30]
[31]
[32]
[37]
[39]
[41]
[42]
[43]
[45]
[59]
[81]
[88]
[91]
[92]
[93]
[94]
[100]
[101]
[102]
[131]
[160]
[161]
[165]
[181]
[183]
Circlip
Disc
Lock washer
Hex head screw
Gear cover plate
Hex head screw
Seal
Closing cap
Closing plug
Closing cap
Closing plug
Closing cap
Oil seal
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
[506]
[507]
[508]
[515]
[516]
[517]
[521]
[522]
[523]
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
11
3.3
[102]
[3]
[20]
[536]
[43] [537] [533]
[538] [534]
[535]
[22]
[45]
[101]
[59]
[2]
[114]
[113]
[42]
[19]
[59]
[119]
[25]
[84]
[116]
[523] [89] [59]
[522]
[521][88]
[1]
[7]
[8]
[59]
[6]
[59]
[83] [17]
[11]
[12]
[9]
[132]
[133]
[31]
[161]
[30] [542]
[543]
[135] [544]
[4]
[5]
[131]
[37]
[506]
[507]
[137] [508]
19301131
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[11]
[12]
[17]
[19]
[20]
[22]
12
Pinion
Gearwheel
Pinion shaft
Gearwheel
Pinion shaft
Gearwheel
Output shaft
Key
Oil seal
Roller bearing
Circlip
Spacer tube
Key
Breather valve
Gear unit housing
[25]
[30]
[31]
[37]
[39]
[42]
[43]
[45]
[59]
[83]
[84]
[88]
[89]
[100]
[101]
Roller bearing
Roller bearing
Key
Roller bearing
Circlip
Roller bearing
Key
Roller bearing
Screw plug
Nilos ring
Nilos ring
Circlip
Closing cap
Gear cover plate
Hex head screw
[102]
[113]
[114]
[116]
[119]
[131]
[132]
[133]
[135]
[161]
[506]
[507]
[508]
[521]
[521]
Seal
Slotted nut
Multi-tang washer
Thread locker
Spacer tube
Closing cap
Circlip
Supporting ring
Nilos ring
Closing cap
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
[522]
[523]
[533]
[534]
[535]
[536]
[537]
[538]
[542]
[543]
[544]
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
3.4
[59]
[101]
[131]
[20]
[100]
[506]
[507]
[39] [137]
[102]
[37]
[22]
[5]
[43]
[30]
[19]
[89]
[523] [88]
[25] [522]
[521]
[59]
[7]
[6]
[9]
[520]
[12] [519]
[518]
[11]
19304203
[1]
[2]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[9]
[11]
[12]
[19]
Pinion
Gearwheel
Worm
Worm gear
Output shaft
Oil seal
Roller bearing
Circlip
Key
[20]
[22]
[25]
[30]
[37]
[39]
[43]
[59]
[61]
Breather valve
Gear unit housing
Roller bearing
Roller bearing
Roller bearing
Circlip
Key
Screw plug
Circlip
[88]
[89]
[100]
[101]
[102]
[131]
[137]
[506]
[507]
Circlip
Closing cap
Gear cover plate
Hex head screw
Seal
Closing cap
Supporting ring
Shim
Shim
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
[518]
[519]
[520]
[521]
[522]
[523]
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
13
3.5
[101]
[65]
[66]
[102]
[71]
[68]
[143]
[72]
[1]
[22]
[89]
[25]
[88]
[521]
[522]
[523]
[6]
[19]
[250]
[251]
[17]
[8]
[7]
[11]
[518]
[519]
[12] [520]
[9]
19307275
[1]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[11]
[12]
[17]
14
Pinion
Gearwheel
Output shaft
Key
Oil seal
Roller bearing
Circlip
Spacer tube
[19]
[22]
[25]
[65]
[66]
[71]
[72]
[143]
Key
Gear unit housing
Roller bearing
Oil seal
Roller bearing
Supporting ring
Circlip
Supporting ring
[88]
[89]
[100]
[101]
[102]
[132]
[183]
[250]
Circlip
Closing cap
Gear cover plate
Hex head screw
Seal
Circlip
Oil seal
Circlip
[251]
[518]
[519]
[520]
[521]
[522]
[523]
Circlip
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
3.6
[89]
[25]
[22]
[19]
[7]
[8]
[59]
[12]
[9]
[5]
[518]
[519] [11]
[520]
[33]
[32]
[59]
[44] [133]
[506]
[1]
[37]
[5]
[31]
[30]
[137]
[2]
[61]
[26] [36]
605872395
[1]
[2]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[11]
[12]
[19]
Pinion
Wheel
Pinion shaft
Wheel
Output shaft
Key
Oil seal
Grooved ball bearing
Retaining ring
Key
[22]
[24]
[25]
[26]
[30]
[31]
[32]
[33]
[36]
[37]
[44]
[59]
[61]
[68]
[72]
[80]
[88]
[89]
[106]
[133]
O-ring
Screw plug
Retaining ring
Retaining ring
Retaining ring
Key
Retaining ring
Closing cap
Stud
Shim
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
[137]
[150]
[183]
[506]
[518]
[519]
[520]
[521]
[522]
[523]
Shim
Hex nut
Oil seal
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
Shim
15
3.7
Nameplate/unit designation
3.7.1
Nameplate
The following figure shows an example of a nameplate for a helical-bevel gear unit with
AQ adapter:
K57 AQH140/1
01.1234567890.0001.08
IM
i
na pk r/min
232
ne pk r/min
4500
M3B
19,34
65
665
kg
32
IP
Ma pk Nm
Made in Germany
0641 543 1
624901899
i
IM
IP
nepk
napk
Mapk
3.7.2
[rpm]
[rpm]
[Nm]
Type designation
INFORMATION
For a detailed overview of unit designations and additional information, refer to the following publications:
"Gearmotors" catalog
A helical-bevel gear unit with adapter has, for example, the following unit designation:
K
37
/R
AQA
80
/1
Variants
Flange classification
Adapter designation: e.g. for servomotors
- AQA: Adapter with keyway
- AQH: Adapter with clamping ring hub
Option: e.g. for servo gear units .../ R: Reduced circumferential backlash
Gear unit size: e.g. 37
Gear unit type: e.g. K
16
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Mechanical Installation
Required tools/resources
Mechanical Installation
4.1
Required tools/resources
Set of wrenches
Shrink disks
AQH motor adapter
Input shaft assembly with centering shoulder
4.1.1
Mounting device
Bolt locking compound (for input shaft assembly with centering shoulder), e.g.
Loctite 243
Installation tolerances
Shaft end
Flanges
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
17
Mechanical Installation
Prerequisites for assembly
4.2
The entries on the nameplate of the gearmotor match the voltage supply system.
18
You must clean the output shafts and flange surfaces thoroughly to ensure they are
free of anti-corrosion agents, contamination or similar. Use a commercially available
solvent. Do not expose the sealing lips of the oil seals to the solvent damage to the
material.
When the drive is installed in abrasive ambient conditions, protect the output end oil
seals against wear.
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Mechanical Installation
Installing the gear unit
4.3
Work on the gear unit only when the machine is not in use. Secure the drive unit
against unintentional power-up.
Protect the gear unit from direct cold air currents. Condensation may cause water to
accumulate in the oil.
The gear unit or gearmotor is only allowed to be installed in the specified mounting position. Refer to the information on the nameplate. SPIROPLAN gear units of sizes
W10-W30 do not depend on a particular mounting position.
The support structure must have the following characteristics:
Level
Vibration damping
Torsionally rigid
The maximum permitted flatness error for foot and flange mounting (guide values with
reference to DIN ISO 1101):
Max. 0.4 mm
Max. 0.5 mm
Max. 0.7 mm
Max. 0.8 mm
Do not tighten the housing legs and mounting flanges against one another and ensure
that you comply with the permitted overhung and axial loads! Observe chapter "Project
Planning" in the Gear unit/gearmotor catalog for calculating the permitted overhung and
axial loads.
Secure gearmotors using quality 8.8 screws.
Secure the following gearmotors using quality 10.9 screws:
INFORMATION
When installing the gear unit, make sure that the oil level and drain plugs as well as
the breather plugs are easily accessible!
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
19
Mechanical Installation
Installing the gear unit
At the same time, also check that the oil fill corresponds to the specifications for the intended mounting position (see section "Lubricant fill quantities" (page 113) or refer to the
information on the nameplate). The gear units are filled with the required oil volume at
the factory. There may be slight deviations at the oil level plug as a result of the mounting
position, which are permitted within the manufacturing tolerances.
If you change the mounting position, make sure that you change the lubricant fill
quantities and the position of the breather valve accordingly. Observe section"Lubricant fill quantities" (page 113) and chapter "Mounting Positions" (page 82).
Consult the SEW customer service if you intend to change the mounting position of K
gear units to or between M5 and M6.
Consult the SEW customer service if you intend to change the mounting position of S
gear units sizes S47 ... S97, to M2 and M3.
In case there is a risk of electrochemical corrosion between the gear unit and the driven
machine, use plastic inserts that are 2 to 3 mm thick. The material used must have an
electrical leakage resistance < 109 . Electrochemical corrosion can occur between various metals, for example, cast iron and high-grade steel. Also fit the bolts with plastic
washers. Ground the housing additionally use the grounding bolts on the motor.
20
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Mechanical Installation
Installing the gear unit
4.3.1
Screw/nut
[Nm]
M6
11
M8
25
M10
48
M12
86
M16
210
M20
410
M24
710
M30
1450
M36
2500
M42
4600
M48
6950
M56
11100
Mount the helical gearmotors in flange-mounted design with the following increased
tightening torques:
Screw/nut
Flange
Gear unit
120
RF37
M6
14
140
RF47
M8
35
[Nm]
160
RF57
M8
35
60ZR
RZ37
M8
35
70ZR
RZ47
M8
35
80ZR
RZ57
M10
69
95ZR
RZ67
M10
69
110ZR
RZ77
M12
120
130ZR
RZ87
M12
120
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
21
Mechanical Installation
Installing the gear unit
4
4.3.2
Foot-mounted gear
unit
The following table shows the thread sizes of the gear units in foot-mounted design depending on the gear unit type and size:
Gear unit type
Screw
R / R..F
M6
07
M8
17/27/37
RX
K / KH..B /
KV..B / KA..B
37
30/37/47
10/20
27/37
M10
F/
FH..B / FA..B
57
47
37/47
47/57
M12
47/57/67
67
57/67
57/67
67
M16
77/87
77/87
77/87
77
77
M20
97
97/107
97
87
87
M24
107
107
97
97
M30
137
127
107/167
M36
147/167
157
127/157/187
The following table shows the thread sizes of the gear units with B14 flange and/or hollow shaft depending on the gear unit type and size:
Gear unit type
Screw
RZ
M6
07/17/27
M8
37/47
M10
57/67
M12
77/87
FAZ / FHZ
KAZ /
KHZ / KVZ
SA /
SAZ / SHZ
WA
37
10/20/30
27/37/47
37/47
47/57
37
57/67/77
57/67/77
67/77
87/97
47
M16
87/97
87/97
M20
107/127
107/127
M24
157
157
The following table shows the thread sizes of the gear units with B5 flange depending
on the gear unit type,size and flange diameter:
Gear unit type
Flange
[mm]
22
Screw
RF /
R..F / RM
FF /
FAF / FHF
KF / KAF /
KHF / KVF
SF /
SAF /SHF
80
M6
110
M8
120
M6
140
M8
07/17/27
160
M8
07/17/27/37/47
27/37
200
M10
37/47/57/67
47
250
M12
57/67/77/87
300
M12
67/77/87
350
M16
77/87/97/107
87
87
87
450
M16
97/107/137/147
97/107
97/107
97
550
M16
107/137/147/167
127
127
660
M20
147/167
157
157
WF / WAF
10
20
07/17/27
37
10/20/30/37
37
37/47
30/37/47
47
57/67
57/67
57/67
77
77
77
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Mechanical Installation
Installing the gear unit
4.3.3
4.3.4
Breather
The following gear units do not require a breather:
SPIROPLAN W37 and W47 gear units in mounting positions M1, M2, M3, M5, M6
SEW-EURODRIVE supplies all other gear units with the breather valve installed and activated according to the particular mounting position.
Exceptions:
1. SEW supplies the following gear units with a screw plug on the vent hole provided:
Pivoted mounting positions, if possible
Gear units for mounting on a slant
The breather valve is located in the motor terminal box. Before startup, you must replace the highest screw plug with the provided breather valve.
2. SEW supplies a breather valve in a plastic bag for gear head units requiring venting
on the input end.
3. Enclosed gear units are supplied without a breather valve.
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
23
Mechanical Installation
Installing the gear unit
Activating the
breather valve
Check whether the breather valve is activated. If the breather valve has not been activated, you must remove the transport fixture from the breather valve before starting up
the gear unit!
1. Breather valve with transport fixture
211319051
211316875
211314699
24
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Mechanical Installation
Gear units with solid shaft
4.3.5
NOTICE
Breather valves and oil seals may be damaged during painting or re-painting.
Potential damage to property.
Thoroughly cover the breather valves and the sealing lip of the oil seals with strips
prior to painting.
4.4
4.4.1
NOTICE
Bearing, hosing or shaft may be damaged due to improper assembly.
Possible damage to property
Using a mounting
device
Only assemble the input and output components with a mounting device. Use the
center bore and the thread on the shaft end for positioning.
Never force belt pulleys, couplings, pinions, etc. onto the shaft end by hitting them
with a hammer.
In the case of belt pulleys, make sure the belt is tensioned correctly in accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions.
Power transmission elements should be balanced after fitting and must not give
rise to any impermissible radial or axial forces (see the "Gearmotors" or "ExplosionProof Drives" catalog for permitted values).
The following figure shows a mounting device for installing couplings or hubs on gear
unit or motor shaft ends. Should you be able to tighten the screw without any problems,
you may not need the thrust bearing on the mounting device.
[2]
[1]
[3]
211368587
[1] Gear shaft end
[2] Thrust bearing
[3] Coupling hub
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
25
Mechanical Installation
Gear units with solid shaft
Avoiding excessive
overhung loads
Avoid high overhung loads by: Installing the gear or chain sprocket according to figure
B if possible.
[1]
[1]
[A]
[B]
211364235
[1] Hub
[A] unfavorable
[B] correct
INFORMATION
Mounting is easier if you first apply lubricant to the output element or heat it up briefly
(to 80 - 100 C).
4.4.2
Mounting of couplings
CAUTION
Input and output components such as belt pulleys, couplings etc. are in fast motion
during operation.
Risk of jamming and crushing.
Adjust the following misalignments according to the coupling manufacturer's specifications when mounting couplings.
a) Maximum and minimum clearance
b) Axial offset
c) Angular offset
a)
b)
c)
211395595
26
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Mechanical Installation
Torque arms for shaft-mounted gear units
4.5
4.5.1
[3]
a
d
[1]
b +0.5
[2]
9007199466107403
[1]
[2]
[3]
Screw
Washer
Nut
rubber buffer
Gear unit
Diameter
Internal
diameter
Length
(loose)
Washer width
d [mm]
b [mm]
c [mm]
FA27
40
12.5
20
FA37
40
12.5
20
FA47
40
12.5
20
1.5
FA57
40
12.5
20
1.5
FA67
40
12.5
20
1.5
FA77
60
21.0
30
10
1.5
FA87
60
21.0
30
10
1.5
FA97
80
25.0
40
12
FA107
80
25.0
40
12
FA127
100
32.0
60
15
FA157
120
32.0
60
15
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
a [mm]
L (taut)
[mm]
1
27
Mechanical Installation
Torque arms for shaft-mounted gear units
4
4.5.2
[1]
211362059
Gear unit
4.5.3
bolts
Tightening torque
KA37
4 M10 25 8.8
48 Nm
KA47
4 M10 30 8.8
48 Nm
KA67
4 M12 35 8.8
86 Nm
KA77
4 M16 40 8.8
210 Nm
KA87
4 M16 45 8.8
210 Nm
KA97
4 M20 50 8.8
410 Nm
KA107
4 M24 60 8.8
710 Nm
KA127
2500 Nm
KA157
2500 Nm
[1]
211491723
Gear unit
28
bolts
Tightening torque
SA37
4 x M6 16 8.8
11 Nm
SA47
4 x M8 20 8.8
25 Nm
SA57
6 x M8 20 8.8
25 Nm
SA67
8 x M12 25 8.8
86 Nm
SA77
8 x M12 35 8.8
86 Nm
SA87
8 x M16 35 8.8
210 Nm
SA97
8 x M16 35 8.8
210 Nm
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Mechanical Installation
Torque arms for shaft-mounted gear units
4.5.4
45
[1]
211489547
Gear unit
bolts
Tightening torque Nm
WA10
4 x M6 16 - 8.8
11
WA20
4 x M6 16 - 8.8
11
WA30
4 x M6 16 - 10.9
15
WA37
4 x M8 20 - 10.9
35
WA47
4 x M10 25 - 10.9
70
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
29
Mechanical Installation
Shaft-mounted gear units with keyway or splined hollow shaft
4.6
4.6.1
Assembly notes
1. Apply and thoroughly spread NOCO Fluid
C
O I
N U
L
F
C
O I
N U
L
F
211516171
2B: installation and removal kit for customer shaft with contact shoulder
2C: installation and removal kit for customer shaft without contact shoulder
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
211518347
[1] Short retaining bolt (standard delivery scope)
[2] Lock washer
[3] Washer
[4] Retaining ring
[5] Customer shaft
30
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Mechanical Installation
Shaft-mounted gear units with keyway or splined hollow shaft
2B: Installation with SEW-EURODRIVE installation and removal kit (page 35)
customer shaft with contact shoulder
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
B
[5]
211520523
[1] Retaining screw
[2] Lock washer
[3] Washer
[4] Retaining ring
[5] Customer shaft with contact shoulder
2C: Installation with SEW-EURODRIVE installation and removal kit (page 35)
customer shaft without contact shoulder
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
C
[6]
211522699
[1] Retaining screw
[2] Lock washer
[3] Washer
[4] Retaining ring
[5] Spacer tube
[6] Customer shaft without contact shoulder
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
31
Mechanical Installation
Shaft-mounted gear units with keyway or splined hollow shaft
211524875
Screw
M5
M6
M10/12
20
M16
40
M20
80
M24
200
INFORMATION
To avoid contact corrosion, we recommend that the customer shaft should additionally
be lathed down between the 2 contact surfaces.
32
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Mechanical Installation
Shaft-mounted gear units with keyway or splined hollow shaft
4.6.2
Removal notes
This description is only applicable when the gear unit was assembled using the installation and removal kit (page 35) from SEW-EURODRIVE. Observe section "Installation
notes (page 30)", 2B or 2C.
1. Loosen the retaining screw [1].
2. Remove parts [2] to [4] and, if applicable, the distance piece [5].
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
211527051
[1] Retaining screw
[2] Lock washer
[3] Washer
[4] Retaining ring
[5] Spacer tube
[6] Customer shaft
3. Insert the forcing disk [8] and the fixed nut [7] from the SEW-EURODRIVE installation/removal kit between the customer shaft [6] and the retaining ring [4].
4. Re-install the retaining ring [4].
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
33
Mechanical Installation
Shaft-mounted gear units with keyway or splined hollow shaft
5. Screw the retaining screw [1] back in. Now you can force the gear unit off the shaft
by tightening the bolt.
[1]
[4]
[7]
[8]
[6]
211529227
[1] Retaining screw
[4] Retaining ring
[6] Customer shaft
[7] Fixed nut
[8] Forcing disk
34
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Mechanical Installation
Shaft-mounted gear units with keyway or splined hollow shaft
4.6.3
[1]
[7]
[8]
[7]
[1]
211531403
[1] Retaining screw
Fixed nut for disassembly [7]
[8] Forcing disk
DH7
[mm]
M1)
C4
[mm]
C5
[mm]
C6
[mm]
U-0.5
[mm]
T -0.5
[mm]
D3-0.5
[mm]
L4
[mm]
WA..10
16
M5
WA..20
18
M6
12
13.5
4.5
18
15.7
50
643 712 5
5.5
20.5
17.7
25
643 682 X
20
M6
25
M10
10
15.5
5.5
22.5
19.7
25
643 683 8
20
7.5
28
24.7
35
643 684 6
30
M10
35
M12
5
5
10
25
7.5
33
29.7
35
643 685 4
12
29
9.5
38
34.7
45
40
M16
643 686 2
12
34
11.5
41.9
39.7
50
SA..67
45
643 687 0
M16
12
38.5
13.5
48.5
44.7
50
643 688 9
50
M16
12
43.5
13.5
53.5
49.7
50
643 689 7
60
M20
16
56
17.5
64
59.7
60
643 690 0
70
M20
16
65.5
19.5
74.5
69.7
60
643 691 9
90
M24
20
80
24.5
95
89.7
70
643 692 7
FA..127, KA..127
100
M24
20
89
27.5
106
99.7
70
643 693 5
FA..157, KA..157
120
M24
20
107
31
127
119.7
70
643 694 3
Type
Part number of
the installation/
removal kit
1) Retaining screw
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
35
Mechanical Installation
Shaft-mounted gear units with keyway or splined hollow shaft
INFORMATION
The SEW installation kit for attaching the customer shaft is a recommendation by
SEW-EURODRIVE. You must always check whether this design can compensate the
axial loads. In particular applications (e.g. mounting mixer shafts), a different design
may have to be used to secure the shaft axially. In these cases, customers can use
their own devices. However, you must ensure that these designs do not cause potential sources of combustion according to DIN EN 13463 (for example, impact sparks).
36
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Mechanical Installation
Shaft-mounted gear units with shrink disk
4.7
4.7.1
Assembly notes
NOTICE
Tightening the screws without installed shaft may result in the hollow shaft being deformed.
Possible damage to property
1. Loosen the locking screws by a few turns (do not unscrew them completely).
211533579
2. Carefully degrease the hollow shaft hole and the input shaft using a commercial
solvent.
211535755
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
37
Mechanical Installation
Shaft-mounted gear units with shrink disk
211537931
4. Apply NOCO fluid to the input shaft in the area of the bushing.
It is essential to make sure that the clamping area of the shrink disk is free from
grease. As a result, never apply NOCO Fluid directly to the bush. This is because
the paste may be able to get into the clamping area of the shrink disk when the input
shaft is put on.
211540107
38
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Mechanical Installation
Shaft-mounted gear units with shrink disk
s>0mm
1-2mm
211542283
6. After the installation, make sure the remaining gap between the outer rings
is > 0 mm.
7. Grease the the area around the shrink disk outside of the hollow shaft to prevent
corrosion.
Gear unit type
Screw
Nm
5
SH37
WH37
M5
WH47
M6
12
M8
30
KH37...77
FH37...77
SH47...77
KH87/97
FH87/97
SH87/97
KH107
FH107
M10
59
KH127/157
FH127/157
M12
100
KH167
M16
250
KH187
M20
470
max.1)
60
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
39
Mechanical Installation
Shaft-mounted gear units with shrink disk
4
4.7.2
Removal notes
CAUTION
Risk of jamming and crushing due to improper removal of heavy components.
Risk of injury.
1. Loosen the locking screws one after the other by a quarter rotation to avoid tilting the
outer rings.
2. Unscrew the locking bolts evenly one after the other. Do not remove the locking
screws completely.
3. Remove the shaft or pull the hub off the shaft. (remove any rust that may have formed
between the hub and the end of the shaft beforehand).
4. Remove the shrink disk from the hub.
4.7.3
Sold as
Spray
Spray
Spray or paste
Spray or paste
Spray
Grease the locking screws with a multipurpose grease such as Molykote BR 2 or similar.
40
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Mechanical Installation
Shaft-mounted gear units with TorqLOC
4.8
4.8.1
Assembly notes
1. Clean the customer shaft and the inside of the hollow shaft. Ensure that all traces of
grease or oil are removed.
2. Install the stop ring and the bushing on the customer shaft.
211941003
211938827
211936651
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
41
Mechanical Installation
Shaft-mounted gear units with TorqLOC
K...
F...
S...
211943179
211945355
211947531
42
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Mechanical Installation
Shaft-mounted gear units with TorqLOC
8. Secure the bushing with the split ring. Tighten the split ring on the bushing using the
appropriate torque as specified in the following table:
212000907
Type
nickel-plated
[Standard]
Stainless steel
KT/FT
ST/WT
37
18
Torque [Nm]
7.5
37
47
18
7.5
47
57
18
7.5
57, 67
67
35
18
77
77
35
18
87
87
35
18
97
97
35
18
107
38
38
127
65
65
157
150
150
9. Make sure that all screws are loosened and slide the shrink disk onto the hollow
shaft.
212003083
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
43
Mechanical Installation
Shaft-mounted gear units with TorqLOC
10.Slide the counter bushing onto the customer shaft and into the hollow shaft
212005259
212007435
13.Make sure that the customer shaft is seated in the counter bushing.
212009611
44
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Mechanical Installation
Shaft-mounted gear units with TorqLOC
14.Manually tighten the screws of the shrink disk and ensure that the end rings of the
shrink disk are parallel.
212011787
15.Tighten the locking screws with a torque wrench by working round several times from
one bolt to the next (not in diametrically opposite sequence) according to the following table:
> 0mm
212013963
Type
KT/FT
nickel-plated
[Standard]
ST/WT
Stainless steel
Torque [Nm]
37
4.0
37
47
10
47
57
12
57, 67
67
12
15
77
77
30
30
87
87
30
50
97
97
30
50
107
59
65
127
100
120
157
100
120
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
45
Mechanical Installation
Shaft-mounted gear units with TorqLOC
16.After the installation, make sure the remaining gap between the outer rings
is > 0 mm.
17.The remaining gap between counter bushing and hollow shaft end as well as stop
ring bushing and split ring must be > 0 mm.
> 0 mm
> 0 mm
212016139
46
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Mechanical Installation
Shaft-mounted gear units with TorqLOC
4.8.2
Removal notes
CAUTION
Risk of jamming and crushing due to improper removal of heavy components.
Risk of injury.
1. Loosen the locking screws one after the other by a quarter rotation to
avoid tilting the outer rings.
212013963
2903780235
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
47
Mechanical Installation
Installing the protective cover
4
4.8.3
Sold as
Spray
Spray
Molykote G Rapid
Spray or paste
Aemasol MO 19P
Spray or paste
Spray
Grease the locking screws with a multipurpose grease such as Molykote BR 2 or similar.
4.9
4.9.1
Disconnect the motor from the power supply before starting work and safeguard
against accidental startup.
1
1. Slide the rotating cover onto the shrink disk until it snaps in.
48
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Mechanical Installation
Installing the protective cover
4.9.2
1. To fasten the cover, remove the plastic plug on the gear unit housing (see figure 1)
2. Use the delivered screws to mount the cover to the gear unit housing (see figure 2).
4.9.3
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
49
Mechanical Installation
AM adapter coupling
4.10
AM adapter coupling
212099979
[1]
[479]
[481]
[484]
[491]
Motor shaft
Coupling half
Setscrew
Key
Spacer tube
1. Clean the motor shaft and the flange surfaces of the motor and the adapter.
2. Remove the key from the motor shaft and replace it with the supplied key [484] (not
AM63 and AM250).
3. Heat the coupling half [479] to approx. 80 - 100 C and push the coupling half onto
the motor shaft. Position as follows:
IEC adapter AM63 - 225 Until stop at motor shaft shoulder.
IEC adapter AM250 - 280 to dimensionA.
NEMA adapter with spacer tube [491] to dimension A.
4. Secure the key and coupling half using the setscrew [481] and tightening torque TA
according to the table on the motor shaft.
50
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Mechanical Installation
AM adapter coupling
IEC AM
63 / 71
80 / 90
100 / 112
132
160 / 180
200
225
250 / 280
24.5
31.5
41.5
54
76
78.5
93.5
139
TA
1.5
1.5
4.8
4.8
10
17
17
17
Thread
M4
M4
M6
M6
M8
M10
M10
M10
NEMA AM
56
143 / 145
182 / 184
213 / 215
254 / 256
284 / 286
324 / 326
364 / 365
46
43
55
63.5
78.5
85.5
107
107
TA
1.5
1.5
4.8
4.8
10
17
17
17
Thread
M4
M4
M6
M6
M8
M10
M10
M10
INFORMATION
To avoid contact corrosion, we recommend applying NOCO Fluid to the motor shaft
before mounting the coupling half.
NOTICE
Dampness might enter the adapter when mounting a motor to the adapter.
Potential damage to property
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
51
Mechanical Installation
AM adapter coupling
Permitted loads
NOTICE
Impermissibly high loads may occur when mounting a motor.
Potential damage to property
The load data specified in the following table are not to be exceeded.
X
Fq
18513419
Fq1) [N]
Adapter type
IEC
NEMA
1)
x [mm]
IEC adapter
NEMA adapter
AM63/71
AM56
77
530
410
AM80/90
AM143/145
113
420
380
AM100/112
AM182/184
144
AM1322)
AM213/2152)
AM132..
AM213/215
AM160/180
AM254/286
251
AM200/225
AM324-AM365
AM250/280
186
2000
1760
1600
1250
4700
3690
4600
4340
297
5600
5250
390
11200
1) The maximum permitted weight of the attached motor Fqmax must be reduced linearly as the center of gravity distance x increases. If this distance is reduced, the maximum permitted weight
Fqmax cannot be increased.
2) Diameter of the adapter output flange: 160 mm
52
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Mechanical Installation
AM adapter coupling
AM../RS adapter
AM with backstop
Check the direction of rotation of the drive prior to assembly or startup. Inform the
SEW-EURODRIVE service in the case of incorrect direction of rotation.
The backstop is maintenance-free in operation, and does not require any further maintenance work. Backstops have a minimum lift-off speed depending on the size (see following table).
.
NOTICE
If the actual speed level is below the minimum lift-off speed level, the backstops are
subject to wear, and the resulting friction causes the temperature to increase.
Possible damage to property
In rated operation, the lift-off speeds must not drop below the minimum values.
During startup or braking, the lift-off speeds may drop below the minimum levels.
AM80/90/RS,
AM143/145/RS
65
820
AM100/112/RS,
AM182/184/RS
425
620
AM132/RS,
AM213/215/RS
850
530
AM160/180/RS,
AM254/286/RS
1450
480
AM200/225/RS,
AM324-365/RS
1950
450
AM250/280/RS,
1950
450
Type
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
53
Mechanical Installation
AQ adapter coupling
4.11
AQ adapter coupling
AQA
AQH
479
479
1
1
2
212114955
1 Motor shaft
2 Grub screw
3 screws
AQA = With keyway
AQH = Without keyway
1. Clean the motor shaft and the flange surfaces of the motor and the adapter.
2. Type AQH:Loosen the screws of the coupling half (479) and loosen the conical connection.
3. Heat up the coupling half (80 C - 100 C) and slide it onto the motor shaft.
AQA / AQH design: up to clearance "A" (see table)
54
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Mechanical Installation
AQ adapter coupling
INFORMATION
Only for AQA, not permitted for AQH:To avoid contact corrosion, we recommend
applying NOCO Fluid to the motor shaft before mounting the coupling half.
NOTICE
Dampness might enter the adapter when mounting a motor to the adapter.
Potential damage to property
Type
Coupling size
Tightening torque TA
[Nm]
AQA
AQH
AQA
AQH
M5
M4
M5
M5
M8
M5
10
M8
M6
10
10
44,5
19/24
Clearance "A"
[mm]
39
53
62
24/28
28/38
38/45
62
62
74,5
76,5
100
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
55
Mechanical Installation
AD input shaft assembly
4.12
212119307
[1] Motor mounting platform
[2] Stud bolt (only AD6/P / AD7/P)
[3] Support (only AD6/P / AD7/P)
[4] Nut
[5] Threaded column
1. Set the motor mounting platform to the required mounting position by evenly
tightening the adjusting nuts. Remove the lifting eyebolt from helical gear units in
order to achieve the lowest adjustment position. Touch up any damage to the paint
work.
2. Align the motor on the motor mounting platform (shaft ends must be in alignment)
and secure it.
3. Mount the input elements on the input shaft end and the motor shaft, line them up
with one another and correct the motor position again, if necessary.
4. Put on the traction elements (V-belt, chain, etc.) and apply a preload by evenly
adjusting the motor mounting platform. Do not stress the motor mounting platform
and the columns against each other when doing this.
5. Tighten all the nuts not used for adjustment in order to fix the threaded columns.
56
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Mechanical Installation
AD input shaft assembly
212121483
[l] t+a
[t] Screw-in depth (see table)
[a] Thickness of the application
[s] Retaining thread (see table)
Round down the calculated screw length to the next smaller standard length.
2. Remove the retaining screws from the centering shoulder.
3. Clean the contact surface and the centering shoulder.
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
57
Mechanical Installation
AD input shaft assembly
4. Clean the threads of the new bolts and apply a bolt locking compound
(e.g. Loctite 243) to the first few threads.
5. Attach the application to the centering shoulder and tighten the retaining screws with
the specified tightening torque TA (see table).
58
Type
Screw-in
depth
t [mm]
AD2/ZR
25,5
M8
25
AD3/ZR
31,5
M10
48
Retaining thread
s
Tightening torque
TA for connection screws of strength class
8.8 [Nm]
AD4/ZR
36
M12
86
AD5/ZR
44
M12
86
AD6/ZR
48,5
M16
210
AD7/ZR
49
M20
410
AD8/ZR
42
M12
86
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Mechanical Installation
AD input shaft assembly
Permitted loads
NOTICE
Impermissibly high loads may occur when mounting a motor.
Potential damage to property
The load data specified in the following table are not to be exceeded.
x
Fq
212123659
Type
x1)
[mm]
Fq1)
[N]
AD2/ZR
193
330
AD3/ZR
274
1400
AD4/ZR2)
AD4/ZR
1)
2)
361
1120
3300
AD5/ZR
487
3200
AD6/ZR
567
3900
AD7/ZR
663
10000
AD8/ZR
516
4300
Maximum load values for connection screws of strength class 8.8. The maximum permitted weight of
the attached motor Fqmax must be reduced linearly as the center of gravity distance x increases. When
this distance is reduced, Fqmax cannot be increased.
Diameter of the adapter output flange: 160 mm
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
59
Mechanical Installation
AD input shaft assembly
NOTICE
If the actual speed level is below the minimum lift-off speed level, the backstops are
subject to wear, and the resulting friction causes the temperature to increase.
Possible damage to property
In rated operation, the lift-off speeds must not drop below the minimum values.
During startup or braking, the lift-off speeds may drop below the minimum levels.
Type
60
AD2/RS
65
820
AD3/RS
425
620
AD4/RS
850
530
AD5/RS
1450
480
AD6/RS
1950
450
AD7/RS
1950
450
AD8/RS
1950
450
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Startup
Checking the oil level
Startup
5.1
5.2
5.2.1
Run-in period
SPIROPLAN and helical-worm gear units require a running-in period of at least 48 h
before reaching their maximum efficiency. A separate run-in period applies for each direction of rotation if the gear unit is operated in both directions of rotation. The table
shows the average power reduction during the run-in period.
Helical-worm gear
unit
Worm
i range
reduction
1-start
approx. 12 %
2-start
approx. 20 ... 75
approx. 6 %
3-start
approx. 20 ... 90
approx. 3 %
4-start
5-start
approx. 6 ... 25
approx. 3 %
6-start
approx. 7 ... 25
approx. 2 %
SPIROPLAN
gear units
reduction
approx. 35 ... 75
approx. 15 %
approx. 20 ... 35
approx. 10 %
approx. 10 ... 20
About 8
About 6
W37 / W47
i range
reduction
approx. 8 %
about 30...70
approx. 8 %
approx. 5 %
approx. 10 ... 30
approx. 5%
approx. 3 %
about 3...10
approx. 3%
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
61
Startup
Helical/parallel shaft helical/helical-bevel gear units
5.3
5.4
NOTICE
Operating the motor in the blocking direction could destroy the backstop.
Possible damage to property
Do not start up the motor in the blocking direction. Be sure that the motor power
supply is correctly connected so that the motor rotates in the required direction.
The backstop can be operated in blocking direction with half the output torque once
for control purposes.
B
CCW
CW
CW
CCW
659173899
The direction of rotation is determined with a view to the output shaft (LSS).
Clockwise (CW)
Counterclockwise (CCW)
62
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Inspection/Maintenance
Preliminary work regarding gear unit inspection/maintenance
Inspection/Maintenance
The following gear units are lubricated for life:
Depending on external factors, the surface/corrosion protection might have to be repaired or renewed.
6.1
WARNING
Risk of crushing if the drive starts up unintentionally.
Severe or fatal injuries.
Disconnect the gearmotor from the power supply before starting work and protect
it against unintentional re-start.
WARNING
Danger of burns due to hot gear unit and hot gear unit oil.
Severe injuries.
Let the gear unit cool down before you begin with your work.
Only remove the oil level and oil drain plug very carefully.
NOTICE
Filling in the wrong oil may result in significantly different lubricant characteristics.
Potential damage to property
Do not mix different synthetic lubricants and do not mix synthetic with mineral lubricants.
NOTICE
Improper maintenance may result in damages to the gear unit.
Possible damage to property.
INFORMATION
The position of the oil level plug, oil drain plug and the breather valve depends on the
mounting position. Refer to the diagrams of the mounting positions. See chapter
"Mounting Positions" (page 82).
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
63
Inspection/Maintenance
Inspection/maintenance intervals
6.2
Before releasing shaft connections, be sure that there are no active torsional moments present (tensions within the system).
Prevent foreign bodies from entering into the gear unit during maintenance and inspection work.
Do not clean the gear unit with a high-pressure cleaning system as water might enter
the gear unit and the seals might be damaged.
Perform safety and function tests following all maintenance and repair work.
Inspection/maintenance intervals
Time interval
What do I do?
64
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Inspection/Maintenance
Lubricant change intervals
6.3
[h]
25000
[3]
20000
15000
[4]
[1]
10000
[5]
5000
70
80
110
100
90
120
[C]
[2]
[1] Operating hours
[3] CLP PG
115
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Oil
65
Inspection/Maintenance
Inspection/maintenance for the AL/AM/AQ adapter
6.4
What do I do?
6.5
66
What do I do?
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Inspection/Maintenance
Inspection/maintenance for the gear unit
6.6
6.6.1
The procedure when checking the oil level and changing the oil depends on the following
factors:
Size
Mounting position
Observe the references to the respective sections as well as the following table. Refer
to chapter "Mounting Positions" (page 82) for notes on the mounting positions. You cannot check the oil level of gear units in pivoted mounting position. The gear units are delivered with the correct oil level. Observe the designations and fill quantities on the
nameplate if you have to change the oil.
Code letter
A:
Reference
(page 68)
(page 70)
(page 74)
(page 77)
in mounting positions: M1, M2, M3, M5, M6 with oil level plug
E:
(page 79)
Series
Gear unit
Code letter for section "Checking the oil level and changing the oil"
M1
M2
M3
R07...R27
R37 / R67
R
F
K
S
W
M4
M6
R47 / R57
R77...R167
RX57...R107
F27
F37..F157
K37...K187
S37
S47...S97
W10...W30
W37...W47
M5
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
67
Inspection/Maintenance
Inspection/maintenance for the gear unit
6
6.6.2
A: Helical, parallel shaft helical, helical-bevel and helical-worm gear units with oil level plug
[2]
X max.
Oil
min. X
18634635
[1] Oil level bore
[2] Reference oil level
? Oil level bore
M10 x 1
1.5
M12 x 1.5
M22 x 1.5
M33 x 2
M42 x 2
68
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Inspection/Maintenance
Inspection/maintenance for the gear unit
WARNING
Danger of burns due to hot gear unit and hot gear unit oil.
Severe injuries.
Let the gear unit cool down before you begin with your work.
However, the gear unit must still be warm otherwise the high viscosity of
excessively cold oil will make it harder to drain the oil properly.
1. Observe the notes in section "Preliminary work regarding gear unit inspection/
maintenance" (page 63).
2. Determine the position of the oil drain plug, the oil level plug and the breather valve
using the mounting position sheets. See chapter "Mounting Positions" (page 82).
3. Place a container underneath the oil drain plug.
4. Remove the oil level plug, the breather valve and the oil drain plug.
5. Drain all the oil.
6. Re-insert the oil drain plug.
7. Fill in new oil of the same type via the vent hole (otherwise consult the customer service). Do not mix different synthetic lubricants.
Observe the oil fill quantities according to the specifications on the nameplate or
according to the mounting position. See sect "Lubricant fill quantities" (page 110).
Check the oil level at the oil level plug.
8. Re-insert the oil level plug and the breather valve.
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
69
Inspection/Maintenance
Inspection/maintenance for the gear unit
6
6.6.3
B: Helical, parallel shaft helical, SPIROPLAN gear units without oil level plug with cover plate
For gear units without oil level bore, the oil level is checked via the cover plate opening.
Proceed as follows:
1. Observe the notes in section "Preliminary work regarding gear unit inspection/
maintenance" (page 63).
2. For the cover plate to be on top, you have to set up the gear unit in the following
mounting position.
R07 - R57 in M1 mounting position
F27 in M3 mounting position
W10 - W30 in M1 mounting position
3. Loosen the screws [1] of the cover plate [2] and remove the cover plate [2] and the
corresponding seal [3] (see following figure).
[1]
[2]
[3]
18643211
4. Determine the vertical distance "x" between oil level and sealing surface of the gear
unit housing (see following figure).
90
X
18646283
70
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Inspection/Maintenance
Inspection/maintenance for the gear unit
5. Compare the determined value "x" to the max. distance between oil level and sealing
surface of the gear unit housing specified in the following table. Adjust the fill level if
required.
Gear unit type
R07
R17
R27
R47
R57
F27
Max. distance x [mm] between oil level and sealing surface of the gear
unit housing for mounting position
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
2 stages
52 1
27 1
27 1
27 1
27 1
27 1
3 stages
49 1
21 1
21 1
21 1
21 1
21 1
2 stages
63 1
18 1
46 1
18 1
46 1
46 1
3 stages
58 1
11 2
40 2
11 2
40 2
40 2
2 stages
74 1
22 1
45 1
22 1
45 1
45 1
3 stages
76 1
19 1
42 1
19 1
42 1
42 1
2 stages
39 1
3 stages
32 1
2 stages
32 1
3 stages
28 1
2 stages
78 1
31 1
72 1
56 1
78 1
78 1
3 stages
71 1
24 1
70 1
45 1
71 1
71 1
12 1
W20
19 1
W30
31 1
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
71
Inspection/Maintenance
Inspection/maintenance for the gear unit
Re-attach the seal of the cover plate. Make sure that the sealing surfaces are
clean and dry.
Screw on the cover plate. Tighten the cover screws with the rated tightening
torque according to the following table from the inside to the outside in the order
illustrated in the figure. Repeat the tightening procedure until the screws are
properly tightened. Only use impulse drivers or torque wrenches in order to
prevent the cover plate from being damaged (no impact drivers).
7
1
5
1
3
4
1
E
18649739
Gear unit
type
72
Figure
Retaining
thread
R/RF07
M5
R/RF17/27
R/RF47/57
M6
11
M5
M6
11
F27
W10
W20
W30
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Inspection/Maintenance
Inspection/maintenance for the gear unit
WARNING
Danger of burns due to hot gear unit and hot gear unit oil.
Severe injuries.
Let the gear unit cool down before you begin with your work.
However, the gear unit must still be warm otherwise the high viscosity of
excessively cold oil will make it harder to drain the oil properly.
1. Observe the notes in section "Preliminary work regarding gear unit inspection/
maintenance" (page 63).
2. Open the cover plate of the gear unit according to section "Checking the oil via the
cover plate".
3. Completely drain the oil in to a vessel via the cover plate opening.
4. Fill in new oil of the same type via the cover plate opening (otherwise consult the
customer service). Do not mix different synthetic lubricants.
Pour in the oil in accordance with the mounting position or as specified on the
nameplate. See section "Lubricant fill quantities" (page 110).
5. Check the oil level.
6. Screw on the cover plate. Observe the order and the tightening torques according to
section "Checking the oil level via the cover plate" (page 70)
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
73
Inspection/Maintenance
Inspection/maintenance for the gear unit
6
6.6.4
C: S37 helical-worm gear units without oil level plug and cover plate
The S37 gear unit is not equipped with an oil level plug or a cover plate. This is why the
oil level is checked via the control bore.
1. Observe the notes in section "Preliminary work regarding gear unit inspection/
maintenance" (page 63).
2. Set up the gear unit in M5 or M6 mounting position, i.e. control bore always on top.
3. Remove the screw plug [1] (see following figure).
[1]
18655371
4. Insert the dipstick vertically via the control bore all the way to the bottom of the gear
unit housing. Pull out the dipstick vertically (see following figure).
90
18658699
74
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Inspection/Maintenance
Inspection/maintenance for the gear unit
5. Determine the size of the section "x" of the dipstick covered with lubricant using a caliper (see following figure).
X
18661771
6. Compare the determined value "x" to the min. value depending on the mounting position specified in the following table. Correct the fill level if required.
Oil level = wetted section x [mm] of the dipstick
Gear unit
type
S37
Mounting position
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
10 1
24 1
34 1
37 1
24 1
24 1
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
75
Inspection/Maintenance
Inspection/maintenance for the gear unit
1. Observe the notes in section "Preliminary work regarding gear unit inspection/
maintenance" (page 63).
2. Open the cover plate of the gear unit according to section "Checking the oil via the
screw plug".
3. Take an oil sample via the screw plug bore.
4. Check the oil consistency.
Viscosity
If you can see that the oil is heavily contaminated, we recommend that you
change the oil even if this is outside the service intervals specified in "Inspection
and maintenance intervals" (page 64).
5. Check the oil level. See previous section.
6. Re-insert and tighten the screw plug.
WARNING
Danger of burns due to hot gear unit and hot gear unit oil.
Severe injuries.
Let the gear unit cool down before you begin with your work.
However, the gear unit must still be warm otherwise the high viscosity of
excessively cold oil will make it harder to drain the oil properly.
1. Observe the notes in section "Preliminary work regarding gear unit inspection/
maintenance" (page 63).
2. Open the cover plate of the gear unit according to section "Checking the oil via the
screw plug".
3. Completely drain the oil via the screw plug bore.
4. Fill in new oil of the same type via the control bore (otherwise consult the customer
service). Do not mix different synthetic lubricants.
Observe the oil fill quantities according to the specifications on the nameplate or
according to the mounting position. Observe section "Lubricant fill quantities"
(page 111).
5. Check the oil level.
6. Re-insert and tighten the screw plug.
76
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Inspection/Maintenance
Inspection/maintenance for the gear unit
6.6.5
D: SPIROPLAN W37/W47 in mounting positions M1, M2, M3, M5, M6 with oil level plug
787235211
[2]
X max.
Oil
min. X
634361867
[1] Oil level bore
[2] Reference oil level
oil level bore
M10 x 1
1.5
5. If the oil level is too low, fill in new oil of the same type via the oil level bore until the
oil level reaches the lower edge of the bore.
6. Re-insert the oil level plug.
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
77
Inspection/Maintenance
Inspection/maintenance for the gear unit
WARNING
Danger of burns due to hot gear unit and hot gear unit oil.
Severe injuries.
Let the gear unit cool down before you begin with your work.
However, the gear unit must still be warm otherwise the high viscosity of
excessively cold oil will make it harder to drain the oil properly.
1. Observe the notes in section "Preliminary work regarding gear unit inspection/
maintenance" (page 63).
2. Set up the gear unit in M5 or M6 mounting position.
Positions" (page 82).
78
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Inspection/Maintenance
Inspection/maintenance for the gear unit
6.6.6
E: SPIROPLAN W37/W47 in M4 mounting position without oil level plug and cover plate
The W37/W47 gear units are not equipped with an oil level plug or a cover plate. This is
why the oil level is checked via the control bore.
1. Observe the notes in section "Preliminary work regarding gear unit inspection/
maintenance" (page 63).
2. Set up the gear unit in M5 or M6 mounting position.
3. Remove the screw plug.
4. Insert the dipstick vertically via the control bore all the way to the bottom of the gear
unit housing. Mark the point of the dipstick where it exits the gear unit. Pull out the
dipstick vertically (see following figure).
784447371
5. Determine the section "x" between the wetted part and the marking using a caliper
(see following figure).
X
785020811
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
79
Inspection/Maintenance
Inspection/maintenance for the gear unit
6. Compare the determined value "x" to the min. value depending on the mounting position specified in the following table. Correct the fill level if required.
Oil level = wetted section x [mm] of the dipstick
Mounting position during the check
Gear unit type
M5
Lying on the A side
M6
Lying on the B side
W37 in M4 mounting
position
37 1
29 1
W47 in M4 mounting
position
41 1
30 1
WARNING
Danger of burns due to hot gear unit and hot gear unit oil.
Severe injuries.
Let the gear unit cool down before you begin with your work.
However, the gear unit must still be warm otherwise the high viscosity of
excessively cold oil will make it harder to drain the oil properly.
1. Observe the notes in section "Preliminary work regarding gear unit inspection/
maintenance" (page 63).
2. Set up the gear unit in M5 or M6 mounting position.
Positions" (page 82).
80
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Inspection/Maintenance
Inspection/maintenance for the gear unit
NOTICE
Oil seals with a temperature below 0 C may get damaged during installation.
Potential damage to property.
1. When changing the oil seal, ensure that there is a sufficient grease reservoir between
the dust lip and protective lip, depending on the type of gear unit.
2. If you use double oil seals, fill one-third of the gap with grease.
6.6.8
NOTICE
Breather valves and oil seals may be damaged during painting or re-painting.
Potential damage to property.
Thoroughly cover the breather valves and the sealing lip of the oil seals with strips
prior to painting.
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
81
kVA
Mounting Positions
Designation of the mounting positions
P Hz
Mounting Positions
7.1
M6
M6
M1
M1
M2
M5
M2
M5
M4
M4
M3
M3
R..
M6
M6
M1
M2
M2
M1
M5
M5
M4
M4
M3
M3
F..
M6
M1
M1
M6
M2
M5
M5
M2
M4
M4
M3
M3
W..
82
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Mounting Positions
Churning losses
7.2
kVA
i
P Hz
Churning losses
Churning losses may occur in some mounting positions. Contact SEW-EURODRIVE in
case of the following combinations:
Mounting position
M2, M4
Input speed
[rpm]
97 107
> 2500
> 107
>1500
R
F
7.3
97 107
> 2500
> 107
> 1500
77 107
> 2500
> 107
> 1500
77 97
> 2500
37 47
> 1500
Key
INFORMATION
The SPIROPLAN gearmotors are not dependent on the mounting position, except for
W37 and W47 in the M4 mounting position. However, mounting positions M1 to M6
are also shown for SPIROPLAN gearmotors to assist you in working with this documentation.
Note: SPIROPLAN gearmotors of sizes W10 W30 cannot be equipped with breather
valves, oil level plugs or drain plugs.
7.3.1
Symbols used
The following table shows the symbols used in the mounting position sheets and what
they mean:
Symbol
Meaning
Breather valve
Oil level plug
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
83
84
kVA
i
Mounting Positions
Helical gearmotors R
P Hz
7.4
Helical gearmotors R
7.4.1
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Mounting Positions
Helical gearmotors R
7.4.2
kVA
i
P Hz
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
85
kVA
i
7.4.3
86
Mounting Positions
Helical gearmotors R
P Hz
R07F ... R87F
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Mounting Positions
Helical gearmotors RX
7.5
Helical gearmotors RX
7.5.1
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
kVA
i
P Hz
87
kVA
i
7.5.2
88
Mounting Positions
Helical gearmotors RX
P Hz
RXF57 ... RXF107
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Mounting Positions
Parallel-shaft helical gearmotors F
7.6
7.6.1
F27 ... F157 / FA27B ... F157B / FH27B .. FH157B / FV27B ... FV107B
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
kVA
i
P Hz
89
kVA
i
7.6.2
90
Mounting Positions
Parallel-shaft helical gearmotors F
P Hz
FF27 ... FF157 / FAF27 ... FAF157 / FHF27 ... FHF157 / FAZ27 ... FAZ157 / FHZ27 ... FHZ157 / FVF27
... FVF107 / FVZ27 ... FVZ107
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Mounting Positions
Parallel-shaft helical gearmotors F
7.6.3
kVA
i
P Hz
FA27 ... FA157 / FH27 ... FH157 / FV27 ... FV107 / FT37 ... FT157
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
91
92
kVA
i
Mounting Positions
Helical-bevel gearmotors K
P Hz
7.7
Helical-bevel gearmotors K
7.7.1
K37 ... K157 / KA37B ... KA157B / KH37B ... KH157B / KV37B ... KV107B
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Mounting Positions
Helical-bevel gearmotors K
7.7.2
kVA
i
P Hz
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
93
kVA
i
7.7.3
94
Mounting Positions
Helical-bevel gearmotors K
P Hz
KF37 ... KF157 / KAF37 ... KAF157 / KHF37 ... KHF157 / KAZ37 ... KAZ157 / KHZ37 ... KHZ157 /
KVF37 ... KVF107 / KVZ37 ... KVZ107
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Mounting Positions
Helical-bevel gearmotors K
7.7.4
kVA
i
P Hz
KA37 ... KA157 / KH37 ... KH157 / KV37 ... KV107 / KT37 ... KT157
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
95
kVA
i
7.7.5
96
Mounting Positions
Helical-bevel gearmotors K
P Hz
KH167 ... KH187
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Mounting Positions
Helical-worm gearmotors S
7.8
Helical-worm gearmotors S
7.8.1
S37
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
kVA
i
P Hz
97
kVA
i
7.8.2
98
Mounting Positions
Helical-worm gearmotors S
P Hz
S47 ... S97
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Mounting Positions
Helical-worm gearmotors S
7.8.3
kVA
i
P Hz
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
99
kVA
i
7.8.4
100
Mounting Positions
Helical-worm gearmotors S
P Hz
SF47 ... SF97 / SAF47 ... SAF97 / SHF47 ... SHF97 / SAZ47 ... SAZ97 / SHZ47 ... SHZ97
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Mounting Positions
Helical-worm gearmotors S
7.8.5
kVA
i
P Hz
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
101
kVA
i
7.8.6
102
Mounting Positions
Helical-worm gearmotors S
P Hz
SA47 ... SA97 / SH47 ... SH97 / ST47 ... ST97
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Mounting Positions
SPIROPLAN W gearmotors
7.9
SPIROPLAN W gearmotors
7.9.1
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
kVA
i
P Hz
103
kVA
i
7.9.2
104
P Hz
Mounting Positions
SPIROPLAN W gearmotors
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Mounting Positions
SPIROPLAN W gearmotors
7.9.3
kVA
i
P Hz
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
105
kVA
i
7.9.4
106
P Hz
Mounting Positions
SPIROPLAN W gearmotors
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Mounting Positions
SPIROPLAN W gearmotors
7.9.5
kVA
i
P Hz
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
107
kVA
i
7.9.6
108
P Hz
Mounting Positions
SPIROPLAN W gearmotors
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Technical Data
Extended storage
Technical Data
8.1
Extended storage
kVA
i
P Hz
INFORMATION
For storage periods longer than 9 months, SEW-EURODRIVE recommends the "Extended storage" design. Gear units in this design are designated with a corresponding
label.
In this case, a VCI corrosion inhibitor (volatile corrosion inhibitor) is added to the lubricant in these gear units. Please note that this VCI anti-corrosion agent is only effective
in a temperature range of -25 C to +50 C. The flange contact surfaces and shaft ends
are also treated with an anti-corrosion agent.
Observe the storage conditions specified in the following table for extended storage:
8.1.1
Storage conditions
The gear units must remain tightly sealed until taken into operation to prevent the VCI
corrosion protection agent from evaporating.
The gear units come with the oil fill according to the specified mounting position (M1
M6). Check the oil level before you start operating the gear unit for the first time.
Climate zone
Temperate
(Europe, USA,
Canada, China
and Russia,
excluding tropical zones)
Tropical (Asia,
Africa, Central
and South America, Australia,
New Zealand
excluding temperate zones)
Packaging1)
Storage2)
Storage duration
Open
Open
1) The packaging must be carried out by an experienced company using the packaging materials that have been explicitly specified for
the particular application.
2) SEW-EURODRIVE recommends to store the gear units according to the mounting position.
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
109
kVA
i
8.2
Technical Data
Lubricants
P Hz
Lubricants
Unless a special arrangement is made, SEW-EURODRIVE supplies the drives with a
lubricant fill adapted for the specific gear unit and mounting position. The mounting position (M1 M6 section "Mounting positions") must be specified with the order. You must
adapt the lubricant fill in case of any subsequent changes made to the mounting position, see section "Lubricant fill quantities (page 113)"
8.2.1
Ambient temperature
Manufacturer
Type
-40 C to +80 C
Fuchs
Renolit CX-TOM 15
-40 C to +80 C
Klber
-40 C to +40 C
Castrol
Obeen FS 2
-20 C to +40 C
Fuchs
Plantogel 2S
Oil
INFORMATION
The following grease quantities are required:
110
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Technical Data
Lubricants
8.2.2
kVA
i
P Hz
Lubricant table
The lubricant table on the following page shows the permitted lubricants for
SEW-EURODRIVE gear units. Observe the following legend with regards to the lubricant table.
= Mineral oil
CLP PG
CLP HC
= Synthetic hydrocarbons
HCE
HLP
= Hydraulic oil
= Synthetic lubricant (= synthetic-based roller bearing grease)
= Mineral lubricant (= mineral-based rolling bearing grease)
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Low-viscosity grease
6)
Ambient temperature
7)
Grease
Lubricant for the food industry (food grade oil)
Biodegradable oil (lubricant for agriculture, forestry, and water management)
Oil
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
111
112
BS.F..
PS.C..
PS.F..
W...(HW...)
R...,K...(HK...),
F...,S...(HS...)
S...(HS...)
4)
4)
4)
4)
4)
4)
4)
4)
4)
F...
+30
+40
+10
-20
-40
+60
+40
Standard
+40
-20
-40
+40
+60
+40
-20
+40
+40
Standard
-20
-40
+20
+10
+30
+80
+60
+40
Standard
-20
-40
Standard
-20
+0
+20
+10
Standard
-20
-40
-20
-10
-40
-40
-20
-20
-40
-20
-20
-40
-40
-40
-30
+25
+40
+60
+80
CLP (CC)
Oil
H1 PG
API GL5
CLP HC
DIN
51 818
CLP (CC)
CLP HC
H1 PG
CLP PG
H1 PG
API GL5
CLP PG 460
-SEW
CLPHC
NSF H1
CLP HC
CLP HC
2)
1)
1)
Mobil
SHC 626
Mobil
SHC 624
Mobil
Glygoyle 220
Mobil
SHC 624
7)
5)
Mobil
SHC 624
Mobillux
EP 004
Mobilgear 600
XP 220
VG 460
2)
3)
VG 32
00
VG 220
VG 32
Klbersynth
UH1 6-460
Klbersynth
UH1 14-151
Klbersynth
UH1 6-460
Klbersynth
UH1 6-460
Klber SEW
HT-460-5
Klberbio
CA2-460
Klberoil
4UH1-460 N
Klberoil
4UH1-220 N
Klberoil
4UH1-68 N
Klber-Summit
HySyn FG-32
Klbersynth
GH 6-220
Shell Cassida
Fluid HF 68
Shell Cassida
Fluid GL 220
Shell Cassida
Fluid GL 460
Shell Omala
HD 68
2)
VG 460
3)
2)
3)
Mobil
SHC 629
Mobil
SHC 634
Mobil Glygoyle
680
Isoflex
MT 30 ROT
Klber-Summit
HySyn FG-32
VG 220
VG 460
Shell Omala
HD 68
Mobil
SHC 624
Mobil
SHC 626
VG 460
VG 460
VG 68
VG 220
VG 460
VG 32
VG 68
VG 220
VG 150
VG 100
CLP PG
VG 150
CLP HC
VG 460
VG 680
CLP PG
CLP HC
VG 680
VG 22
VG 15
VG 32
CLP (CC)
HLP (HM)
CLP HC
VG 68
HLP (HM)
CLP HC
Klberoil
Mobilgear 600 Shell Omala
GEM 1-150 N
100
XP 100
Klberoil
Mobil DTE 10 Shell Tellus
GEM 1-68 N
T 32
Excel 32
VG 150
VG 100
VG 68-46
VG 32
CLP (CC)
Mobil
SHC 629
VG 150
Aral Degol
GS 220
Aral Degol
BG 100
Aral Degol
BG 680
Aral Degol
BG 46
Aral Degol
BG 100
Aral Degol
PAS 220
Aral Degol
GS 220
Mobil
SHC 630
Mobil
Glygoyle 220
Aral Degol
BG 220
CLP HC
VG 220
VG 220
CLP PG
CLP HC
VG 220
CLP(CC)
Mobil
BP Enersyn
SG-XP 220
BP Energol
GR-XP 100
BP Enersyn
SG-XP 680
BP Energol
GR-XP 680
BP Energol
HLP-HM 15
BP Energol
GR-XP 100
BP Enersyn
SG-XP 220
BP Energol
GR-XP 220
Cetus
PAO 46
Synlube
CLP 220
Meropa 150
Pinnacle
EP 150
Pinnacle
EP 460
Synlube
CLP 680
Meropa 680
Rando
HDZ 15
Cetus
PAO 46
Rando EP
Ashless 46
Meropa 150
Pinnacle
EP 150
Tribol
800/220
Tribol
1100/100
Tribol
800/680
Tribol
1100/680
Tribol
1100/68
Tribol
1100/100
Tribol
1510/220
Tribol
800/220
Synlube
CLP 220
Pinnacle
EP 220
Tribol
1100/220
Tribol
Meropa 220
Optimol
Renolin
PG 220
Renolin
CLP 220
TO T A L
Carter SY 220
Carter EP 220
Renolin Unisyn
CLP 68
Renolin
B 46 HVI
Renolin
CLP 150
Carter EP 100
Equivis ZS 46
OL 32
Renolin
PG 680
Renolin
SEW 680
Renolin
MR 310
Carter EP 680
Equivis ZS 15
Optileb
GT 220
Optileb
HY 68
Optileb
GT 460
Plantogear
460 S
Geralyn
SF 460
OL 32
Renolin Unisyn
CLP 68
Renolin
PG 220
Renolin
CLP 150
Carter SY 220
Carter EP 100
Optiflex A 220
Optigear
BM 100
Renolin Unisyn
Optigear
Carter SH 150
CLP 150
Synthetic X 150
Renolin Unisyn
Optigear
CLP 460
Synthetic X 460
Optiflex
A 680
Optigear
BM 680
Hyspin
AWS 22
Optigear 32
Optigear
BM 100
Optigear
Renolin Unisyn Carter SH 150
Synthetic X 150
CLP 150
Optigear
Renolin Unisyn
Synthetic X 220
CLP 220
Optiflex A 220
Optigear BM 220
-20
-40
-20
-20
+40
ISO,NLGI
4)
4)
-15
Oil
DIN (ISO)
+50 +100
0
Standard
kVA
K...(HK...)
R...
C -50
6)
8
Technical Data
Lubricants
P Hz
Lubricant table
01 751 05 04
2845002123
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Technical Data
Lubricants
8.2.3
kVA
i
P Hz
R.., R..F
Gear unit
R07
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
0.12
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
R17
0.25
0.55
0.35
0.55
0.35
0.40
R27
0.25/0.40
0.70
0.50
0.70
0.50
0.50
R37
0.30/0.95
0.85
0.95
1.05
0.75
0.95
R47
0.70/1.50
1.60
1.50
1.65
1.50
1.50
R57
0.80/1.70
1.90
1.70
2.10
1.70
1.70
R67
1.10/2.30
2.40
2.80
2.90
1.80
2.00
R77
1.20/3.00
3.30
3.60
3.80
2.50
3.40
R87
2.30/6.0
6.4
7.2
7.2
6.3
6.5
R97
4.60/9.8
11.7
11.7
13.4
11.3
11.7
R107
6.0/13.7
16.3
16.9
19.2
13.2
15.9
R137
10.0/25.0
28.0
29.5
31.5
25.0
25.0
R147
15.4/40.0
46.5
48.0
52.0
39.5
41.0
R167
27.0/70.0
82.0
78.0
88.0
66.0
69.0
1) The larger gear unit of multi-stage gear units must be filled with the larger oil volume.
RF..
Gear unit
RF07
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
0.12
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
RF17
0.25
0.55
0.35
0.55
0.35
0.40
RF27
0.25/0.40
0.70
0.50
0.70
0.50
0.50
RF37
0.35/0.95
0.90
0.95
1.05
0.75
0.95
RF47
0.65/1.50
1.60
1.50
1.65
1.50
1.50
RF57
0.80/1.70
1.80
1.70
2.00
1.70
1.70
RF67
1.20/2.50
2.50
2.70
2.80
1.90
2.10
RF77
1.20/2.60
3.10
3.30
3.60
2.40
3.00
RF87
2.40/6.0
6.4
7.1
7.2
6.3
6.4
RF97
5.1/10.2
11.9
11.2
14.0
11.2
11.8
RF107
6.3/14.9
15.9
17.0
19.2
13.1
15.9
RF137
9.5/25.0
27.0
29.0
32.5
25.0
25.0
RF147
16.4/42.0
47.0
48.0
52.0
42.0
42.0
RF167
26.0/70.0
82.0
78.0
88.0
65.0
71.0
1) The larger gear unit of multi-stage gear units must be filled with the larger oil volume.
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
113
kVA
i
Technical Data
Lubricants
P Hz
RX..
Gear unit
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
RX57
0.60
0.80
1.30
1.30
0.90
0.90
RX67
0.80
0.80
1.70
1.90
1.10
1.10
RX77
1.10
1.50
2.60
2.70
1.60
1.60
RX87
1.70
2.50
4.80
4.80
2.90
2.90
RX97
2.10
3.40
7.4
7.0
4.80
4.80
RX107
3.90
5.6
11.6
11.9
7.7
7.7
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
RXF57
0.50
0.80
1.10
1.10
0.70
0.70
RXF67
0.70
0.80
1.50
1.40
1.00
1.00
RXF77
0.90
1.30
2.40
2.00
1.60
1.60
RXF87
1.60
1.95
4.90
3.95
2.90
2.90
RXF97
2.10
3.70
7.1
6.3
4.80
4.80
RXF107
3.10
5.7
11.2
9.3
7.2
7.2
RXF..
Gear unit
114
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Technical Data
Lubricants
kVA
i
P Hz
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
F..27
0.60
0.80
0.65
0.70
0.60
0.60
F..37
0.95
1.25
0.70
1.25
1.00
1.10
F..47
1.50
1.80
1.10
1.90
1.50
1.70
F..57
2.60
3.50
2.10
3.50
2.80
2.90
F..67
2.70
3.80
1.90
3.80
2.90
3.20
F..77
5.9
7.3
4.30
8.0
6.0
6.3
F..87
10.8
13.0
7.7
13.8
10.8
11.0
F..97
18.5
22.5
12.6
25.2
18.5
20.0
F..107
24.5
32.0
19.5
37.5
27.0
27.0
F..127
40.5
54.5
34.0
61.0
46.3
47.0
F..157
69.0
104.0
63.0
105.0
86.0
78.0
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
FF27
0.60
0.80
0.65
0.70
0.60
0.60
FF37
1.00
1.25
0.70
1.30
1.00
1.10
FF47
1.60
1.85
1.10
1.90
1.50
1.70
FF57
2.80
3.50
2.10
3.70
2.90
3.00
FF67
2.70
3.80
1.90
3.80
2.90
3.20
FF77
5.9
7.3
4.30
8.1
6.0
6.3
FF87
10.8
13.2
7.8
14.1
11.0
11.2
FF..
Gear unit
FF97
19.0
22.5
12.6
25.6
18.9
20.5
FF107
25.5
32.0
19.5
38.5
27.5
28.0
FF127
41.5
55.5
34.0
63.0
46.3
49.0
FF157
72.0
105.0
64.0
106.0
87.0
79.0
FA.., FH.., FV.., FAF.., FAZ.., FHF.., FHZ.., FVF.., FVZ.., FT..
Gear unit
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
F..27
0.60
0.80
0.65
0.70
0.60
0.60
F..37
0.95
1.25
0.70
1.25
1.00
1.10
F..47
1.50
1.80
1.10
1.90
1.50
1.70
F..57
2.70
3.50
2.10
3.40
2.90
3.00
F..67
2.70
3.80
1.90
3.80
2.90
3.20
F..77
5.9
7.3
4.30
8.0
6.0
6.3
F..87
10.8
13.0
7.7
13.8
10.8
11.0
F..97
18.5
22.5
12.6
25.2
18.5
20.0
F..107
24.5
32.0
19.5
37.5
27.0
27.0
F..127
39.0
54.5
34.0
61.0
45.0
46.5
F..157
68.0
103.0
62.0
104.0
85.0
79.5
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
115
kVA
i
Technical Data
Lubricants
P Hz
Helical-bevel (K)
gear units
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
K..37
0.50
1.00
1.00
1.25
0.95
0.95
K..47
0.80
1.30
1.50
2.00
1.60
1.60
K..57
1.10
2.20
2.20
2.80
2.30
2.10
K..67
1.10
2.40
2.60
3.45
2.60
2.60
K..77
2.20
4.10
4.40
5.8
4.20
4.40
K..87
3.70
8.0
8.7
10.9
8.0
8.0
K..97
7.0
14.0
15.7
20.0
15.7
15.5
K..107
10.0
21.0
25.5
33.5
24.0
24.0
K..127
21.0
41.5
44.0
54.0
40.0
41.0
K..157
31.0
62.0
65.0
90.0
58.0
62.0
K..167
33.0
95.0
105.0
123.0
85.0
84.0
K..187
53.0
152.0
167.0
200
143.0
143.0
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
KF37
0.50
1.10
1.10
1.50
1.00
1.00
KF47
0.80
1.30
1.70
2.20
1.60
1.60
KF57
1.20
2.20
2.40
3.15
2.50
2.30
KF67
1.10
2.40
2.80
3.70
2.70
2.70
KF77
2.10
4.10
4.40
5.9
4.50
4.50
KF87
3.70
8.2
9.0
11.9
8.4
8.4
KF97
7.0
14.7
17.3
21.5
15.7
16.5
KF..
Gear unit
KF107
10.0
21.8
25.8
35.1
25.2
25.2
KF127
21.0
41.5
46.0
55.0
41.0
41.0
KF157
31.0
66.0
69.0
92.0
62.0
62.0
KA.., KH.., KV.., KAF.., KHF.., KVF.., KAZ.., KHZ.., KVZ.., KT..
Gear unit
116
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
K..37
0.50
1.00
1.00
1.40
1.00
1.00
K..47
0.80
1.30
1.60
2.15
1.60
1.60
K..57
1.20
2.20
2.40
3.15
2.70
2.40
K..67
1.10
2.40
2.70
3.70
2.60
2.60
K..77
2.10
4.10
4.60
5.9
4.40
4.40
K..87
3.70
8.2
8.8
11.1
8.0
8.0
K..97
7.0
14.7
15.7
20.0
15.7
15.7
K..107
10.0
20.5
24.0
32.4
24.0
24.0
K..127
21.0
41.5
43.0
52.0
40.0
40.0
K..157
31.0
66.0
67.0
87.0
62.0
62.0
K..167
33.0
95.0
105.0
123.0
85.0
84.0
K..187
53.0
152.0
167.0
200
143.0
143.0
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Technical Data
Lubricants
Helical-worm (S)
gear units
kVA
i
P Hz
S
Gear unit
M2
M31)
M4
M5
M6
S..37
0.25
0.40
0.50
0.55
0.40
0.40
S..47
0.35
0.80
0.70/0.90
1.00
0.80
0.80
S..57
0.50
1.20
1.00/1.20
1.45
1.30
1.30
S..67
1.00
2.00
2.20/3.10
3.10
2.60
2.60
S..77
1.90
4.20
3.70/5.4
5.9
4.40
4.40
S..87
3.30
8.1
6.9/10.4
11.3
8.4
8.4
S..97
6.8
15.0
13.4/18.0
21.8
17.0
17.0
1) The larger gear unit of multi-stage gear units must be filled with the larger oil volume.
SF..
Gear unit
M2
M31)
M4
M5
M6
SF37
0.25
0.40
0.50
0.55
0.40
0.40
SF47
0.40
0.90
0.90/1.05
1.05
1.00
1.00
SF57
0.50
1.20
1.00/1.50
1.55
1.40
1.40
SF67
1.00
2.20
2.30/3.00
3.20
2.70
2.70
SF77
1.90
4.10
3.90/5.8
6.5
4.90
4.90
SF87
3.80
8.0
7.1/10.1
12.0
9.1
9.1
SF97
7.4
15.0
13.8/18.8
22.6
18.0
18.0
1) The larger gear unit of multi-stage gear units must be filled with the larger oil volume.
M2
M31)
M4
M5
M6
S..37
0.25
0.40
0.50
0.50
0.40
0.40
S..47
0.40
0.80
0.70/0.90
1.00
0.80
0.80
S..57
0.50
1.10
1.00/1.50
1.50
1.20
1.20
S..67
1.00
2.00
1.80/2.60
2.90
2.50
2.50
S..77
1.80
3.90
3.60/5.0
5.8
4.50
4.50
S..87
3.80
7.4
6.0/8.7
10.8
8.0
8.0
S..97
7.0
14.0
11.4/16.0
20.5
15.7
15.7
1) The larger gear unit of multi-stage gear units must be filled with the larger oil volume.
SPIROPLAN
(W) gear units
The fill quantity of SPIROPLAN gear units W..10 to W..30 does not vary, irrespective
of their mounting position. Only the fill quantity of SPIROPLAN gear units W..37 and
W..47 in mounting position M4 are different from that of other mounting positions.
Gear unit
M2
M3
M4
W..10
0.16
W..20
0.24
W..30
M5
M6
0.40
W..37
0.50
0.70
0.50
W..47
0.90
1.40
0.90
WF47
0.90
1.40
0.90
WA47
0.90
1.25
0.90
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
117
kVA
Malfunctions/Service
Gear unit
P Hz
Malfunctions/Service
WARNING
Risk of crushing if the drive starts up unintentionally.
Severe or fatal injuries.
CAUTION
Danger of burns due to hot gear unit and hot gear unit oil.
Severe injuries.
Let the gear unit cool down before you start working on it.
Only remove the oil level and oil drain plug very carefully.
NOTICE
Improper handling of the gear unit and the motor may lead to damages.
Possible damage to property
9.1
Any repair work on SEW drives may be performed by qualified personnel only.
Gear unit
Fault
Possible cause
Remedy
Oil leakage1)
From inspection cover
From the motor flange
From the motor oil seal
From the gear unit
flange
From the output end oil
seal.
Seal defective.
Correct the oil fill quantity see "Inspection/maintenance for the gear unit" (page 67),
1) Short-term oil / grease leakage at the oil seal is possible in the run-in phase (48 hours running time).
118
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Malfunctions/Service
AM/AQ/AL adapter
9.2
AM/AQ/AL adapter
Malfunction
Possible cause
Remedy
Oil leaking
Seal defective
9.3
Malfunction
Possible cause
Remedy
Oil leaking
Seal defective
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
119
Malfunctions/Service
Customer service
9.4
Customer service
Please have the following information available if you require customer service
assistance:
Assumed cause
9.5
Disposal
Dispose gear units in accordance with the regulations in force regarding respective materials:
Steel scrap
Housing parts
Gears
Shafts
Roller bearing
120
Parts of the worm gears are made of non-ferrous metals. Dispose of the worm gears
as appropriate.
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Address List
10
10
Address List
Germany
Headquarters
Production
Sales
Bruchsal
Central
North
East
South
West
Electronics
Haguenau
SEW-USOCOME
48-54 route de Soufflenheim
B. P. 20185
F-67506 Haguenau Cedex
Tel. +33 3 88 73 67 00
Fax +33 3 88 73 66 00
http://www.usocome.com
sew@usocome.com
Production
Forbach
SEW-USOCOME
Zone industrielle
Technople Forbach Sud
B. P. 30269
F-57604 Forbach Cedex
Tel. +33 3 87 29 38 00
Assembly
Sales
Service
Bordeaux
SEW-USOCOME
Parc d'activits de Magellan
62 avenue de Magellan - B. P. 182
F-33607 Pessac Cedex
Tel. +33 5 57 26 39 00
Fax +33 5 57 26 39 09
Lyon
SEW-USOCOME
Parc d'affaires Roosevelt
Rue Jacques Tati
F-69120 Vaulx en Velin
Tel. +33 4 72 15 37 00
Fax +33 4 72 15 37 15
Nantes
SEW-USOCOME
Parc dactivits de la fort
4 rue des Fontenelles
F-44140 Le Bignon
Tel. +33 2 40 78 42 00
Fax +33 2 40 78 42 20
Paris
SEW-USOCOME
Zone industrielle
2 rue Denis Papin
F-77390 Verneuil I'Etang
Tel. +33 1 64 42 40 80
Fax +33 1 64 42 40 88
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
121
Address List
10
Algeria
Sales
Alger
REDUCOM Sarl
16, rue des Frres Zaghnoune
Bellevue
16200 El Harrach Alger
Buenos Aires
Melbourne
Sydney
Wien
SEW-EURODRIVE Ges.m.b.H.
Richard-Strauss-Strasse 24
A-1230 Wien
Minsk
SEW-EURODRIVE BY
RybalkoStr. 26
BY-220033 Minsk
Assembly
Sales
Service
Brussels
SEW Caron-Vector
Research park Haasrode
Evenementenlaan 7
BE-3001 Leuven
Industrial Gears
SEW Caron-Vector
Rue de Parc Industriel, 31
BE-6900 Marche-en-Famenne
Antwerp
SEW Caron-Vector
Glasstraat, 19
BE-2170 Merksem
Sao Paulo
Sofia
BEVER-DRIVE GmbH
Bogdanovetz Str.1
BG-1606 Sofia
Argentina
Assembly
Sales
Service
Australia
Assembly
Sales
Service
Austria
Assembly
Sales
Service
Belarus
Sales
Belgium
Brazil
Production
Sales
Service
Bulgaria
Sales
122
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Address List
10
Cameroon
Sales
Douala
Electro-Services
Rue Drouot Akwa
B.P. 2024
Douala
Toronto
Vancouver
Montreal
Canada
Assembly
Sales
Service
Production
Assembly
Sales
Service
Tianjin
Assembly
Sales
Service
Suzhou
Guangzhou
Shenyang
Wuhan
Xi'An
Assembly
Sales
Service
China
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
123
Address List
10
Colombia
Assembly
Sales
Service
Bogot
Zagreb
KOMPEKS d. o. o.
Zeleni dol 10
HR 10 000 Zagreb
Prague
SEW-EURODRIVE CZ S.R.O.
Business Centrum Praha
Lun 591
CZ-16000 Praha 6 - Vokovice
Copenhagen
SEW-EURODRIVEA/S
Geminivej 28-30
DK-2670 Greve
Cairo
Copam Egypt
for Engineering & Agencies
33 EI Hegaz ST, Heliopolis, Cairo
Tallin
ALAS-KUUL AS
Reti tee 4
EE-75301 Peetri kla, Rae vald, Harjumaa
Assembly
Sales
Service
Lahti
SEW-EURODRIVE OY
Vesimentie 4
FIN-15860 Hollola 2
Production
Assembly
Karkkila
Libreville
Normanton
SEW-EURODRIVE Ltd.
Beckbridge Industrial Estate
P.O. Box No.1
Normanton, West-Yorkshire
WF6 1QR
Croatia
Sales
Service
Czech Republic
Sales
Denmark
Assembly
Sales
Service
Egypt
Sales
Service
Estonia
Sales
Finland
Gabon
Sales
Great Britain
Assembly
Sales
Service
124
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Address List
10
Greece
Sales
Service
Athens
Hong Kong
SEW-EURODRIVE LTD.
Unit No. 801-806, 8th Floor
Hong Leong Industrial Complex
No. 4, Wang Kwong Road
Kowloon, Hong Kong
Budapest
SEW-EURODRIVE Kft.
H-1037 Budapest
Kunigunda u. 18
Registered Office
Assembly
Sales
Service
Vadodara
Assembly
Sales
Service
Chennai
Dublin
Tel-Aviv
Solaro
Abidjan
SICA
Socit industrielle & commerciale pour
l'Afrique
165, Boulevard de Marseille
26 BP 1115 Abidjan 26
Tel. +225 21 25 79 44
Fax +225 21 25 88 28
sicamot@aviso.ci
Hong Kong
Assembly
Sales
Service
Hungary
Sales
Service
India
Ireland
Sales
Service
Israel
Sales
Italy
Assembly
Sales
Service
Ivory Coast
Sales
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
125
Address List
10
Japan
Assembly
Sales
Service
Iwata
Almaty
"-"
050061,
., ., 348
Riga
SIA Alas-Kuul
Katlakalna 11C
LV-1073 Riga
Sales
Beirut
Jordan
Kuwait
Saudi Arabia
Syria
Beirut
Alytus
UAB Irseva
Statybininku 106C
LT-63431 Alytus
Brssel
CARON-VECTOR S.A.
Avenue Eiffel 5
B-1300 Wavre
Johore
Quretaro
SEW-EURODRIVE MEXICO SA DE CV
SEM-981118-M93
Tequisquiapan No. 102
Parque Industrial Quretaro
C.P. 76220
Quretaro, Mxico
Casablanca
Afit
Route DEl Jadida
KM 14 RP8
Province de Nouaceur
Commune Rurale de Bouskoura
MA 20300 Casablanca
Kazakhstan
Sales
Latvia
Sales
Lebanon
Lithuania
Sales
Luxembourg
Assembly
Sales
Service
Malaysia
Assembly
Sales
Service
Mexico
Assembly
Sales
Service
Morocco
Sales
126
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Address List
10
Netherlands
Assembly
Sales
Service
Rotterdam
Auckland
Christchurch
Moss
SEW-EURODRIVE A/S
Solgaard skog 71
N-1599 Moss
Tel. +47 69 24 10 20
Fax +47 69 24 10 40
http://www.sew-eurodrive.no
sew@sew-eurodrive.no
Karachi
Lima
Lodz
New Zealand
Assembly
Sales
Service
Norway
Assembly
Sales
Service
Pakistan
Sales
Peru
Assembly
Sales
Service
Poland
Assembly
Sales
Service
24 Hour Service
Portugal
Assembly
Sales
Service
Coimbra
SEW-EURODRIVE, LDA.
Apartado 15
P-3050-901 Mealhada
Bucharest
St. Petersburg
ZAO SEW-EURODRIVE
P.O. Box 36
195220 St. Petersburg Russia
Romania
Sales
Service
Russia
Assembly
Sales
Service
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
127
Address List
10
Senegal
Sales
Dakar
SENEMECA
Mcanique Gnrale
Km 8, Route de Rufisque
B.P. 3251, Dakar
Beograd
DIPAR d.o.o.
Ustanicka 128a
PC Koum, IV floor
SCG-11000 Beograd
Singapore
Bratislava
SEW-Eurodrive SK s.r.o.
Rybnin 40
SK-831 06 Bratislava
ilina
SEW-Eurodrive SK s.r.o.
Industry Park - PChZ
ulica M.R.tefnika 71
SK-010 01 ilina
Bansk Bystrica
SEW-Eurodrive SK s.r.o.
Rudlovsk cesta 85
SK-974 11 Bansk Bystrica
Koice
SEW-Eurodrive SK s.r.o.
Slovensk ulica 26
SK-040 01 Koice
Celje
Johannesburg
Cape Town
Serbia
Sales
Singapore
Assembly
Sales
Service
Slovakia
Sales
Slovenia
Sales
Service
South Africa
Assembly
Sales
Service
128
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Address List
10
South Africa
Durban
Nelspruit
Ansan-City
Busan
Bilbao
Jnkping
SEW-EURODRIVE AB
Gnejsvgen 6-8
S-55303 Jnkping
Box 3100 S-55003 Jnkping
Basel
Chonburi
Tunis
Tel. +216 79 40 88 77
Fax +216 79 40 88 66
tms@tms.com.tn
Istanbul
SEW-EURODRIVE
Hareket Sistemleri San. ve Tic. Ltd. Sti.
Bagdat Cad. Koruma Cikmazi No. 3
TR-34846 Maltepe ISTANBUL
South Korea
Assembly
Sales
Service
Spain
Assembly
Sales
Service
Sweden
Assembly
Sales
Service
Switzerland
Assembly
Sales
Service
Thailand
Assembly
Sales
Service
Tunisia
Sales
Turkey
Assembly
Sales
Service
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
129
Address List
10
Ukraine
Sales
Service
Dnepropetrovsk
SEW-EURODRIVE
Str. Rabochaja 23-B, Office 409
49008 Dnepropetrovsk
Sharjah
Production
Assembly
Sales
Service
Corporate Offices
Southeast
Region
SEW-EURODRIVE INC.
1295 Old Spartanburg Highway
P.O. Box 518
Lyman, S.C. 29365
Assembly
Sales
Service
Northeast
Region
SEW-EURODRIVE INC.
Pureland Ind. Complex
2107 High Hill Road, P.O. Box 481
Bridgeport, New Jersey 08014
Midwest Region
SEW-EURODRIVE INC.
2001 West Main Street
Troy, Ohio 45373
Southwest
Region
SEW-EURODRIVE INC.
3950 Platinum Way
Dallas, Texas 75237
Western Region
SEW-EURODRIVE INC.
30599 San Antonio St.
Hayward, CA 94544
USA
Valencia
Vietnam
Sales
130
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
Index
Index
A
AD input shaft assembly ........................................56
Anti-friction bearing greases ................................110
Gear units
Coating ..............................................................81
Gear units with solid shaft......................................25
Backstop ................................................................62
Breather .................................................................23
C
Changing the mounting position ............................20
Changing the oil .....................................................67
Checking the oil .....................................................67
Checking the oil level .............................................67
Via oil level plug ...............................68, 77, 78, 81
Via the cover plate .............................................70
Via the screw plug........................................74, 79
Churning losses .....................................................83
Coating
Gear unit ............................................................81
Copyright..................................................................6
Customer service .................................................120
I
Inspection ..............................................................63
AD input cover ...................................................66
AL/AM/AQ adapter.............................................66
Changing the oil.................................................67
Checking the oil .................................................67
Checking the oil level.........................................67
Gear unit ............................................................67
Inspection intervals ................................................64
Installation
Mechanical.........................................................17
Installation tolerances ............................................17
Installing the gear unit............................................19
D
Disposal ...............................................................120
M
F
Flatness errors .......................................................19
G
Gear unit
Installation..........................................................19
Gear unit painting...................................................25
Gear unit structre
Helical-worm gear units .....................................13
SPIROPLAN W10-W30 gear units ..................14
Gear unit structure .................................................10
Helical gear units ...............................................10
Helical-bevel gear units......................................12
Parallel-shaft helical gear units ..........................11
SPIROPLAN W37-W47 gear units ..................15
Maintenance ..........................................................63
AL/AM/AQ adapter.............................................66
Changing the oil.................................................67
Checking the oil .................................................67
Checking the oil level.........................................67
Gear unit ............................................................67
Input cover AD ...................................................66
Maintenance intervals............................................64
Malfunctions
AD input shaft assembly ..................................119
AM/AQ/AL adapter...........................................119
Gear unit .......................................................... 118
Mechanical installation...........................................17
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
131
Index
132
S
Safety notes
Designation in the documentation .......................5
Structure of the embedded safety notes..............5
Structure of the section-specific safety notes ......5
Section-specific safety notes ...................................5
Service................................................................. 120
Shaft-mounted gear units
Keyway ..............................................................30
Shrink disk .........................................................37
Splined hollow shaft...........................................30
TorqLOC .........................................................41
Signal words in the safety notes ..............................5
Solid shaft ..............................................................25
SPIROPLAN W10-W30 gear units......................14
SPIROPLAN W37-W47 gear units......................15
Startup ...................................................................61
Structure
Helical gear units ...............................................10
Helical-bevel gear units .....................................12
Helical-worm gear units .....................................13
Parallel-shaft helical gear units..........................11
SPIROPLAN W10-W30 gear units..................14
SPIROPLAN W37-W47 gear units..................15
T
Tightening torques .................................................21
Torque arms for shaft-mounted gear units
Helical-bevel gear units .....................................28
Helical-worm gear units .....................................28
Parallel shaft helical gear units ..........................27
SPIROPLAN W gear units ..............................29
Operating Instructions Gear Units R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W Series
SEW-EURODRIVE
Driving the world
www.sew-eurodrive.com
Operating Instructions
Edition 03/2011
17055628 / EN
Contents
Contents
1
1.2
1.3
1.4
Exclusion of liability..................................................................................... 7
1.5
Copyright..................................................................................................... 7
1.6
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
Transport/storage...................................................................................... 11
2.8
Installation ................................................................................................ 12
2.9
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
Mechanical Installation..................................................................................... 22
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
Mounting tolerances.................................................................................. 26
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
Additional regulations................................................................................ 35
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
Contents
5.7
5.8
5.9
Startup................................................................................................................ 70
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
Inspection/Maintenance ................................................................................... 75
7.1
7.2
7.3
Reinforced bearing.................................................................................... 78
7.4
Corrosion protection.................................................................................. 78
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
8.9
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
Contents
10
Appendix.......................................................................................................... 150
10.1 Wiring diagrams ...................................................................................... 150
10.2 Auxiliary terminals 1 and 2 ...................................................................... 163
11
General Information
How to use this documentation
1
1
General Information
1.1
1.2
1.2.1
1.2.2
Meaning
Consequences if disregarded
DANGER
Imminent danger
WARNING
CAUTION
Minor injuries
NOTICE
INFORMATION
SIGNAL WORD
Type and source of danger.
Possible consequence(s) if disregarded.
1.2.3
General Information
Rights to claim under warranty
1.3
1.4
Exclusion of liability
You must comply with the information contained in this documentation to ensure safe
operation of the DR.. AC motors units and to achieve the specified product characteristics and performance requirements. SEW-EURODRIVE assumes no liability for injury to
persons or damage to equipment or property resulting from non-observance of the documentation. In such cases, any liability for defects is excluded.
1.5
Copyright
2011 - SEW-EURODRIVE. All rights reserved.
Copyright law prohibits the unauthorized duplication, modification, distribution, and use
of this document, in whole or in part.
1.6
Safety Notes
Preliminary information
2
2
Safety Notes
The following basic safety notes must be read carefully to prevent injury to persons and
damage to property. The operator must ensure that the basic safety notes are read and
adhered to. Make sure that persons responsible for the system and its operation, as well
as persons who work independently on the unit, have read through the operating instructions carefully and understood them. If you are unclear about any of the information in
this documentation or if you require further information, please contact
SEW-EURODRIVE.
2.1
Preliminary information
The following safety notes are primarily concerned with the use of the following components: DR.. AC motors. If using gearmotors, please also refer to the safety notes in the
corresponding operating instructions for:
Gear unit
Also observe the supplementary safety notes in the individual sections of this documentation.
2.2
General information
WARNING
During operation, the motors and gearmotors can have live, bare (in the event of open
connectors/terminal boxes) and movable or rotating parts as well as hot surfaces, depending on their enclosure.
Severe or fatal injuries.
Removing the required protection cover or the housing without authorization, improper
use as well as incorrect installation or operation may result in severe injuries to persons
or damage to property.
This documentation provides additional information.
Safety Notes
Target group
2.3
Target group
Any mechanical work may only be performed by adequately qualified personnel. Qualified staff in the context of this documentation are persons familiar with the design, mechanical installation, troubleshooting and servicing of the product who possess the following qualifications:
Any electronic work may only be performed by adequately qualified electricians. Qualified electricians in the context of this documentation are persons familiar with electrical
installation, startup, troubleshooting and servicing of the product who possess the following qualifications:
All work in further areas of transportation, storage, operation and waste disposal must
only be carried out by persons who are trained appropriately.
All qualified personnel must wear appropriate protective clothing.
2.4
Inverter
(e.g.
MOVIMOT)
Brake
Manual
brake
release
monitoring
Brake monitoring
Motor protection
02
03
04
05
06
07
x
x
x
08
09
10
11
12
13
Encoder
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Safety Notes
Designated use
Brake
Manual
brake
release
monitoring
15
16
17
Functional
Safety
14
Inverter
(e.g.
MOVIMOT)
Brake monitoring
Motor protection
x
x
x
x
x
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Encoder
If the drive bears the FS mark on the nameplate, you must adhere to the information in
the following documents:
"Functional Safety for AC Motors DR.71-225, 315 Geber" addendum to the operating instructions
"Functional Safety for AC Motors DR.71-225, 315 Brakes" addendum to the operating instructions
You find the characteristic safety values of the following components in the technical
data (page 143) section so you can determine the security level for systems and machines yourself:
The characteristic safety values of SEW components are also available on the SEW
homepage on the internet and in the SEW library for the BGIA Sistema software.
2.5
Designated use
The DR.. AC motors are intended for industrial systems.
When installed in machines, startup of the motors (i.e. start of designated operation) is
prohibited until it is determined that the machine meets the requirements stipulated in
Directive 2006/42/EC (Machinery Directive).
Use in potentially explosive atmospheres is prohibited, unless measures are expressly
taken to make it possible.
Air-cooled motors/gearmotors are dimensioned for ambient temperatures of -20 C to
+40 C and installation altitudes 1000 m above sea level. Note that information on the
nameplate may differ. The ambient conditions must comply with all the specifications on
the nameplate.
10
Safety Notes
Other applicable documentation
2.6
2.6.1
2.7
"Gear Unit Series R..7, F..7, K..7, S..7, SPIROPLAN W" operating instructions for
gearmotors
Transport/storage
Inspect the shipment for any damage that may have occurred in transit as soon as you
receive the delivery. Inform the shipping company immediately. It may be necessary to
preclude startup.
Tighten the eyebolts securely. They are designed to only carry the weight of the motor/
gearmotor; do not attach any additional loads.
The built-in lifting eyebolts comply with DIN 580. Always observe the loads and regulations listed in this standard. If the gearmotor is equipped with two eyebolts, then both of
these should be used for transportation. In this case, the tension force vector of the
slings must not exceed a 45 angle according to DIN 580.
Use suitable, sufficiently rated handling equipment if required. Reattach these in the
case of further transportation.
Store the motor in a dry, dust-free environment if it is not to be installed straight away.
You must not store the motor in the open or on the fan guard. The motor can be stored
for one year without requiring any special measures before startup.
11
Safety Notes
Installation
2
2.8
Installation
Make sure that the supports are even, the foot and flange mounting is correct and if
there is direct coupling, align with precision. Resonances between the rotational frequency and the double network frequency caused by the structure are to be avoided.
Release the brake (if installed), turn rotor manually, check for unusual grinding noise.
Check the direction of rotation in decoupled status.
Only install or remove belt pulleys and couplings using suitable devices (heat up) and
cover with a touch guard. Avoid improper belt tension.
Make the pipe connections that may eventually be required. Mounting positions with
shaft ends pointing upwards should be equipped with a cover to prevent foreign objects
from falling into the fan. Ensure that ventilation openings are not obstructed and that
used air, including air from adjacent units, cannot be drawn in again straight away.
Observe the notes in the "Mechanical Installation" section.
2.9
Electrical connection
All work may only be carried out by qualified personnel. During work, the low-voltage
machine must be on standstill, enabled, and safeguarded against an accidental restart.
This also applies to auxiliary circuits (e.g. anti-condensation heating or forced cooling
fan).
Check that the motor is de-energized!
Exceeding the tolerances in EN 60034-1 (VDE 0530, part 1) voltage + 5%, frequency
+ 2%, curve shape, symmetry increases the heating and influences electromagnetic
compatibility. Also comply with EN 50110 (where necessary, observe other applicable
national regulations, such as DIN VDE 0105 for Germany).
Observe the wiring information and differing data on the nameplate as well as the wiring
diagram in the terminal box.
The connection should be a continuous secure electrical connection (no protruding wire
ends); use the cable end equipment intended for this purpose. Establish a secure protective earth connection. When the motor is connected, the distances to non-insulated
and live parts must not be shorter than the minimum values according to IEC 60664 and
national regulations. With low voltage, the distances should be no shorter than the following values, in compliance with IEC 60664:
Nominal voltage VN
Distance
500 V
3 mm
690 V
5.5 mm
The terminal box must be free of foreign objects, dirt and humidity. Unused cable entry
openings and the box itself must be closed so that they are dust and water proof. Secure
keys for test mode without output elements. When operating low-voltage machines with
brakes, check that the brake is functioning correctly before startup.
Observe the notes in the "Electrical Installation" chapter.
12
Safety Notes
Startup/operation
2.10
Startup/operation
Whenever changes to normal operation occur, such as increased temperatures, noise,
vibrations, etc., you should determine the cause. Consult the manufacturer if required.
Never deactivate protection devices, even in test mode. Switch off the motor if you are
not sure.
Regularly clean air ducts in dusty or dirty environments.
13
Motor Structure
DR.71 - DR.132 basic structure
3
3
Motor Structure
INFORMATION
The following illustration is intended to explain the general structure. It helps you to assign components to the spare parts list. Deviations are possible depending on the
motor size and version.
3.1
[123]
[132]
[262]
[131]
[156]
[119]
[117]
[118]
[116]
[134]
[113]
[112]
[707]
[115]
[111]
[129]
[705]
[706]
[35]
[30]
[9]
[13]
[392]
[12]
[16]
[24]
[108]
[42]
[41]
[22]
[109]
[32]
[100]
[103]
[106]
[1]
[90]
[93]
[107]
[11]
[7]
[44]
[2] [3]
[36]
[10]
173332747
[1] Rotor
[2] Retaining ring
[3] Key
[7] Flanged end shield
[9] Screw plug
[10] Retaining ring
[11] Grooved ball bearing
[12] Retaining ring
[13] Machine screw
[16] Stator
[22] Hex head screw
[24] Lifting eyebolt
14
Motor Structure
DR.160 - DR.180 basic structure
3.2
[123]
[132]
[131]
[116]
[128]
[140]
[139]
[119]
[156]
[112]
[111]
[115]
[108]
[113] [129]
[134]
[390]
[109]
[24]
[9]
[12]
[7]
[707]
[106]
[107]
[706]
[17]
[103]
[100]
[14]
[10]
[104]
[94] [93]
[15] [16]
[90]
[41]
[19]
[42] [22]
[91]
[31]
[30]
[715]
[705]
[35]
[32]
[44]
[36]
[3] [1]
[11] [2]
527322635
[1] Rotor
[2] Retaining ring
[3] Key
[7] Flange
[9] Screw plug
[10] Retaining ring
[11] Grooved ball bearing
[12] Retaining ring
[14] Washer
[15] Hex head screw
[16] Stator
[17] Hex nut
[19] Machine screw
[22] Hex head screw
[24] Lifting eyebolt
[30] Sealing ring
[31] Key
[32] Retaining ring
[35] Fan guard
[36] Fan
[41] Cup spring
[42] B-side endshield
[44] Grooved ball bearing
[90] Foot
[91] Hex nut
[93] Washer
[94] Machine screw
[100] Hex nut
[103] Stud
[104] Supporting ring
[106] Oil seal
[107] Oil flinger
[108] Nameplate
[109] Grooved pin
[111] Gasket for lower part
[112] Terminal box lower part
[113] Screw
[115] Terminal board
[116] Serrated lock washer
[117] Stud
[118] Washer
[119] Machine screw
[121] Grooved pin
[123] Hex head screw
[128] Serrated lock washer
[129] Screw plug with O-ring
[131] Gasket for cover
15
Motor Structure
DR.200 - DR.225 basic structure
3
3.3
[123]
[132]
[131]
[156]
[129]
[134]
[128]
[140]
[139]
[119]
[112]
[111]
[9]
[107]
[105]
[15]
[108]
[24]
[109]
[616]
[116]
[113]
[390]
[115]
[106]
[42]
[93]
[94]
[103]
[100]
[7]
[16]
[2]
[22]
[19] [26]
[25]
[30]
[35]
[715]
[706]
[705]
[36]
[90]
[21]
[44] [43]
[707]
[32]
[40]
[31]
[1]
[11]
[3]
1077856395
[1] Rotor
[2] Retaining ring
[3] Key
[7] Flange
[9] Screw plug
[11] Grooved ball bearing
[15] Hex head screw
[16] Stator
[19] Machine screw
[21] Oil seal flange
[22] Hex head screw
[24] Lifting eyebolt
[25] Machine screw
[26] Sealing washer
[30] Oil seal
16
[31] Key
[32] Retaining ring
[35] Fan guard
[36] Fan
[40] Retaining ring
[42] B-side endshield
[43] Supporting ring
[44] Grooved ball bearing
[90] Foot
[93] Washer
[94] Machine screw
[100] Hex nut
[103] Stud
[105] Cup spring
[106] Oil seal
Motor Structure
DR.315 basic structure
3.4
[123]
[452]
[634]
[633]
[151]
[454]
[132]
[131]
[119]
[156]
[112]
[111]
[117]
[219]
[118]
[116]
[128]
[140]
[139]
[115]
[134] [607]
[113]
[129]
[108] [109]
[24]
[16]
[7]
[103]
[15]
[90]
[707]
[716]
[705]
[706]
[30]
[715]
[26]
[35]
[22]
[25]
[19]
[42]
[40] [36]
[17]
[43]
[94]
[32]
[93]
[21] [44]
[1]
[31]
[609]
[608]
[9]
[3]
[11]
[606] [604]
[105]
[2]
[106]
[250] [100]
[107]
18014398861480587
[1] Rotor
[2] Retaining ring
[3] Key
[7] Flange
[9] Screw plug
[11] Rolling bearing
[15] Machine screw
[16] Stator
[17] Hex nut
[19] Machine screw
[21] Oil seal flange
[22] Hex head screw
[24] Lifting eyebolt
[25] Machine screw
[26] Sealing washer
[30] Oil seal
[31] Key
[156] Label
[219] Hex nut
[250] Oil seal
[452] Terminal strip
[454] Top hat rail
[604] Lubrication ring
[606] Greasing nipple
[607] Greasing nipple
[608] Oil seal flange
[609] Hex head screw
[633] End bracket
[634] End plate
[705] Canopy
[706] Spacer bolt
[707] Hex head screw
[715] Hex nut
[716] Washer
17
Motor Structure
Nameplate, unit designation
3
3.5
3.5.1
02
9007201693954571
The marks on the upper edge of the nameplate are only present when the motor has been certified accordingly or when it includes the relevant components.
3.5.2
18
Motor Structure
Additional features
3.6
Additional features
3.6.1
Mechanical attachments
3.6.2
3.6.3
Designation
Option
BE..
HR
HF
/RS
Backstop
/MSW
MOVI-SWITCH
/MI
/MM03 MM40
MOVIMOT
/MO
MOVIMOT option(s)
Designation
Option
/TF
/TH
/KY
/PT
Designation
Option
Encoder
/AS7W /AG7W
/XV.A
/XV..
19
Motor Structure
Additional features
3
3.6.4
Connection alternatives
Designation
Option
/IS
/ASB.
HAN 10ES plug connector on terminal box with two-clamp closure (cage clamps on motor end)
/ACB.
HAN 10E plug connector on terminal box with two-clamp closure (crimp contacts on motor end)
/AMB. /ABB.
HAN Modular 10B plug connector on terminal box with twoclamp closure (crimp contacts on motor end)
/ADB. /AKB.
3.6.5
3.6.6
20
/ASE.
/ACE.
/AME. /ABE.
/ADE. /AKE.
HAN Modular 10B plug connector on terminal box with singleclamp closure (crimp contacts on motor end)
/KCC
/KC1
Designation
Option
/V
/Z
/AL
Metal fan
/U
/OL
/C
/LF
Air filter
/LN
Designation
Option
/NS
/ERF
/NIB
Ventilation
Bearing
Motor Structure
Additional features
3.6.7
3.6.8
3.6.9
Condition monitoring
Designation
Option
/DUB
/DUV
Explosion-proof motors
Designation
Option
/2GD
/3GD
/3D
/VE
Designation
Option
/DH
/RI
/RI2
/2W
21
Mechanical Installation
Before you start
4
4
Mechanical Installation
INFORMATION
Observe the safety notes in chapter 2 of these operating instructions for the mechanical installation.
If the nameplate of the drive bears the FS mark, also comply with the information on mechanical installation in the associated addendums to the operating instructions and/or
the associated manual.
4.1
The specifications on the nameplate of the drive correspond to the supply system or
the output voltage of the frequency inverter
You are certain that the following requirements have been met:
Ambient temperature between -20 C and +40 C.
Note that the temperature range of the gear unit may also be restricted (see gear
unit operating instructions)
Note that information on the nameplate may differ. The ambient conditions must
comply with all the specifications on the nameplate.
No oil, acid, gas, vapors, radiation, etc.
Installation altitude max. 1000 m above sea level
Observe chapter "Electrical Installation" > "Ambient conditions during operation"
> "Installation altitude".
Note the restrictions for encoders
Special design: Drive configured in accordance with the ambient conditions
The above mentioned information refers to standard orders. The conditions might be different when you order drives other than the standard. Observe any differing conditions
in the order confirmation.
22
Mechanical Installation
Long-term storage of motors
4.2
Note that the service life of the lubricant in the ball bearings is reduced by 10% per
year after the first year of storage.
Before startup, you should re-lubricate the lubrication devices on motors that have
been in storage for longer than 5 years. Observe the information on the motor lubricant plate.
Check whether the motor has absorbed moisture as a result of being stored for a long
time. Measure the insulation resistance for this purpose (measuring voltage 500 V).
The insulation resistance (see following figure) varies greatly depending on the
temperature. The motor must be dried if the insulation resistance is not adequate.
[M ]
100
10
0,1
20
60
40
80
[C ]
173323019
4.2.1
WARNING
The motor shaft may be subject to torque when drying via isolation transformer.
Possible injury.
DR.. motors with rotor designation "J" may be dried with warm air only.
[1]
2336250251
[1]
Transformer
23
Mechanical Installation
Long-term storage of motors
W3
T9
U3
T7
V2
T5
W2
T6
U2
T4
V4
T11
W4
T12
U4
T10
U1
T1
V1
T2
W1
T3
[2]
2343045259
[1]
[2]
W2 W3 U2 U3 V2 V3
T6 T9 T4 T7 T5 T8
U1
T1
V1
T2
W1
T3
[2]
2343047179
[1]
[2]
The drying process is finished when the minimum insulation resistance has been exceeded.
In the terminal box check that:
24
Mechanical Installation
Motor installation notes
4.3
NOTICE
Improper assembly may damage the drive and corresponding components.
Possible damage to property
Only install the gearmotor in the specified mounting position on a level, vibration-free
and torsionally rigid support structure.
Align the motor and the driven machine carefully in order to prevent the output shaft
from being exposed to unacceptable strain. Observe the permitted overhung and
axial forces.
Use an appropriate cover, e.g. motor option /C "Canopy", to prevent objects or fluids
entering motors in vertical mounting positions (M4/V1).
Check that there is sufficient clearance around the motor to provide for adequate
cooling, and that the motor does not suck in warm air from other devices.
Balance components for subsequent mounting on the shaft with a half key (motor
shafts are balanced with a half key).
Existing condensation drain holes are sealed with closing plugs. If contaminated, the condensation drain holes must be checked for proper functioning
on a regular basis and cleaned if required.
If using brakemotors with manual brake release, screw in either the hand lever (with
HR self-reengaging manual brake release) or the setscrew (with HF lockable manual
brake release).
25
Mechanical Installation
Mounting tolerances
4
4.3.1
4.4
4.5
Use suitable cable glands for the incoming cable (use reducing adapters if necessary) according to the installation instructions.
If possible, arrange the terminal box so that the cable entries are pointing downwards.
Clean the sealing surfaces of the terminal box and the terminal box cover carefully
before re-assembly; replace embrittled gaskets.
Mounting tolerances
Shaft end
Flanges
26
Mechanical Installation
HR/HF manual brake release
4.6
4.6.1
You can use the optional lockable HF manual brake release to continuously mechanically release the BE.. brake with a setscrew and a release lever.
On delivery, the setscrew is inserted far enough to not fall out and to not affect the brake
performance. The setscrew is self-locking with a nylon coat in order to prevent it from
unintended further penetration or from falling out.
Proceed as follows to activate the lockable HF manual brake release:
Screw in the setscrew until there is no more play at the release lever. Additionally,
screw in the setscrew by another 1/4 or 1/2 revolution in order to manually release
the brake.
Loosen the setscrew at least until the floating clearance (see chapter "Retrofitting
HR/HF manual brake release") of the manual brake release has completely returned.
WARNING
Lacking functionality of the manual brake release due to improper brake installation,
e.g. setscrew inserted too far.
Severe or fatal injuries.
4.6.2
WARNING
Risk of crushing if the drive starts up unintentionally.
Severe or fatal injuries.
Isolate the motor, brake, and forced cooling fan, if installed, from the power supply
before starting work, safeguarding them against unintentional re-start.
Carefully observe the steps described below.
27
Mechanical Installation
Non-SEW encoder mounting
3. Use setting nuts to set the floating clearance "s" between the conical coil springs
(pressed flat) and the setting nuts (see the following figure).
This floating clearance "s" is necessary so that the pressure plate can move
up as the brake lining wears. Otherwise, reliable braking is not guaranteed.
177241867
Brake
1.5
BE120, BE122
4.7
28
Mechanical Installation
Connecting XV.A encoder mounting adapter to DR.71 225 motors
4.8
[D]
[C]
[B]
[A]
[220]
[F]
[E]
[D]
[C]
[B]
[269]
[22]
[361] / [170]
[A]
[251] [232]
3633163787
[22]
[170]
[212]
[220]
[225]
[232]
[251]
Screw
forced cooling fan guard
Fan guard with encoder mount
Encoder
Intermediate flange (not with XV1A)
Screws (only with XV1A and XV2A)
Conical spring washers (only with XV1A
and XV2A)
[361]
[269]
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
29
Mechanical Installation
Connecting XV.A encoder mounting adapter to DR.71 225 motors
5. For XV2A and XV4A: Mount the intermediate flange [225] with the screw [F] with a
tightening torque of 3 Nm [26.6 lb-in].
6. Push the encoder and the adapter on the coupling [D] and tighten the retaining screw
[E] with a tightening torque of 3 Nm [26.6 lb-in].
7. With XV1A and XV2A: Arrange conical spring washers [251] with retaining screws
[232] and place in annular groove of the encoder [220] and tighten with a tightening
torque of 3 Nm (26.6 lb-in).
8. For XV3A and XV4A: Installation by the customer via the bores in the encoder plate.
INFORMATION
The XH1A, XH7A and XH8A encoder mounting adapters for hollow shaft encoders are
premounted on delivery.
Proceed according to chapter "Motor and brake maintenance preliminary work"
(page 79) to mount the encoder.
30
Mechanical Installation
Turning the terminal box
4.9
4.9.1
The following figure shows the structure of the terminal box in the design with tension
spring terminal strip:
[123]
[131]
[a]
[b]
[c]
[119]
[111]
3728956811
[111]
[119]
[123]
[131]
Sealing
Terminal box retaining screws (4 x)
Terminal box cover retaining screws (4 x)
Sealing
[a] Terminal
[b] Auxiliary terminal retaining screws (4 x)
[c] Retaining plate
31
Mechanical Installation
Accessory equipment
4.10
Accessory equipment
Technical data
32
Air filter
Approvals
All approvals
Ambient temperature
-40 C to +100 C
DR.71 DR.132
Filter material
Mechanical Installation
Accessory equipment
[79]
L1
DA
DA
EA
[4]
[83]
[1553]
L2
L3
[34]
LB / LBS 1)
LB/LBS
L4
3519591947
[4]
[34]
[79]
Keyway
Tapping screw
Cap
Motor size
DR.71
DR.71 /BE
DR.80
DR.80 /BE
DR.90
DR.90 /BE
DR.100
DR.100 /BE
DR.112/132
DR.112/132 /BE
DR.160
DR.160 /BE
DR.180
DR.180 /BE
DR.200/225
DR.200/225 /BE
[83]
[361]
[1553]
DA
11
14
14
14
EA
23
30
30
30
L1
2
2
2
2
L2
L3
2
2
2
2
91.5
88
95.5
94.5
88.5
81
87.5
81
125
120.5
19
40
3.5
28
60
122
3.5
124
38
80
122
3.5
122
48
110
122
122
3.5
L4
193
187
233
236
230
246
33
Mechanical Installation
Accessory equipment
with bore or
The following figure shows a motor with bores and inserted measuring nipples [1]:
[1]
[1]
2706206475
[1]
34
Insert the measuring nipple in the bores of the motor and screw in the measuring nipple with a tightening torque of 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
Plug the mounting adapter of the measuring unit into the measuring nipple.
Electrical Installation
Additional regulations
Electrical Installation
If the motor includes safety-relevant components, observe the following safety note:
WARNING
Disabling functional safety devices.
Severe or fatal injuries.
Only qualified personnel is allowed to carry out work on functional safety components.
Any work on functional safety components must be carried out by strictly observing
the specifications in the operating instructions at hand and the respective addendum to the operating instructions. Else, the right to claim under warranty will become invalid.
WARNING
Danger of electric shock.
Severe or fatal injuries!
5.1
When motors are powered by inverters, you must adhere to the wiring instructions
issued by the inverter manufacturer.
Additional regulations
The generally applicable installation regulations for low-voltage electric equipment (such
as DIN IEC 60364, DIN EN 50110) must be complied with when setting up electrical machinery.
5.2
5.3
Wiring notes
Comply with the safety notes during installation.
35
Electrical Installation
Special aspects for operation with a frequency inverter
5
5.3.1
5.3.2
Output cables from frequency inverters and servo controllers, soft start units and
brake units
5.4
You may route separately shielded supply cables together with switched-mode
power lines in one cable.
You must not route unshielded supply cables together with switched-mode power
lines in one cable.
5.4.1
36
Electrical Installation
Special aspects for operation with a frequency inverter
5.4.2
[1]
1.8
1.6
[2]
1.4
1.2
1.0
[3]
0.8
0.6
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.2
1.4
244030091
[1]
[2]
[3]
On request, SEW-EURODRIVE provides the permitted pulse voltage with reinforced winding insulation with
increased resistance against partial discharge (../RI2).
INFORMATION
The diagram applies to motor operation of the motor. If the permitted pulse voltage is
exceeded, you must install limiting measures, such as filters, chokes or special motor
cables. Consult the manufacturer of the frequency inverter.
37
Electrical Installation
Improving the grounding (EMC)
5
5.5
completely premounted or as
INFORMATION
For further information regarding the grounding, refer to the SEW publication "Drive
Engineering Practical Implementation, EMC in Drive Engineering".
5.5.1
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[1]
[2]
[3]
Ground strap
You can order the complete connection element from SEW-EURODRIVE with part number 13633953.
38
Electrical Installation
Improving the grounding (EMC)
5.5.2
Size DR.90M / L
The following figure shows how to install the grounding:
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[1]
[2]
[3]
Ground strap
You can order the complete connection element from SEW-EURODRIVE with part number 13633953.
5.5.3
Size DR.100M
The following figure shows how to install the grounding:
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[1]
[2]
[3]
Ground strap
You can order the complete connection element from SEW-EURODRIVE with part number 13633953.
39
Electrical Installation
Improving the grounding (EMC)
5
5.5.4
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
You can order the complete connection element from SEW-EURODRIVE with part number 13633945.
5.5.5
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
You can order the complete connection element from SEW-EURODRIVE with part number 13633945.
For sizes DR.315 and sizes DR.160 225 with gray cast iron terminal boxes, the
grounding is pre-installed on delivery.
40
Electrical Installation
Specifics regarding switching operation
For aluminum terminal boxes size DR.160 225, you can order the "connection element" kit with part number 13633945.
5.6
5.7
U1
(T1)
V1
(T2)
W1
(T3)
797685003
41
Electrical Installation
Ambient conditions during operation
5
5.8
5.8.1
Ambient temperature
Unless otherwise specified on the nameplate, you must observe the temperature range
of -20 C to +40 C. Motors intended for use in higher or lower ambient temperatures
have specific designations on the nameplate.
5.8.2
Installation altitude
The rated data on the nameplate apply to an installation altitude up to 1000 m asl. Installation altitudes above 1000 m asl require a different project planning for the motors
and gear units.
5.8.3
Hazardous radiation
Motors must not be subjected to hazardous radiation (such as ionizing radiation). Contact SEW-EURODRIVE if necessary.
5.8.4
42
Electrical Installation
Notes regarding the connection of the motor
5.9
INFORMATION
The terminal box must be free of foreign objects, dirt and humidity. Unused cable entry
openings and the terminal box itself must be closed so they are dust and water-proof.
Check that the connection cables are not cramped in order not to damage the insulation.
In the terminal box: Check winding connections and tighten them if necessary
43
Electrical Installation
Connecting the motor via terminal block
5
5.10
[1]
[2]
W1
[4]
(T3
(T2
(T1
U1
V1
[3]
[5]
Arrangement of terminal links for connection
Motor size DR.71-DR.225:
(T6
(T4
(T5
W2
U2
(T5
[3]
V2
[3]
[4]
(T3
W1
)
)
(T1
(T2
(T3
[2]
V1
U1
[4]
W1
)
(T2
(T1
U1
[2]
V1
V2
W2
[1]
U2
(T6
[1]
[5]
[6]
44
Electrical Installation
Connecting the motor via terminal block
T9
V1
T5/
T8
W1
[3]
[4]
T3
T1
U1
T4/
T7
T2
[2]
V2
/V3
T6/
W2
/W
3
U2
/U3
[5]
[1]
[2]
V2
T6
U2
W2
V3
T5
T2
W3
T7
[3]
W1
T1
V1
U1
U3
T4
T8
T3
T9
[4]
[5]
INFORMATION
Three winding lead ends must be rewired to change from high to low voltage:
The lines designated U3 (T7), V3 (T8) and W3 (T9) must be reconnected.
45
Electrical Installation
Connecting the motor via terminal block
8W
V2
/T5
3/T9
U3/T
V4
/T1
1
U2
/T4
[1]
[2]
/T1
[3]
U4
V1/T
[6]
V1/T
2W
1/T3
[4]
[5]
V3/T
8W
/T5
3/T9
U3/T
V2
V4
/T1
1
U2
/T4
T1
[1]
[2]
/T1
[3]
U4
V1/T
[6]
V1/T
2W
1/T3
[4]
[5]
46
Electrical Installation
Connecting the motor via terminal block
Tightening
torque for the
hex nut
M4
M5
Customer
connection
Design
Connection
type
Scope of delivery
Cross sec.
1.6 Nm
(14.2 lb-in)
2.0 Nm
(17.7 lb-in)
M6
3.0 Nm
(26.5 lb-in)
Terminal
stud
Tightening
torque for the
hex nut
PE
Terminal
stud
PE design
1.5 mm
(AWG 16)
1a
Solid wire
Conductor end
sleeve
Pre-assembled
terminal links
6 mm2
(AWG 10)
1b
Pre-assembled
terminal links
6 mm2
(AWG 10)
Small connection
accessories
enclosed in bag
2.5 mm2
(AWG 14)
1a
Solid wire
Conductor end
sleeve
16 mm2
(AWG 6)
1b
16 mm2
(AWG 6)
Small connection
accessories
enclosed in bag
35 mm2
(AWG 2)
Small connection
accessories
enclosed in bag
M5
PE
Terminal
stud
PE design
M5
M6
Customer
connection
Design
Connection
type
Scope of delivery
Cross sec.
2.0 Nm
(17.7 lb-in)
3.0 Nm
(26.5 lb-in)
2.5 mm2
(AWG 14)
1a
Solid wire
Conductor end
sleeve
Pre-assembled
terminal links
16 mm2
(AWG 6)
1b
Pre-assembled
terminal links
16 mm2
(AWG 6)
Small connection
accessories
enclosed in bag
35 mm2
(AWG 2)
Small connection
accessories
enclosed in bag
M5
PE
Terminal
stud
PE design
Tightening
torque for the
hex nut
M6
M8
Customer
connection
Design
Connection
type
Scope of delivery
Cross sec.
2
3.0 Nm
(26.5 lb-in)
35 mm
(AWG 2)
6.0 Nm
(53.1 lb-in)
70 mm2
(AWG 2/0)
Small connection
accessories
enclosed in bag
M8
Small connection
accessories
enclosed in bag
M10
47
Electrical Installation
Connecting the motor via terminal block
Tightening
torque for the
hex nut
M8
M10
M12
Customer
connection
Design
Connection
type
Scope of delivery
Cross section
PE
Terminal
stud
PE design
6.0 Nm
(53.1 lb-in)
70 mm2
(AWG 2/0)
10 Nm
(88.5 lb-in)
95 mm2
(AWG 3/0)
15.5 Nm
(137.2 lb-in)
95 mm2
(AWG 3/0)
Small connection
accessories
enclosed in bag
M8
Small connection
accessories
enclosed in bag
M10
Small connection
accessories
enclosed in bag
M10
PE
Terminal
stud
PE design
Tightening
torque for the
hex nut
Customer
connection
Design
Connection
type
Scope of delivery
Cross section
M12
15.5 Nm
(137.2 lb-in)
95 mm2
(AWG 3/0)
M16
30 Nm
(265.5 lb-in)
120 mm2
(AWG 4/0)
Connection parts
pre-assembled
M12
The designs in bold print apply to S1 operation for the standard voltages and standard
frequencies according to the data in the catalog. Other versions may have different connections, for example different terminal stud diameters and/or a different scope of delivery.
48
Electrical Installation
Connecting the motor via terminal block
Design 1a:
[2]
[1]
[1]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
88866955
[1] External connection
[2] Terminal stud
[3] Flange nut
[4] Terminal link
[5] Terminal washer
[6] Winding connection with Stocko connection terminal
49
Electrical Installation
Connecting the motor via terminal block
5
Design 1b:
[2]
[1]
[1]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
88864779
[1] External connection with ring cable lug, to DIN 46237 or DIN 46234, for example.
[2] Terminal stud
[3] Flange nut
[4] Terminal link
[5] Terminal washer
[6] Winding connection with Stocko connection terminal
Design 2
[1]
[2]
[5]
[6]
[3]
[7]
[4]
[8]
185439371
[1] Terminal stud
[2] Lock washer
[3] Terminal washer
[4] Winding connection
[5] Upper nut
[6] Washer
[7] External connection with ring cable lug, to DIN 46237 or DIN 46234, for example.
[8] Lower nut
50
Electrical Installation
Connecting the motor via terminal block
Design 3
[2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[8]
[7]
199641099
[1] External connection with ring cable lug, to DIN 4637 or DIN 46234, for example.
[2] Terminal stud
[3] Upper nut
[4] Washer
[5] Terminal link
[6] Lower nut
[7] Winding connection with ring cable lug
[8] Serrated lock washer
Design 4
[5]
[4]
[2]
[5]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[1]
1139606667
[1] Terminal box
[2] Terminal clip
[3] PE conductor
[4] Lock washer
[5] Hex head screw
51
Electrical Installation
Connecting the motor via terminal block
5
Design 5
[1]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
[2]
[5]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[6]
1139608587
52
Electrical Installation
Connecting the motor via plug connector
5.11
1009070219
The IS plug connector is supplied from the factory with its base fully wired-up, including
additional features such as a brake rectifier. The upper section of the IS connector is included in the scope of delivery and must be connected as shown in the wiring diagram.
WARNING
No grounding due to incorrect installation.
Severe or fatal injuries.
The IS plug connector has CSA approval up to 600 V. Note for application according to
CSA regulations: Tighten the M3 terminal screws to a torque of 0.5 Nm (4.4 lb-in). See
the following table for American Wire Gauge (AWG) cable cross sections.
Cable cross section
Make sure that the type of cable complies with the applicable regulations. The rated currents are specified on the nameplate. The cable cross sections that can be used are
listed in the following table.
Without variable terminal link
Link cable
Double assignment
(motor and brake/SR)
AWG 24 - 12
AWG 24 - 14
max. AWG 16
53
Electrical Installation
Connecting the motor via plug connector
Loosen the screws from the upper section of the plug connection.
Remove upper connector section from the cover
Wiring up as
shown in wiring
diagram R83
Wiring up as
shown in wiring
diagram R81
For / startup:
For or operation:
According to the desired motor operation ( or ) Install the variable terminal link
as shown in the following figures.
798606859
54
798608523
Electrical Installation
Connecting the motor via plug connector
For operation:
On the side of the variable terminal link, remove only the bare metal pin of the marked
prong horizontally as shown in the following figure touch guard!
798779147
For operation:
On the side of the variable terminal link, completely remove 2 prongs horizontally as
shown in the following figure.
798777483
Wiring up as
shown in wiring
diagram R81 for
or operation with
double terminal
assignment
798780811
55
Electrical Installation
Connecting the motor via plug connector
The housing cover of the IS plug connector can be screwed onto the lower section of
the plug connector depending on the required position of the cable lead. The upper section of the plug connector shown in the following figure must first be installed in the housing cover so it will match the position of the lower section of the plug connector:
Install the upper section of the plug connector into the housing cover in accordance
with the mounting position
798978827
Mounting position of the upper section of the plug connector in the housing cover
798785163
56
Electrical Installation
Connecting the motor via plug connector
798984587
The installed AB.., AD.., AM.., AK.., AC.. and AS connector systems are based on the
connector systems made by Harting.
The plug connectors are located at the side of the terminal box. They are locked either
using two clamps or one clamp on the terminal box.
UL approval has been granted for the plug connectors.
The mating connector (sleeve housing) with socket contacts is not included in the
scope of delivery.
The enclosure is only applied when the mating connector is mounted and locked.
57
Electrical Installation
Connecting the motor via terminal strip
5
5.12
In the terminal box: Check winding connections and tighten them if necessary
58
Electrical Installation
Connecting the motor via terminal strip
59
Electrical Installation
Connecting the brake
5
5.13
WARNING
Risk of crushing if the hoist falls.
Severe or fatal injuries.
Comply with the applicable regulations issued by the relevant employer's liability
insurance association regarding phase failure protection and the associated circuit/
circuit modification!
Connect the brake according to the provided wiring diagram.
In view of the DC voltage to be switched and the high level of current load, it is essential to use either special brake contactors or AC contactors with contacts in utilization category AC-3 according to EN 60947-4-1.
60
Check the cable cross sections braking currents (see section "Technical
Data")
Connect the brake control system according to the wiring diagram supplied with the
brake
For motors in thermal class 180 (H), the brake rectifier and brake control systems are
usually installed in the control cabinet. If you have ordered a brakemotor with insulating plate, it will be delivered with the terminal box isolated thermally from the
brakemotor. In this case, the brake rectifier and brake control can be installed in the
terminal box. The insulating plate increases the height of the terminal box by 9 mm.
Electrical Installation
Connecting the brake
Wear monitoring
[1]
BK
[3]
[1]
BK
BK
[2]
BN1
BU1
[4]
BK
[2]
[2]
BN1
BN1
BU1
BU1
BN2
[2]
BU2
[1] Brake
[2] MP321-1MS microswitch
1145889675
[1] Brake
[2] MP321-1MS microswitch
1145887755
[1] Brake
[2] MP321-1MS microswitch
[3] Function monitoring
[4] Wear monitoring
1145885835
61
Electrical Installation
Accessory equipment
5
5.14
Accessory equipment
Connect accessory equipment as shown in the wiring connection diagram(s) provided
with the motor. Do not connect or start up the accessory equipment if the wiring
diagram is missing. You can obtain the valid wiring diagrams from SEW-EURODRIVE
free of charge.
NOTICE
Damage of the temperature sensor due to excessive heat.
The drive system might be damaged.
When using the temperature sensor for thermal monitoring, the evaluation function must
be activated to maintain reliable isolation of the temperature sensor circuit. If the temperature reaches an excessive level, a thermal protection function must be triggered immediately.
If there is a second terminal box for the TF temperature sensor, you must connect the
temperature sensor in that terminal box.
5.14.2 TH winding thermostats
The thermostats are connected in series and open when the permitted winding temperature is exceeded. They can be connected in the drive monitoring loop.
AC V
DC V
Voltage U [V]
250
60
24
2.5
1.0
1.6
1.6
Contact resistance max. 1 ohm at DC 5 V / 1 mA
62
Electrical Installation
Accessory equipment
NOTICE
Excessive self-heating of the temperature sensor can damage the insulation of the
temperature sensor.
The drive system might be damaged.
The characteristic curve in the following figure shows the resistance curve subject to the
motor temperature with a measuring current of 2 mA and correct pole connection.
3000
2500
2000
R [] 1500
1000
500
0
-100
-50
50
100
150
200
-250
300
350
T [C]
Technical Data
Connection
Total resistance at 20 - 25 C
Test current
KTY84 - 130
Red (+)
Blue (-)
540 < R < 640
< 3 mA
63
Electrical Installation
Accessory equipment
NOTICE
Excessive self-heating of the temperature sensor can damage the insulation of the
temperature sensor.
The drive system might be damaged.
The characteristic curve in the following figure shows the resistance curve subject to the
motor temperature.
300
250
200
R []
150
100
50
0
-100
-50
50
100
150
200
250
T [C]
Technical Data
Connection
Resistance at 20 - 25 C per PT100
Test current
64
PT100
Red/white
107 < R < 110
< 3 mA
Electrical Installation
Accessory equipment
Motor size
Operating mode/connection
Frequency in Hz
DR.71 DR.132
1 ~ AC 1) ( )
50
100 - 127
DR.71 DR.132
3 ~ AC
50
175 - 220
3 ~ AC
DR.71 DR.132
1 ~ AC
DR.71 DR.180
1)
( )
Voltage V
50
100 - 127
50
230 - 277
DR.71 DR.315
3 ~ AC
50
346 - 500
DR.71 DR.315
3 ~ AC
50
200 - 290
Operating mode/connection
Frequency in Hz
Voltage V
1 ~ AC 1) ( )
60
100 - 135
DR.71 DR.132
3 ~ AC
60
175 - 230
DR.71 DR.132
3 ~ AC
60
100 - 135
1)
Steinmetz circuit
Motor size
DR.71 DR.132
1 ~ AC
DR.71 DR.180
1)
( )
60
230 - 277
DR.71 DR.315
3 ~ AC
60
380 - 575
DR.71 DR.315
3 ~ AC
60
220 - 330
1)
Steinmetz circuit
Motor size
Operating mode/connection
Voltage V
DC 24 V
24
DR.71 DR.132
INFORMATION
For information on how to connect the V forced cooling fan, refer to the wiring diagram
(page 161).
65
Electrical Installation
Accessory equipment
76
101
38
111
576533259
Input:
Output:
DC 24 V; 2.5 A (40 C)
66
Connection:
Degree of protection:
Part number:
0188 1817
Electrical Installation
Accessory equipment
Encoder
type
Motor size
Mounting type
Power supply
Wiring diagram
Signal
ES7S
DR.71-132
Incremental
encoder
Shaft-centered
DC 7 30 V
1Vss sin/cos
68 180 xx 08
ES7R
DR.71-132
Incremental
encoder
Shaft-centered
DC 7 30 V
TTL (RS422)
68 179 xx 08
ES7C
DR.71-132
Incremental
encoder
Shaft-centered
DC 4.5 30 V
68 179 xx 08
AS7W
DR.71-132
Absolute
encoder
Shaft-centered
DC 7 30 V
1Vss sin/cos
68 181 xx 08
AS7Y
DR.71-132
Absolute
encoder
Shaft-centered
DC 7 30 V
68 182 xx 07
EG7S
DR.160-225
Incremental
encoder
Shaft-centered
DC 7 30 V
1Vss sin/cos
68 180 xx 08
EG7R
DR.160-225
Incremental
encoder
Shaft-centered
DC 7 30 V
TTL (RS422)
68 179 xx 08
EG7C
DR.160-225
Incremental
encoder
Shaft-centered
DC 4.5 30 V
68 179 xx 08
AG7W
DR.160-225
Absolute
encoder
Shaft-centered
DC 7 30 V
1Vss sin/cos
68 181 xx 08
AG7Y
DR.160-225
Absolute
encoder
Shaft-centered
DC 7 30 V
68 182 xx 07
EH7S
DR.315
Incremental
encoder
Shaft-centered
DC 10 30 V
1Vss sin/cos
08 259 xx 07
AH7Y
DR.315
Absolute
encoder
Shaft-centered
DC 9 30 V
08 259 xx 07
AV6H +
XV.A
AV1H +
XV.A
DR.71-225
Absolute
encoder
Absolute
encoder
Flange centered
DC 7 12 V
Flange centered
DC 7 12 V
DR.71-225
AV1Y +
XV.A
DR.71-225
Absolute
encoder
Flange centered
DC 10 30 V
EV1C +
XV.A
DR.71-225
Incremental
encoder
Flange centered
DC 10 30 V
HTL / TTL
EV1S +
XV.A
DR.71-225
Incremental
encoder
Flange centered
DC 10 30 V
1Vss sin/cos
EV1R +
XV.A
DR.71-225
Incremental
encoder
Flange centered
DC 10 30 V
TTL
EV1T +
XV.A
DR.71-225
Incremental
encoder
Flange centered
DC 5 V
TTL
INFORMATION
With encoder series ES.., AS.., EG.., AG.., EH.. and AH.. the encoder covers are enclosed with the motor
67
Electrical Installation
Accessory equipment
INFORMATION
For information on how to connect the built-in encoder, refer to the wiring diagram.
Observe chapter "Wiring diagrams" (page 154) for connection via terminal strip.
Observe the enclosed wiring diagram for connection via M12 connectors.
Encoder
Motor size
Power supply
EI71
EI72
EI76
Signals
HTL 1 period/revolution
DR.71-132
DC 9 30 V
EI7C
HTL 2 periods/revolution
HTL 6 periods/revolution
HTL 24 periods/revolution
The LED display (visible with the fan guard removed) provides an optical feedback according to the following table:
LED color
A track
B track
Track A
Track B
Red
Green
Off
Use shielded cable with twisted pair conductors and apply shield over large area on
both ends:
To the connection cover of the encoder, in the cable gland, or in the encoder plug
To the inverter on the electronics shield clamp or to the housing of the D-sub connector
68
Install the encoder cables separately from the power cables, maintaining a distance
of at least 200 mm.
Compare the operating voltage with the permitted operating voltage range on the encoder nameplate. Deviations in the operating voltage may overheat and damage the
encoder.
Electrical Installation
Accessory equipment
Observe the clamping area of 5 to 10 mm of the cable gland of the connection cover.
If you use cables with a different cross section, you have to replace the provided
cable gland with a suitable other cable gland.
The cable glands for the cable entry must meet the following conditions:
Check the flawless state and the proper seat of the connection cover gasket.
Tighten the screws of the connection cover with a tightening torque of 2 Nm [17.7 lbin].
69
Startup
Startup
INFORMATION
If the motor includes safety-relevant components, observe the following safety note:
WARNING
Disabling functional safety devices.
Severe or fatal injuries.
Only qualified personnel is allowed to carry out work on functional safety components.
Any work on functional safety components must be carried out by strictly observing
the specifications in the operating instructions at hand and the respective addendum to the operating instructions. Else, the right to claim under warranty will become invalid.
WARNING
Danger of electric shock.
Severe or fatal injuries!
When motors are powered by inverters, you must adhere to the wiring instructions
issued by the inverter manufacturer.
CAUTION
The surface temperatures on the drive can be very high during operation.
Danger of burns.
Let the motor cool down before you start your work.
NOTICE
Limit the maximum speed at the inverter. For information on the procedure, refer to the
documentation of the inverter.
NOTICE
The maximum limit torque (Mpk) and the maximum current (Imax) may not be exceeded, not even for acceleration.
Possible damage to property.
70
Startup
Before startup
6.1
Before startup
Before startup, make sure that:
The measures stipulated in chapter "Extended storage of motors" (page 23) are performed after extended storage periods
6.2
All motor protection equipment is active and set for the rated motor current
During startup
During startup, make sure that:
The braking torque corresponds to the respective application. Observe the "Technical Data" (page 125) chapter and the nameplate.
INFORMATION
On brakemotors with self-reengaging manual brake release, the lever must be removed after startup. A bracket is provided for storing the lever on the outside of the
motor housing.
71
Startup
Motors with reinforced bearings
0
6.2.1
WARNING
Voltage at the motor exceeds the permitted level.
Serious injury.
Despite proper functioning of the drive the startup of DR.. motors with rotor designation
"J" may cause noise and vibration.
6.3
72
Startup
Changing the blocking direction off motors with backstop
6.4
6.4.1
[392]
[42]
[48]
[74]
[62]
[190]
[75]
[77]
[37]
[36]
[44] [41]
1142858251
[35] Fan guard
[36] Fan
[37] Sealing ring
[41] Cup spring
[42] Backstop endshield
6.4.2
[77] Screw
[78] Label
[190] Felt ring
[392] Sealing
[48]
[74]
[62]
[190]
[702]
[703]
[37]
[36]
1142856331
[702] Backstop housing, complete
[703] Machine screw
73
Startup
Changing the blocking direction off motors with backstop
0
6.4.3
WARNING
Risk of crushing if the drive starts up unintentionally.
Severe or fatal injuries.
Before starting work, isolate the motor and, if installed, the forced cooling fan from
the power supply.
Safeguard against accidental startup.
Carefully observe the steps described below.
The backstop is supplied with the corrosion protection low-viscosity grease Mobil LBZ.
If you want to use a different grease, make sure it complies with NLGI class 00/000, with
a base oil viscosity of 42 mm2/s at 40 C on a lithium saponified and mineral oil base.
The application temperature range is from -50 C to +90 C. See the following table for
the amount of grease required.
Motor type
71
80
90/100
112/132
160
180
200/
225
250/
280
315
11
15
20
30
45
80
80
120
74
Inspection/Maintenance
Inspection/Maintenance
WARNING
Risk of crushing if the hoist falls or in the event of uncontrolled unit behavior.
Severe or fatal injuries.
If the motor includes safety-relevant components, observe the following safety note:
WARNING
Disabling functional safety devices.
Severe or fatal injuries.
Only qualified personnel is allowed to carry out work on functional safety components.
Any work on functional safety components must be carried out by strictly observing
the specifications in the operating instructions at hand and the respective addendum to the operating instructions. Else, the right to claim under warranty will become invalid.
CAUTION
The surface temperatures on the drive can be very high during operation.
Danger of burns.
Let the motor cool down before you start your work.
NOTICE
For assembly, the ambient temperature and the oil seals themselves may not be
colder than 0 C, else the oil seals might be damaged.
INFORMATION
Apply grease with a grease depot (Klber Patemo GHY133N) to the lip of the oil seal
before assembly.
Only SEW service staff, repair workshops or plants that provide the necessary expertise
may repair or modify the motor.
Before re-startup of the motor, make sure that all regulations are complied with and document this with a label on the motor or a written test report.
Always perform safety and functional tests following all maintenance and repair work
(thermal protection).
75
Inspection/Maintenance
Inspection and maintenance intervals
7
7.1
Time interval
Required steps
BE brake
Motor
Motor inspection:
Check rolling bearing and change if
necessary
Replacing the oil seal
Clean the cooling air passages
Drive
Varies 3)
1) The amount of wear depends on many factors and may be high. The machine designer must calculate the
required inspection/maintenance intervals individually in accordance with the project planning documents
(e.g. "Project Planning for Drives").
2) For the DR.315 with relubrication device, please note the shortened relubrication periods in the "Bearing
lubrication DR.315" section.
3) The interval depends on outer influences and can be very short, e.g. in the event of high dust concentration in the environment.
If you open the motor during inspection/maintenance, you have to clean it before you
close it.
7.1.1
Connection cables
Check the connection cable for damage at regular intervals and replace if necessary.
76
Inspection/Maintenance
Bearing lubrication
7.2
Bearing lubrication
7.2.1
375353099
[1] Lubrication device in type A in accordance with DIN 71412
77
Inspection/Maintenance
Reinforced bearing
7
Relubrication
You can purchase the lubricants in 400 g cartridges from SEW-EURODRIVE. For order
information, refer to the section "Lubricant tables for rolling bearings of SEW motors" .
INFORMATION
Only mix lubricants of the same thickness type, the same base oil and the same consistency (NLGI class)!
Grease the motor bearings in accordance with the information on the lubricant plate. The
used grease collects inside the motor and should be removed every 6 to 8 relubrication
cycles during an inspection. Each time you relubricate, ensure that the bearing is twothirds full.
After relubricating the motors, you should startup slowly, if possible, so that the grease
is distributed evenly.
Re-lubrication
period
The table below lists the relubrication intervals for the following conditions:
4-pole speed
normal load
At greater speeds, higher loads or higher ambient temperatures, the re-lubrication intervals are shorter. Use 1.5 times the quantity for the initial filling.
Horizontal mounting position
Motor type
7.3
Duration
Quantity
Duration
Quantity
EDR.315 /NS
5000 h
50 g
3000 h
70 g
3000 h
50 g
2000 h
70 g
Reinforced bearing
In the /ERF (reinforced bearing) option, cylindrical rolling bearings are installed on the A
side.
NOTICE
Bearings might be damaged due to missing overhung load.
The drive system might be damaged.
The reinforced bearing is only offered with the /NS (relubrication) option so as to facilitate optimal lubrication of the bearing. For bearing lubrication, refer to the notes in chapter "Inspection/Maintenance" > "Bearing lubrication DR315".
7.4
Corrosion protection
If a drive is equipped with the /KS corrosion protection option and IP56 or IP66, you have
to replace the Hylomar at the studs.
78
Inspection/Maintenance
Motor and brake maintenance preliminary work
7.5
7.5.1
Before starting work, isolate the motor, brake, and if installed, the forced cooling
fan from the power supply.
Safeguard against accidental startup.
[362]
[B]
[220]
[A]
[35]
[34]
[361]
3475618443
[34]
[35]
[220]
[361]
Disassembling
ES7.- and AS7.
encoders
Tapping screw
Fan guard
Encoder
Extended fan guard
[733] Screws
[A]
Screws
[B]
Cone
79
Inspection/Maintenance
Motor and brake maintenance preliminary work
7
Re-assembly
80
Inspection/Maintenance
Motor and brake maintenance preliminary work
7.5.2
[35]
[1]
[706] [657]
[707]
[361]
[367]
[34]
[1]
[34]
[35]
[220]
Disassembling
EG7.- and AG7.
encoders
Rotor
Tapping screw
Fan guard
Encoder
[232] Screws
[361] Cover
[367] Retaining screw
2341914635
[707] Screws
[715] Screws
[A] Screws
1. Loosen screws [707] or [34] and remove canopy [657] or cover[361], respectively.
Use SW13 spacer bolts [706] to counterhold.
2. Unscrew and remove the connection cover [619].
3. Remove the screws [232].
4. Remove the fan guard [35].
5. Force off the encoder [220] by loosening the central retaining screw [367]
If the encoder is hard to loosen, you can loosen or counterhold the encoder shaft at
the installed SW17 spanner flat.
Re-assembly
81
Inspection/Maintenance
Motor and brake maintenance preliminary work
7
7.5.3
[734]
[35]
[659]
[1]
[657]
EH7.
AH7.
[748] [367]
[35] Fan guard
[220] Encoder
[367] Retaining screw
EH7. Removing
the encoder:
[220]
9007199662370443
[734] Nut
[748] Screw
AH7. Removing
the encoder:
Re-assembly
Tightening torque
EH7.
AH7.
82
Inspection/Maintenance
Motor and brake maintenance preliminary work
7.5.4
[212]
[232] [A]
[225]
[220]
[269]
[22]
[361] / [170]
[B]
3568918283
[22]
[170]
[212]
[220]
[225]
[232]
[251]
Screw
forced cooling fan guard
Fan guard with encoder mount
Encoder
Intermediate flange (not with XV1A)
Screws (enclosed with XV1A and XV2A)
Conical spring washers (enclosed with
XV1A and XV2A)
[361]
[269]
[A]
[B]
[D]
[E]
Cover (normal/long)
Grommet
Adapter
Clamping screw
Coupling (spread- or solid shaft coupling)
Clamping screw
1. Remove the protection cover [361] by loosening the screws [22] or remove forcedcooling fan guard [170].
2. Loosen the retaining screws [232] and turn the conical spring washers [251] outwards.
3. Loosen the clamping screw [E] of the coupling.
4. Remove the adapter [A] and the encoder [220].
Re-assembly
83
Inspection/Maintenance
Motor and brake maintenance preliminary work
7
7.5.5
[269]
[361] / [170]
[E] [F]
[35]
[1]
[33]
[34]
[35]
[170]
[220]
[269]
[361]
Removing hollow
shaft encoders
form XH1A mounting adapter
Rotor
Tapping screw
Washer
Fan guard
forced cooling fan guard
Encoder
Grommet
Extended fan guard
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[F]
[G]
[1]
[D] [220]
[361] / [170]
3633161867
Retaining screw
Encoder cover
Screw for torque arm
Nut of the torque arm
Screw
Clamping ring
Nut of the torque arm
Removing hollow
shaft encoders
from XH7A and
XH8A mounting
adapter
84
Inspection/Maintenance
Motor and brake maintenance preliminary work
Reinstalling hollow
shaft encoders to
XH1A mounting
adapter
Reinstalling hollow
shaft encoders to
XH7A and XH8A
mounting adapter
85
Inspection/Maintenance
Inspection/maintenance for DR.71-DR.225 motors
7
7.6
7.6.1
[123]
[132]
[262]
[131]
[156]
[119]
[117]
[118]
[116]
[134]
[113]
[112]
[707]
[115]
[111]
[129]
[705]
[706]
[35]
[30]
[9]
[13]
[392]
[12]
[16]
[24]
[108]
[42]
[41]
[22]
[109]
[32]
[100]
[103]
[106]
[1]
[90]
[93]
[107]
[11]
[7]
[44]
[2] [3]
[36]
[10]
173332747
[1] Rotor
[2] Retaining ring
[3] Key
[7] Flanged end shield
[9] Screw plug
[10] Retaining ring
[11] Grooved ball bearing
[12] Retaining ring
[13] Machine screw
[16] Stator
[22] Hex head screw
[24] Lifting eyebolt
86
Inspection/Maintenance
Inspection/maintenance for DR.71-DR.225 motors
7.6.2
[123]
[132]
[131]
[116]
[128]
[140]
[139]
[119]
[156]
[112]
[111]
[115]
[108]
[113] [129]
[134]
[390]
[109]
[24]
[9]
[12]
[7]
[707]
[106]
[107]
[706]
[17]
[103]
[100]
[14]
[10]
[104]
[94] [93]
[15] [16]
[90]
[22] [19]
[41] [42]
[91]
[31]
[30]
[715]
[705]
[35]
[32]
[44]
[36]
[3] [1]
[11] [2]
527322635
[1] Rotor
[2] Retaining ring
[3] Key
[7] Flange
[9] Screw plug
[10] Retaining ring
[11] Grooved ball bearing
[12] Retaining ring
[14] Washer
[15] Hex head screw
[16] Stator
[17] Hex nut
[19] Machine screw
[22] Hex head screw
[24] Lifting eyebolt
[30] Sealing ring
[31] Key
[32] Retaining ring
[35] Fan guard
[36] Fan
[41] Cup spring
[42] B-side endshield
[44] Grooved ball bearing
[90] Foot
[91] Hex nut
[93] Washer
[94] Machine screw
[100] Hex nut
[103] Stud
[104] Supporting ring
[106] Oil seal
[107] Oil flinger
[108] Nameplate
[109] Grooved pin
[111] Gasket for lower part
[112] Terminal box lower part
[113] Screw
[115] Terminal board
[116] Serrated lock washer
[117] Stud
[118] Washer
[119] Machine screw
[121] Grooved pin
[123] Hex head screw
[128] Serrated lock washer
[129] Screw plug with O-ring
[131] Gasket for cover
87
Inspection/Maintenance
Inspection/maintenance for DR.71-DR.225 motors
7
7.6.3
[123]
[132]
[131]
[156]
[129]
[134]
[128]
[140]
[139]
[119]
[112]
[111]
[9]
[107]
[105]
[15]
[108]
[24]
[109]
[616]
[116]
[113]
[390]
[115]
[106]
[42]
[93]
[94]
[103]
[100]
[7]
[16]
[2]
[22]
[19] [26]
[25]
[30]
[35]
[715]
[706]
[705]
[36]
[90]
[21]
[44] [43]
[707]
[32]
[40]
[31]
[1]
[11]
[3]
1077856395
[1] Rotor
[2] Retaining ring
[3] Key
[7] Flange
[9] Screw plug
[11] Grooved ball bearing
[15] Hex head screw
[16] Stator
[19] Machine screw
[21] Oil seal flange
[22] Hex head screw
[24] Lifting eyebolt
[25] Machine screw
[26] Sealing washer
[30] Oil seal
88
[31] Key
[32] Retaining ring
[35] Fan guard
[36] Fan
[40] Retaining ring
[42] B-side endshield
[43] Supporting ring
[44] Grooved ball bearing
[90] Foot
[93] Washer
[94] Machine screw
[100] Hex nut
[103] Stud
[105] Cup spring
[106] Oil seal
Inspection/Maintenance
Inspection/maintenance for DR.71-DR.225 motors
7.6.4
WARNING
Risk of crushing if the drive starts up unintentionally.
Severe or fatal injuries.
Isolate the motor and forced cooling fan, if installed, from the power supply before
starting work, safeguarding them against unintentional re-start.
Carefully observe the steps described below.
Loosen hex head screw [15] and remove the flanged endshield [7] from the
stator.
Loosen hex head screw [19] and remove the complete rotor [1] together with
the B-side endshield [42].
Loosen hex head screw [25] and remove the complete rotor [1] from the B-side
endshield [42].
4. Visual inspection: Is there any moisture or gear unit oil inside the stator?
If not, proceed with step 7.
If there is moisture, proceed with step 5
If there is gear oil, have the motor repaired by a specialist workshop
5. If there is moisture inside the stator:
With gearmotors: Remove the motor from the gear unit
With motors without a gear unit: Remove the A-flange
Remove the rotor [1]
6. Clean the winding, dry it and check it electrically (see chapter "Drying the motor"
(page 23)).
89
Inspection/Maintenance
Inspection/maintenance for DR.71-DR.225 motors
7. Replace the grooved ball bearings [11], [44] with permitted ball bearings.
See section"Permitted rolling bearing types" (page 137).
8. Reseal the shaft:
A-side: Replace the oil seal [106]
B-side: Replace the oil seal [30]
Coat the sealing lip with grease (Klber Petamo GHY 133).
9. Reseal the stator seat:
Seal the sealing surface with duroplastic sealing compound
(operating temperature -40 C...+180 C) e.g. "Hylomar L Spezial".
For size DR.71-DR.132: Replace sealing [392].
10.Install the motor and accessory equipment.
90
Inspection/Maintenance
Inspection/maintenance for DR.71-DR.225 brakemotors
7.7
7.7.1
[1]
[71]
[70]
[73]
[68]
[49]
[718]
[66]
[51]
[61]
[67]
[65]
[60]
[50]
[54]
[95] [59] [53] [56] [57] [58] [36] [62] [35] [22]
174200971
[56] Stud
[57] Conical coil spring
[58] Setting nut
[59] Parallel pin
[60] Stud 3x
[61] Hex nut
[65] Pressure ring
[66] Rubber sealing collar
[67] Counter spring
[68] Brake disk
91
Inspection/Maintenance
Inspection/maintenance for DR.71-DR.225 brakemotors
7
7.7.2
[51]
[900]
[70]
[1]
[71]
[550]
[95]
[59] [53]
[57]
[32] [22]
[36]
[58]
[56]
[35 ]
[62]
[901]
179981963
[1] Motor with brake endshield
[22] Hex head screw
[32] Circlip
[35] Fan guard
[36] Fan
[51] Hand lever
92
[70] Carrier
[71] Key
[95] Sealing ring
[550] Pre-assembled brake
[900] Screw
[901] Sealing
Inspection/Maintenance
Inspection/maintenance for DR.71-DR.225 brakemotors
7.7.3
[71]
[901]
[31]
[70]
[56] [51]
[53]
[47]
[36]
[55]
[32] [22]
[550]
[62]
[1]
[57] [58]
[698]
527223691
[1] Motor with brake endshield
[22] Hex head screw
[31] Key
[32] Circlip
[35] Fan guard
[36] Fan
[47] O-ring
[51] Hand lever
93
Inspection/Maintenance
Inspection/maintenance for DR.71-DR.225 brakemotors
7
7.7.4
WARNING
Risk of crushing if the drive starts up unintentionally.
Severe or fatal injuries.
Isolate the motor, brake, and forced cooling fan, if installed, from the power supply
before starting work, safeguarding them against unintentional re-start.
Carefully observe the steps described below.
Loosen hex head screw [15] and remove the flanged endshield [7] from the
stator.
Loosen hex head screw [19] and remove the complete rotor [1] together with
the brake endshield [42].
Loosen hex head screw [25] and remove the complete rotor [1] from the brake
endshield [42].
94
Inspection/Maintenance
Inspection/maintenance for DR.71-DR.225 brakemotors
10.Replace the grooved ball bearings [11], [44] with permitted ball bearings.
See section"Permitted rolling bearing types" (page 137).
11.Reseal the shaft:
A-side: Replace the oil seal [106]
B-side: Replace the oil seal [30]
Coat the sealing lip with grease (Klber Petamo GHY 133).
12.Reseal the stator seat:
Seal the sealing surface with duroplastic sealing compound
(Operating temperature - 40 C...+180 C) e.g. "Hylomar L Spezial".
For size DR.71-DR.132: Replace sealing [392].
13.Size DR-160-DR.225: Replace the O-ring [901] between the brake endshield [42]
and the pre-assembled brake [550]. Install the pre-assembled brake [550]
14.Install the motor, the brake and accessory equipment.
95
Inspection/Maintenance
Inspection/maintenance for DR.71-DR.225 brakemotors
7
7.7.5
[60]
[50]/[276]
[61]
[66]
[54]
[718]
[68]
[42]
[42]
[49]
[50]
[54]
[60]
7.7.6
[67]
[65] [49]
[73]
[718]
[702]
[69] [67]
[68]
[65]
96
[50/276]
[54]
[60] [61]
[49]
[65]
[66]
[67]
[68]
[69]
Pressure ring
Rubber sealing collar
Counter spring
Brake disk
Circular spring
Inspection/Maintenance
Inspection/maintenance for DR.71-DR.225 brakemotors
7.7.7
[66]
[28]
[61]
[60]
[54]
[50/276]
[702]
[28]
[49]
[50]
[54]
[60]
7.7.8
[69]
[67]
[68]
[65]
[49]
Closing cap
Pressure plate, complete
Brake spring (normal)
Magnet, complete
Stud 3x
[28]
[50]/[276]
[69b]
[702] [69]
[68]
[68b] [49]
[67] [51]
[66]
[61]
[54]
[28]
[49]
[50]
[51]
[54]
Closing cap
Pressure plate, complete
Brake spring (normal)
Brake lining
Magnet, complete
[60] Stud 3x
[61] Hex nut
[66] Rubber sealing collar
[67] Setting sleeve
[68] Brake disk
[60]
97
Inspection/Maintenance
Inspection/maintenance for DR.71-DR.225 brakemotors
7
7.7.9
WARNING
Risk of crushing if the drive starts up unintentionally.
Severe or fatal injuries.
Isolate the motor, brake, and forced cooling fan, if installed, from the power supply
before starting work, safeguarding them against unintentional re-start.
Carefully observe the steps described below.
A
1
12
12
2
120
179978635
98
Inspection/Maintenance
Inspection/maintenance for DR.71-DR.225 brakemotors
6. BE05-BE20: Tighten the hex nuts [61] until the working air gap is set correctly, see
chapter "Technical Data" (page 125)
BE30-BE32: Tighten the hex nuts [61] until the working air gap is 25 mm.
7. If you are mounting the BE32 in a vertical position, set the 3 springs on the brake stationary disk to the following measurement:
Mounting position
X in [mm]
7.3
6.5
[49]
[68b]
[52b]
[68]
X
[900]
[49]
[52b]
[68]
[68b]
[900]
Pressure plate
Brake lining (BE32 only)
Brake disk
Brake disk (BE32 only)
Hex nut
99
Inspection/Maintenance
Inspection/maintenance for DR.71-DR.225 brakemotors
WARNING
Risk of crushing if the drive starts up unintentionally.
Severe or fatal injuries.
Isolate the motor, brake, and forced cooling fan, if installed, from the power supply
before starting work, safeguarding them against unintentional re-start.
Carefully observe the steps described below.
INFORMATION
The brake of DR.71-DR.80 motor sizes cannot be removed from the motor because the BE brake is directly installed on the brake endshield of the motor.
The brake of DR.90 DR.225 motor sizes cannot be removed from the motor for
replacing the brake disk because the BE brake is pre-installed on the brake endshield of the motor with a friction disk .
100
Inspection/Maintenance
Inspection/maintenance for DR.71-DR.225 brakemotors
9. With manual brake release: Use setting nuts to set the floating clearance "s" between
the conical coil springs (pressed flat) and the setting nuts (see following figure).
This floating clearance "s" is necessary so that the pressure plate can move
up as the brake lining wears. Otherwise, reliable braking is not guaranteed.
177241867
Brake
1.5
10.Put the rubber sealing collar back in place and re-install the dismantled parts.
INFORMATION
The lockable manual brake release (type HF) is already released when resistance
is encountered when operating the grub screw.
The self-reengaging manual brake release (type HR) can be operated with normal
hand pressure.
In brake motors with self-reengaging manual brake release, the manual brake release lever must be removed after startup/maintenance! A bracket is provided for
storing the lever on the outside of the motor.
INFORMATION
Important: After replacing the brake disk, the maximum braking torque is reached only
after several cycles.
101
Inspection/Maintenance
Inspection/maintenance for DR.71-DR.225 brakemotors
by changing the complete magnet (only possible for BE05 and BE1)
For the possible braking torque steps, please refer to section "Technical Data"
(page 125).
7.7.12 Changing the brake spring of BE05-BE32 brakes
WARNING
Risk of crushing if the drive starts up unintentionally.
Severe or fatal injuries.
Isolate the motor, brake, and forced cooling fan, if installed, from the power supply
before starting work, safeguarding them against unintentional re-start.
Carefully observe the steps described below.
102
Inspection/Maintenance
Inspection/maintenance for DR.71-DR.225 brakemotors
7. With manual brake release: Use setting nuts to set the floating clearance "s" between
the conical coil springs (pressed flat) and the setting nuts (see following figure).
This floating clearance "s" is necessary so that the pressure plate can move
up as the brake lining wears. Otherwise, reliable braking is not guaranteed.
177241867
Brake
1.5
8. Put the rubber sealing collar back in place and re-install the dismantled parts.
INFORMATION
Replace setting nuts [58] and hex nuts [61] if the removal procedure is repeated.
WARNING
Risk of crushing if the drive starts up unintentionally.
Severe or fatal injuries.
Isolate the motor, brake, and forced cooling fan, if installed, from the power supply
before starting work, safeguarding them against unintentional re-start.
Carefully observe the steps described below.
103
Inspection/Maintenance
Inspection/maintenance for DR.71-DR.225 brakemotors
4. Unfasten hex nuts [61], remove complete magnet [54], remove brake springs [50/
276].
5. Install new magnet with brake springs. For the possible braking torque steps, please
refer to section "Technical Data" (page 125).
6. Re-install the brake components
Except for the fan and the fan guard, because the working air gap has to be set
first, see chapter"Setting the working air gap of the BE05-BE20 brakes"
(page 98).
7. With manual brake release: Use setting nuts to set the floating clearance "s" between
the conical coil springs (pressed flat) and the setting nuts (see following figure).
This floating clearance "s" is necessary so that the pressure plate can move
up as the brake lining wears. Otherwise, reliable braking is not guaranteed.
177241867
Brake
1.5
8. Put the rubber sealing collar back in place and re-install the dismantled parts.
9. Replace brake controller in the event of an interturn short circuit or a short circuit to
frame.
INFORMATION
Replace setting nuts [58] and hex nuts [61] if the removal procedure is repeated.
104
Inspection/Maintenance
Inspection/maintenance for DR.71-DR.225 brakemotors
WARNING
Risk of crushing if the drive starts up unintentionally.
Severe or fatal injuries.
Isolate the motor, brake, and forced cooling fan, if installed, from the power supply
before starting work, safeguarding them against unintentional re-start.
Carefully observe the steps described below.
177241867
Brake
1.5
105
Inspection/Maintenance
Inspection/maintenance for DR.71-DR.225 brakemotors
WARNING
Risk of crushing if the drive starts up unintentionally.
Severe or fatal injuries.
Isolate the motor, brake, and forced cooling fan, if installed, from the power supply
before starting work, safeguarding them against unintentional re-start.
Carefully observe the steps described below.
177241867
106
Brake
1.5
Inspection/Maintenance
Inspection/maintenance for DR.315 motor
7.8
7.8.1
[123]
[452]
[634]
[633]
[151]
[454]
[132]
[131]
[119]
[156]
[112]
[111]
[117]
[219]
[118]
[116]
[128]
[140]
[139]
[115]
[134] [607]
[113]
[129]
[108] [109]
[24]
[16]
[7]
[103]
[15]
[90]
[707]
[716]
[705]
[706]
[30]
[715]
[26]
[35]
[22]
[25]
[19]
[42]
[40] [36]
[17]
[43]
[94]
[32]
[93]
[21] [44]
[1]
[31]
[609]
[608]
[9]
[3]
[11]
[606] [604]
[105]
[2]
[106]
[250] [100]
[107]
18014398861480587
[1] Rotor
[2] Retaining ring
[3] Key
[7] Flange
[9] Screw plug
[11] Rolling bearing
[15] Machine screw
[16] Stator
[17] Hex nut
[19] Machine screw
[21] Oil seal flange
[22] Hex head screw
[24] Lifting eyebolt
[25] Machine screw
[26] Sealing washer
[30] Oil seal
[31] Key
[156] Label
[219] Hex nut
[250] Oil seal
[452] Terminal strip
[454] Top hat rail
[604] Lubrication ring
[606] Greasing nipple
[607] Greasing nipple
[608] Oil seal flange
[609] Hex head screw
[633] End bracket
[634] End plate
[705] Canopy
[706] Spacer bolt
[707] Hex head screw
[715] Hex nut
[716] Washer
107
Inspection/Maintenance
Inspection/maintenance for DR.315 motor
7
7.8.2
WARNING
Risk of crushing if the drive starts up unintentionally.
Severe or fatal injuries.
Isolate the motor and forced cooling fan, if installed, from the power supply before
starting work, safeguarding them against unintentional re-start.
Carefully observe the steps described below.
108
Inspection/Maintenance
Inspection/maintenance for DR.315 motor
109
Inspection/Maintenance
Inspection/maintenance for DR.315 brakemotors
7
7.9
7.9.1
[31]
[70]
[62]
[900]
[550]
[37][47]
[53]
[32]
[64] [56]
[71]
[1]
[22]
[35]
[55]
BE122
BE120
[57] [255] [256] [58]
353595787
[1] Motor with brake endshield
[22] Hex head screw
[31] Key
[32] Retaining ring
[35] Fan guard
[36] Fan
[37] V-ring
[47] O-ring
110
[71] Key
[255] Conical seat
[256] Spherical washer
[550] Pre-assembled brake
[900] Screw
[901] Gasket
Inspection/Maintenance
Inspection/maintenance for DR.315 brakemotors
7.9.2
[732]
[50/276]
[69b]
[68b]
[67]
[49]
[52b]
[68]
[69]
[702]
[66]
[61]
[60]
[54]
353594123
[28]
[49]
[50]
[52b]
[54]
[60]
[61]
Closing cap
Pressure plate
Brake spring
Brake lining (BE122 only)
Magnet, complete
Stud 3 x
Hex nut
[66]
[67]
[68]
[68b]
[69]
[69b]
[276]
[702]
[732]
[733]
Friction disk
Cover plate
Screw
111
Inspection/Maintenance
Inspection/maintenance for DR.315 brakemotors
7
7.9.3
WARNING
Risk of crushing if the drive starts up unintentionally.
Severe or fatal injuries.
Isolate the motor, brake, and forced cooling fan, if installed, from the power supply
before starting work, safeguarding them against unintentional re-start.
Carefully observe the steps described below.
112
Inspection/Maintenance
Inspection/maintenance for DR.315 brakemotors
S
353592459
Brake
BE120; BE122
113
Inspection/Maintenance
Inspection/maintenance for DR.315 brakemotors
7
7.9.4
WARNING
Risk of crushing if the drive starts up unintentionally.
Severe or fatal injuries.
Isolate the motor and forced cooling fan, if installed, from the power supply before
starting work, safeguarding them against unintentional re-start.
Carefully observe the steps described below.
A
1
12
12
2
120
179978635
114
Inspection/Maintenance
Inspection/maintenance for DR.315 brakemotors
X in [mm]
10.0
10.5
[49]
[68b]
[52b]
[49]
[52b]
[68]
[68b]
[900]
[68]
X
[900]
Pressure plate
Brake lining (BE122 only)
Brake disk
Brake disk (BE122 only)
Hex nut
115
Inspection/Maintenance
Inspection/maintenance for DR.315 brakemotors
7
7.9.5
WARNING
Risk of crushing if the drive starts up unintentionally.
Severe or fatal injuries.
Isolate the motor, brake, and forced cooling fan, if installed, from the power supply
before starting work, safeguarding them against unintentional re-start.
Carefully observe the following steps!
116
Inspection/Maintenance
Inspection/maintenance for DR.315 brakemotors
9. With manual brake release: Use setting nuts to set the floating clearance "s" between
the conical coil springs (pressed flat) and the setting nuts (see following figure).
This floating clearance "s" is necessary so that the pressure plate can move
up as the brake lining wears. Otherwise, reliable braking is not guaranteed.
S
353592459
Brake
BE120; BE122
10.Put the rubber sealing collar back in place and re-install the dismantled parts.
INFORMATION
The lockable manual brake release (type HF) is already released when resistance
is encountered when operating the grub screw.
After replacing the brake disk, the maximum braking torque is reached only after
several cycles.
117
Inspection/Maintenance
Inspection/maintenance for DR.315 brakemotors
7
7.9.6
For the possible braking torque steps, please refer to section "Technical Data"
(page 125).
7.9.7
WARNING
Risk of crushing if the drive starts up unintentionally.
Severe or fatal injuries.
Isolate the motor, brake, and forced cooling fan, if installed, from the power supply
before starting work, safeguarding them against unintentional re-start.
Carefully observe the steps described below.
118
Inspection/Maintenance
Inspection/maintenance for DR.315 brakemotors
8. With manual brake release: Use setting nuts to set the floating clearance "s" between
the conical coil springs (pressed flat) and the setting nuts (see following figure).
This floating clearance "s" is necessary so that the pressure plate can move
up as the brake lining wears. Otherwise, reliable braking is not guaranteed.
S
353592459
Brake
BE120; BE122
9. Put the rubber sealing collar back in place and re-install the dismantled parts.
INFORMATION
Replace setting nuts [58] and hex nuts [61] if the removal procedure is repeated.
119
Inspection/Maintenance
Inspection/maintenance for DR.315 brakemotors
7
7.9.8
INFORMATION
The mounting position for installation should correspond to the specifications on the
nameplate; make sure that the intended mounting position is permitted.
WARNING
Risk of crushing if the drive starts up unintentionally.
Severe or fatal injuries.
Isolate the motor, brake, and forced cooling fan, if installed, from the power supply
before starting work, safeguarding them against unintentional re-start.
Carefully observe the steps described below.
S
353592459
120
Brake
BE120; BE122
Inspection/Maintenance
Inspection/maintenance DUB
7.10
Inspection/maintenance DUB
[379]
[945]
[112]
[946]
[561]
[560]
[66]
[49]
[556]
[559]
[561]
[562]
[945]
[946]
Stud
Washer
Countersunk screw
Mounting plate, complete
121
Inspection/Maintenance
Inspection/maintenance DUB
[379]
[112]
[66]
[49]
[562] [558]
[556]
[561] [557]
[555]
[560]
[559]
353595787
[49] Pressure plate for DUB
[66] Rubber sealing for DUB
[112] Terminal box lower part
[379] Cable gland
[555] Microswitch
122
[561] Stud
[562] Washer
Inspection/Maintenance
Inspection/maintenance DUB
WARNING
Risk of crushing if the drive starts up unintentionally.
Severe or fatal injuries.
Isolate the motor and forced cooling fan, if installed, from the power supply before
starting work, safeguarding them against unintentional re-start.
Carefully observe the steps described below.
1. Check and, if necessary, adjust the working air gap according to section "Setting the
working air gap for BE.. brake".
2. Screw hex head screw [560] against the actuator of microswitch [555] until it switches
over (brown-blue contacts closed).
While screwing, apply hex nut [561] to eliminate the longitudinal play from the thread.
3. Turn hex head screw [560] back until microswitch [555] switches back (contacts
brown-blue open).
4. To ensure operational reliability, turn hex head screw [560] further back by one-sixth
of a revolution (0.1 mm)
5. Tighten hex nut [561], while doing so, hold hex head screw [560] to keep it in the correct position.
6. Switch the brake on and off several times. Check whether the microswitch opens and
closes reliably in any motor shaft position. Therefore, change the position of the
motor shaft manually several times.
123
Inspection/Maintenance
Inspection/maintenance DUB
WARNING
Risk of crushing if the drive starts up unintentionally.
Severe or fatal injuries.
Isolate the motor and forced cooling fan, if installed, from the power supply before
starting work, safeguarding them against unintentional re-start.
Carefully observe the steps described below.
1. Check and, if necessary, adjust the working air gap according to section "Setting the
working air gap for BE.. brake".
2. Screw hex head screw [560] against the actuator of microswitch [555] until it switches
over (brown-blue contacts closed).
While screwing, apply hex nut [561] to eliminate the longitudinal play from the thread.
3. For BE2-BE5: Loosen hex head screw [560] by a 3/4 revolution towards the microswitch [555] (with BE2 by about 0.375 mm / with BE5 by about 0.6 mm).
For BE11-BE122: Loosen hex head screw [560] towards the microswitch [555] by a
whole revolution (about 0.8 mm).
4. Tighten hex nut [561], while doing so, hold hex head screw [560] to keep it in the correct position.
5. If the brake lining reaches the wear limit, the microswitch automatically switches back
(contacts brown-blue open) and activates a relay or a signal.
7.10.5 Inspection/maintenance of the DUB for function and wear monitoring
If two DUB are connected to one brake, both monitoring statuses can be realized. In this
case, set the DUB for wear monitoring before you set the DUB for function monitoring.
124
Technical Data
Work done, working air gap, braking torques
Technical Data
8.1
kVA
i
P Hz
If you you use encoders and brakes with functional safety, the values for the maximum
working air gaps and the work done until maintenance reduce. For the new values, refer
to the "Safety-Rated Encoders Functional Safety for AC Motors DR.71225, 315" addendum to the operating instructions.
Brake
Type
Braking
work
until
Maintenance
[106 J]
Working air
gap
Brake
disk
[mm]
[mm]
min.
1)
max.
Part number
damping
plate/pole
sheet
Order number of
brake springs
min.
[Nm (lb-in)]
Standard
Blue
Standard
Blue
6
4
3
0135 017 X
1374 137 3
BE05
120
0.25
0.6
9.0
1374 056 3
5.0 (44)
3.5 (31)
2.5 (22)
1.8 (16)
BE1
120
0.25
0.6
9.0
1374 056 3
10 (88.5)
7.0 (62)
5.0 (44)
6
4
3
0135 017 X
1374 137 3
1374 019 9
20 (177)
14 (124)
10 (88.5)
7.0 (62)
5.0 (44)
6
2
2
4
2
4
3
1374 024 5
1374 052 0
1374 069 5
55 (487)
40 (354)
28 (248)
20 (177)
14 (124)
6
2
2
4
2
4
3
1374 070 9
1374 071 7
1374 171 3
110 (974)
80 (708)
55 (487)
40 (354)
6
2
2
4
2
4
1374 183 7
1374 184 5
1374 171 3 +
1374 699 5
20 (177)
200 (1770)
150 (1328)
110 (974)
80 (708)
55 (487)
6
4
3
3
2
3
1374 322 8
1374 248 5
1374 675 8
40 (354)
300 (2655)
200 (1770)
150 (1328)
100 (885)
75 (667)
8
4
4
8
6
0187 455 1
1374 435 6
600 (5310)
500 (4425)
400 (3540)
300 (2655)
200 (1770)
150 (1328)
8
6
4
4
2
4
8
6
0187 455 1
1374 435 6
1374 673 1
100 (885)
BE2
BE5
BE11
BE20
BE30
BE32
180
390
640
1000
1500
1500
0.25
0.25
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.4
0.6
0.9
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
9.0
9.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
125
kVA
i
Brake
Type
Technical Data
Work done, working air gap, braking torques
P Hz
Braking
work
until
Maintenance
[106 J]
BE120
BE122
520
520
Working air
gap
Brake
disk
[mm]
[mm]
min.
1)
0.4
0.5
max.
1.2
1.2
Part number
damping
plate/pole
sheet
Order number of
brake springs
min.
[Nm (lb-in)]
Standard
Blue
Standard
Blue
12.0
1000 (8851)
800 (7081)
600 (5310)
400 (3540)
8
6
4
4
2
4
1360 877 0
1360 831 2
2000 (17701)
1600 (14161)
1200 (10621)
800 (7081)
8
6
4
4
2
4
1360 877 0
1360 831 2
12.0
1) When checking the working air gap, note: Parallelism tolerances on the brake disk may cause deviations of 0.15 mm after a test run.
126
Technical Data
Braking torque assignment
8.2
8.2.1
Motor
type
Brake
type
BE05
DR.71
DR.80
DR.90
1.8
(16)
2.5
(22)
3.5
(31)
5.0
(44)
7.0
(62)
10
(88)
5.0
(44)
7.0
(62)
10
(88)
BE2
5.0
(44)
7.0
(62)
10
(88.5)
BE1
5.0
(44)
7.0
(62)
10
(88)
BE2
5.0
(44)
7.0
(62)
10
(88)
1.8
(16)
2.5
(22)
3.5
(31)
BE1
BE2
8.2.2
Motor
type
P Hz
5.0
(44)
7.0
(62)
10
(88)
14
(124)
20
(177)
14
(124)
20
(177)
14
(124)
20
(177)
14
(124)
20
(177)
14
(124)
20
(177)
28
(248)
40
(354)
55
(487)
28
(248)
40
(354)
55
(487)
40
(354)
55
(487)
BE11
20
(180)
40
(354)
55
(487)
BE5
28
(248)
40
(354)
55
(487)
BE11
20
(180)
40
(354)
BE11
20
(180)
DR.112
14
(124)
20
(180)
80
(708)
110
(974)
55
(487)
80
(708)
110
(974)
40
(354)
55
(487)
80
(708)
110
(974)
BE20
40
(354)
55
(487)
80
(708)
110
(974)
150
(1328)
200
(1770)
BE20
40
(354)
55
(487)
80
(708)
110
(974)
150
(1328)
200
(1770)
75
(667)
100
(885)
150
(1328)
200
(1770)
300
(2655)
100
(885)
150
(974)
200
(1770)
300
(2655)
100
(885)
150
(974)
200
(1770)
300
(2655)
100
(885)
150
(1328)
200
(1770)
300
(2655)
DR.132
DR.160
BE30
BE32
DR.200/
225
5.0
(44)
BE5
BE5
DR.180
5.0
(44)
BE5
DR.100
BE1
BE05
kVA
BE30
BE32
75
(667)
400
(3540)
400
(3540)
500
(4425)
600
(5310)
127
kVA
i
Technical Data
Operating currents
P Hz
8.2.3
Motor type
Brake type
BE120
DR.315
600
(5310)
800
(7081)
1000
(8851)
800
(7081)
BE122
8.3
Operating currents
8.3.1
1200
(10621)
1600
(14161)
2000
(17701)
The current values IH (holding current) listed in the tables are r.m.s. values. Use only
appropriate instruments for measuring r.m.s. values. The inrush current (accelerator
current) IB only flows for a short time (about 160 ms) when the brake is released. There
is no increased inrush current if a BG or BMS brake rectifier is used or if there is a direct
DC voltage supply only possible with brakes up to size BE2.
BE05, BE1
BE2
5/10 (44/88)
20 (177)
32 (0.043)
43 (0.058)
BE05, BE1
BE2
Nominal voltage VN
VDC
IH
[AAC]
IG
[ADC]
IH
[AAC]
IG
[ADC]
10
2,10
2.80
2.75
3.75
60 (57-63)
24
0.88
1.17
1.57
1.46
120 (111-123)
48
0.45
0.58
0.59
0.78
147 (139-159)
60
0,36
0,47
0,48
0.61
184 (174-193)
80
0.29
0.35
0.38
0.47
208 (194-217)
90
0.26
0.31
0.34
0.42
230 (218-243)
96
0.23
0.29
0.30
0.39
254 (244-273)
110
0.20
0.26
0.27
0.34
290 (274-306)
125
0.18
0.26
0.24
0.30
330 (307-343)
140
0.16
0.20
0.21
0.27
360 (344-379)
160
0.14
0.18
0.19
0.24
400 (380-431)
180
0.13
0.16
0.17
0.21
460 (432-484)
200
0.11
0.14
0.15
0.19
500 (485-542)
220
0.10
0.13
0.13
0.17
575 (543-600)
250
0.09
0.11
0.12
0.15
VAC
24 (23-26)
Key
IB
IH
IG
VN
128
Technical Data
Operating currents
8.3.2
kVA
i
P Hz
BE5
BE11
BE20
BE30, BE32
55 (487)
110 (974)
200 (1770)
300/600
(2655/5310)
49 (0.066)
77 (0.10)
100 (0.13)
130 (0.17)
5.7
6.6
10
BE5
BE11
BE20
BE30, BE32
VDC
IH
[AAC]
IH
[AAC]
IH
[AAC]
IH
[AAC]
24
1.25
2.08
2.49
Nominal voltage VN
VAC
60 (57-63)
120 (111-123)
48
0.64
1.04
1.25
1.81
147 (139-159)
60
0.51
0.83
1.02
1.33
184 (174-193)
80
0.40
0.66
0.79
1.15
208 (194-217)
90
0.36
0.59
0.70
1.02
230 (218-243)
96
0.33
0.52
0.63
0.91
254 (244-273)
110
0.29
0.47
0.56
0.81
290 (274-306)
125
0.26
0.42
0.50
0.72
330 (307-343)
140
0.23
0.37
0.44
0.64
360 (344-379)
160
0.21
0.33
0.40
0.57
400 (380-431)
180
0.18
0.29
0.35
0.51
460 (432-484)
200
0.16
0.26
0.32
0.46
500 (485-542)
220
0.15
0.23
0.28
0.41
575 (543-600)
250
0.13
0.21
0.25
0.36
Key
IB
IH
IG
VN
129
kVA
i
8.3.3
Technical Data
Operating currents
P Hz
Brake BE120, BE122
The current values IH (holding current) listed in the tables are r.m.s. values. Use only
appropriate instruments for measuring r.m.s. values. The inrush current (accelerator
current) IB only flows for a short time (about 400 ms) when the brake is released. A separate voltage supply is not possible.
BE120
BE122
1000 (8851)
2000 (17701)
250 (0.34)
250 (0.34)
4.9
4.9
Rated voltage VN
BE120
BE122
VAC
VDC
IH
[AAC]
IH
[AAC]
230 (218-243)
1.80
1.80
254 (244-273)
1.60
1.60
290 (274-306)
1.43
1.43
360 (344-379)
1.14
1.14
400 (380-431)
1.02
1.02
460 (432-484)
0.91
0.91
500 (485-542)
0.81
0.81
575 (543-600)
0.72
0.72
Key
IB
IH
IG
VN
130
Technical Data
Resistors
8.4
Resistors
8.4.1
BE05, BE1
BE2
BE5
5/10 (44/88)
20 (177)
55 (487)
3 2 (0.043)
43 (0.058)
49 (0.066)
5.7
VAC
BE05, BE1
P Hz
Nominal voltage VN
8.4.2
kVA
BE2
BE5
VDC
RB
RT
RB
RT
RB
24 (23-26)
10
0.77
2.35
0.57
1.74
RT
-
60 (57-63)
24
4.85
14.8
3.60
11.0
2.20
10.5
42.0
120 (111-123)
48
19.4
59.0
14.4
44.0
8.70
147 (139-159)
60
31.0
94.0
23.0
69.0
13.8
66
184 (174-193)
80
48.5
148
36.0
111
22.0
105
208 (194-217)
90
61.0
187
45.5
139
27.5
132
230 (218-243)
96
77.0
235
58.0
174
34.5
166
254 (244-273)
110
97.0
295
72.0
220
43.5
210
290 (274-306)
125
122
370
91
275
55.0
265
330 (307-343)
140
154
470
115
350
69.0
330
360 (344-379)
160
194
590
144
440
87.0
420
400 (380-431)
180
245
740
182
550
110
530
460 (432-484)
200
310
940
230
690
138
660
500 (485-542)
220
385
1180
290
870
174
830
575 (543-600)
250
490
1480
365
1100
220
1050
BE11
BE20
BE30, BE32
110 (974)
200 (1770)
600 (5310)
77 (0.10)
100 (0.13)
130 (0.17)
6.6
10
Nominal voltage VN
VAC
BE11
BE20
BE30, BE32
VDC
RB
RT
RB
RT
RB
60 (57-63)
24
1.20
7.6
1.1
7.1
RT
-
120 (111-123)
48
4.75
30.5
3.3
28.6
2.1
15.8
147 (139-159)
60
7.7
43.5
5.4
36.0
3.7
27.5
184 (174-193)
80
12.0
76.0
8.4
57
5.3
39.8
208 (194-217)
90
15.1
96
10.6
71.7
6.7
50
230 (218-243)
96
19.0
121
13.3
90.3
8.4
63
254 (244-273)
110
24.0
152
16.7
134
10.6
79.3
290 (274-306)
125
30.0
191
21.1
143
13.3
100
330 (307-343)
140
38.0
240
26.5
180
16.8
126
360 (344-379)
160
47.5
305
33.4
227
21.1
158
400 (380-431)
180
60
380
42.1
286
26.6
199
460 (432-484)
200
76
480
52.9
360
33.4
251
500 (485-542)
220
95
600
66.7
453
42.1
316
575 (543-600)
250
120
760
83.9
570
53.0
398
131
kVA
i
8.4.3
Technical Data
Resistors
P Hz
Resistance measurement BE05, BE1, BE2, BE5, BE30, BE32
Cutoff in the AC
circuit
The following illustration shows how to measure resistance with cutoff in the AC circuit.
RD
RB
WH
BU
RT
RD
BU
WH
Cut-off in the DC
and AC circuits
The following illustration shows how to measure resistance with cut-off in the DC and
AC circuits.
RD
RB
WH
BU
RD
WH
BS Accelerator coil
TS coil section
RB Accelerator coil resistance at 20 C []
RT Coil section resistance at 20 C []
UN Rated voltage (rated voltage range)
RT
BU
RD red
WH white
BU blue
INFORMATION
When measuring the resistance of the coil section (RSec) or the acceleration coil
(RAcc), remove the white conductor from the brake rectifier; if it remains connected,
the internal resistance of the brake rectifier will cause erroneous results.
132
Technical Data
Resistors
8.4.4
P Hz
BE120
BE122
1000 (8851)
2000 (17701)
250 (0.34)
250 (0.34)
4.9
4.9
Nominal voltage VN
VAC
8.4.5
kVA
BE120
VDC
RB
BE122
RT
RB
RT
230 (218-243)
7.6
29.5
7.6
29.5
254 (244-273)
9.5
37.0
9.5
37.0
290 (274-306)
12.0
46.5
12.0
46.5
360 (344-379)
19.1
74.0
19.1
74.0
400 (380-431)
24.0
93.0
24.0
93.0
460 (432-484)
30.0
117.0
30.0
117.0
500 (485-542)
38.0
147.0
38.0
147.0
575 (543-600)
48.0
185.0
48.0
185.0
RD
RB
WH
RT
BU
RD WH BU
BS Accelerator coil
TS coil section
RB Accelerator coil resistance at 20 C []
RT Coil section resistance at 20 C []
UN nominal voltage (nominal voltage range)
INFORMATION
When measuring the resistance of the coil section (RSec) or the acceleration coil
(RAcc), remove the white conductor from the brake rectifier; if it remains connected,
the internal resistance of the brake rectifier will cause erroneous results.
133
kVA
i
Technical Data
Brake rectifier combinations
P Hz
8.5
8.5.1
Size
BGE
BS
BMS
BME
BMH
BMK
BE2
BE5
BE11
BE20
BE30, BE32
X1
X1
Size 3
BGE 1.5
X1
X1
X1
X1
BGE 3
X2
X2
X2
X2
BS 24
BMS 1.5
BMS 3
BME 1.5
BME 3
BMH 1.5
BMH 3
BMK 1.5
BMK 3
BMP 3
BMV
BMV 5
BSG
BSG
BSR
BUR
8.5.2
BE1
X1
BMP 1.5
BMP
X
X1
X2
BE05
BGE 3 + SR 11
BGE 3 + SR 15
BGE 1.5 + SR 11
BGE 1.5 + SR 15
BGE 3 + UR 11
BGE 1.5 + UR 15
Standard design
Standard design with brake rated voltage of AC 150 - 500 V
Standard design with brake rated voltage of AC 24/42 - 150 V
Optional
Not permitted
134
BE120
BE122
Technical Data
Brake control system
8.6
8.6.1
kVA
i
P Hz
The following tables list the technical data of brake control systems for installation in the
motor wiring space and the assignments with regard to motor size and connection technology. The different housings have different colors (= color code) to make them easier
to distinguish.
Motor size DR.71DR.225
Type
Function
BG
One-way rectifier
BGE
Voltage
Holding
current
IHmax [A]
Type
Part
number
Color
code
AC 150...500 V
1.5
BG 1.5
825 384 6
Black
AC 24...500 V
3.0
BG 3
825 386 2
Brown
AC 150...500 V
1.5
BGE 1.5
825 385 4
Red
AC 42...150 V
3.0
BGE 3
825 387 0
Blue
1.0
BGE 1.5 + SR 11
825 385 4
826 761 8
1.0
BGE 1.5 + SR 15
825 385 4
826 762 6
1.0
BGE 3 + SR11
825 387 0
826 761 8
1.0
BGE 3 + SR15
825 387 0
826 762 6
AC 150...500 V
BSR
AC 150...500 V
1.0
BGE 1.5 + UR 15
825 385 4
826 759 6
AC 42...150 V
1.0
BGE 3 + UR 11
825 387 0
826 758 8
BS
DC 24 V
5.0
BS24
826 763 4
Water
blue
BSG
Electronic switching
DC 24 V
5.0
BSG
825 459 1
White
Type
Function
Voltage
Holding
current
IHmax [A]
Type
Part
number
Color
code
BMP
AC 230...575 V
2.8
BMP 3.1
829 507 7
BUR
135
kVA
i
8.6.2
Technical Data
Brake control system
P Hz
Control cabinet
The following tables list the technical data of brake control systems for installation in the
control cabinet, and the assignment regarding the motor size and connection technology. The different housings have different colors (= color code) to make them easier to
distinguish.
Holding
current
IHmax [A]
Type
AC 150...500 V
1.5
BMS 1.5
825 802 3
Black
AC 42...150 V
3.0
BMS 3
825 803 1
Brown
AC 150...500 V
1.5
BME 1.5
825 722 1
Red
AC 42...150 V
3.0
BME 3
825 723 X
Blue
AC 150...500 V
1.5
BMH 1.5
825 818 X
Green
BMH
AC 42...150 V
BMH 3
825 819 8
Yellow
AC 150...500 V
1.5
BMP 1.5
825 685 3
White
BMP
AC 42...150 V
3.0
BMP 3
826 566 6
Light
blue
AC 150...500 V
1.5
BMK 1.5
826 463 5
Water
blue
AC 42...150 V
3.0
BMK 3
826 567 4
Bright
red
BMV
DC 24 V
5.0
BMV 5
1 300 006 3
White
Type
Function
Voltage
Holding
current
IHmax [A]
Type
Part
number
Color
code
BMP
AC 230...575 V
2.8
BMP 3.1
829 507 7
Type
Function
BMS
One-way rectifier as BG
BME
BMK
Voltage
Part
number
Color
code
136
Technical Data
Permitted rolling bearing types
8.7
8.7.1
Motor type
8.7.2
A-side bearing
IEC motor
kVA
i
P Hz
B-side bearing
Gearmotor
AC motor
Brakemotor
DR.71
6204-2Z-J-C3
6303-2Z-J-C3
6203-2Z-J-C3
6203-2RS-J-C3
DR.80
6205-2Z-J-C3
6304-2Z-J-C3
6304-2Z-J-C3
6304-2RS-J-C3
DR.90-DR.100
6306-2Z-J-C3
6205-2Z-J-C3
6205-2RS-J-C3
DR.112-DR.132
6308-2Z-J-C3
6207-2Z-J-C3
6207-2RS-J-C3
DR.160
6309-2Z-J-C3
6209-2Z-J-C3
6209-2RS-J-C3
DR.180
6312-2Z-J-C3
6213-2Z-J-C3
6213-2RS-J-C3
DR.200-DR.225
6314-2Z-J-C3
6314-2Z-J-C3
6314-2RS-J-C3
Motor type
A-side bearing
IEC motor
Gearmotor
DR.315K
DR.315S
DR.315M
B-side bearing
IEC motor
Gearmotor
6319-J-C3
6319-J-C3
Motor type
6319-J-C3
6319-J-C3
6322-J-C3
DR.315L
A-side bearing
6322-J-C3
B-side bearing
IEC motor
Gearmotor
DR.315K
DR.315S
DR.315M
6319-J-C3
NU319E
6319-J-C3
6322-J-C3
DR.315L
8.7.3
Motor type
AC motor
Brakemotor
DR.200-DR.225
6314-C3-EI
6314-C3-EI
DR.315K
DR.315S
DR.315M
DR.315L
6319-J-C3
6319-J-C3
6322-J-C3
137
kVA
i
Technical Data
Lubricant tables
P Hz
8.8
Lubricant tables
8.8.1
INFORMATION
Using the wrong bearing grease might result in increased motor noise.
Motor size DR.71DR.225
Manufacturer
Esso
Klber
Kyodo Yushi
Type
Polyrex EM
DIN designation
1)
Barrierta L55/22)
Multemp
SRL2)
K2P-20
KX2U
K2N-40
Motor rolling
bearings
Ambient temperature
Manufacturer
Type
DIN designation
Esso
Polyrex EM1)
K2P-20
SKF
GXN
1)
K2N-40
8.9
Usage
Lubricant for rolling
bearings
Lubricant for
sealing rings
Anti-corrosion agent
and lubricant
138
Manufacturer
Type
Quantity
Order number
Esso
Polyrex EM
400 g
09101470
SKF
GXN
400 g
09101276
Klber
10 g
04963458
SEW-EURODRIVE
NOCO FLUID
5.5 g
09107819
Technical Data
Encoders
8.10
kVA
i
P Hz
Encoders
Encoder type
For motors
Supply voltage
ES7S
EG7S
ES7R
EG7R
ES7C
EG7C
EH7S
DR.71 132
DR.160
225
DR.71 132
DR.160
225
DR.71 132
DR.160
225
DR.315
VB
DC 7 V 30 V
DC 7 30 V
DC 4.75 30 V
DC 10 V
30 V
Iin
140 mARMS
160 mARMS
240 mARMS
140 mARMS
fmax
150 kHz
120 kHz
120 kHz
180 kHz
A, B
1024
1024
1024
1024
DC 2.5 V
DC 2.5 V
DC 0.5 V
DC 1.1 V
C
Output amplitude per track
Vhigh
1 VSS
Vlow
Signal output
1 VSS
Sin/cos
TTL
HTL
Sin/cos
10 mARMS
25 mARMS
60 mARMS
10 mARMS
Sin/cos
1 : 1 10 %
1 : 1 10 %
Sin/cos
Phase angle A: B
90 3
90 20
90 20
90 10
100 m/s
100 m/s
Iout
Vibration resistance
100 m/s
Shock resistance
Maximum speed
6000 min-1
nmax
Degree of protection
Ambient temperature
Connection
100 m/s
200 m/s
1000 m/s 2000 m/s 1000 m/s 2000 m/s 1000 m/s 2000 m/s 2000 m/s
6000 min-1
6000 min-1
6000 rpm at
70 C /
3500 rpm at
80 C
IP66
IP66
IP66
IP65
-30 C to +60 C
-30 C to +60 C
-30 C to +60 C
-20 C to
+60 C
Terminal box on incremen- Terminal box on incremen- Terminal box on incremen- 12-pin plug
tal encoder
tal encoder
tal encoder
connector
Encoder type
For motors
Supply voltage
Max. current consumption
AS7Y
AG7Y
DR.71 132
DR.160 225
VB
DC 7 30 V
Iin
140 mARMS
fmax
200 kHz
A, B
2048
C
Output amplitude per track
Vhigh
1 VSS
Vlow
Signal output
Output current per track
Sin/cos
10 mARMS
Iout
Sin/cos
Phase angle A: B
90 3
Scanning code
Gray code
Single-turn resolution
Multi-turn resolution
4096 revolutions
Data transfer
synchronous-serial
Cycle frequency
Permitted range: 100 2000 kHz (max. 100 m cable length with 300 kHz)
12 30 s
Vibration resistance
100 m/s
Shock resistance
Maximum speed
1000 m/s
nmax
2000 m/s
6000 min-1
139
kVA
i
Technical Data
Encoders
P Hz
Encoder type
AS7Y
AG7Y
Degree of protection
IP66
Ambient temperature
-20 C to +60 C
Connection
Encoder type
For motors
Supply voltage
Max. current consumption
AS7W
AG7W
DR.71 132
DR.160 225
VB
DC 7 30 V
Iin
150 mARMS
fmax
200 kHz
A, B
2048
C
Output amplitude per track
Vhigh
1 VSS
Vlow
Signal output
Output current per track
Sin/cos
10 mARMS
Iout
Sin/cos
Phase angle A: B
90 3
Scanning code
Binary code
Single-turn resolution
Multi-turn resolution
65536 revolutions
Data transfer
RS485
Cycle frequency
9600 baud
100 m/s
200 m/s
1000 m/s
2000 m/s
6000 min-1
nmax
Degree of protection
Ambient temperature
IP66
-20 C to +60 C
Connection
Encoder type
EI7C
EI76
For motors
VB
DC 9 30 V
Imax
120 mARMS
fmax
A, B
Supply voltage
C
Output amplitude per track
0.5 VSS
Iout
60 mARMS
HTL
1 : 1 20 %
Phase angle A: B
90 20
Vibration resistance
100 m/s
Degree of protection
2
VB -2.5 VSS
Shock resistance
140
Vlow
Maximum speed
EI71
1,54 kHz
24
Vhigh
Signal output
Output current per track
EI72
DR.71 132
1000 m/s
nmax
3600 min-1
IP65
kVA
Technical Data
Encoders
Encoder type
Ambient temperature
EI7C
A
EI76
EI72
P Hz
EI71
-30 C to +60 C
Connection
Encoder type
EV1T
EV1S
For motors
Supply voltage
Max. current consumption
EV1R:
VB
DC 5 V
Iin
180 mARMS
DC 10 V 30 V
160 mARMS
fmax
120 kHz
A, B
1024
C
Output amplitude per track
EV1C
DR.71 225
340 mARMS
2.5 VDC
VB DC - 3.5 V
DC 0.5 V
1.5 VDC
Vhigh
DC 2.5 V
Vlow
DC 0.5 V
Signal output
180 mARMS
1 VSS
TTL
Sin/cos
TTL
HTL
20 mARMS
40 mARMS
20 mARMS
60 mARMS
1 : 1 20 %
Sin/cos
Phase angle A: B
90 20
90
Iout
Vibration resistance
1000 m/s
nmax
Degree of protection
Ambient temperature
90 20
300 m/s
Shock resistance
Maximum speed
1 : 1 20 %
6000 min-1
IP66
Connection
-30 C to +60 C
Terminal box on incremental encoder
141
kVA
i
8.11
Technical Data
Markings on the nameplate
P Hz
Markings on the nameplate
The following table lists all markings that can occur on a nameplate and an explanation
of what they mean:
Mark
Meaning
CE mark to state compliance with European guidelines, such as the Low Voltage
Directive
UR logo to confirm that UL (Underwriters Laboratory) is informed about the registered components; register number by UL: E189357
DoE mark to confirm compliance with US-American efficiency limit values for AC
motors.
CSA mark to confirm the Canadian Standard Association (CSA) and the market
conformity of AC motors
CSAe mark to confirm compliance with the Canadian efficiency limit values for AC
motors
CCC logo to confirm the adherance to the Chinese regulation for small appliances
VIK mark to confirm the compliance with the directive of the German Association of
Industrial Machines (V.I.K.)
FS mark with code number to identify functional safety relevant components
02
142
Technical Data
Characteristic values of functional safety
8.12
kVA
i
P Hz
B10d
Switching cycles
BE05
16.000.000
BE1
12.000.000
BE2
8.000.000
BE5
6.000.000
BE11
3.000.000
BE20
2.000.000
BE30
1.500.000
BE32
1.500.000
BE120
250.000
BE122
250.000
8.12.2 Characteristic safety values of the encoders EG7S, ES7S, AG7W, AG7Y, AS7Y
Definition of the characteristic safety value MTTFd:
The value MTTFd (Mean Time To Failure) specifies theh mean time to dangerous failure
/ component fault.
Motor size
DR.71-132
DR.160-225, 315
Designation
MTTFd1) [a]
ES7S
61
20
AS7W
41
20
AS7Y
41
20
EG7S
61
20
AG7W
41
20
AG7Y
41
20
143
kVA
Malfunctions
P Hz
Malfunctions
WARNING
Risk of crushing if the drive starts up unintentionally.
Severe or fatal injuries.
CAUTION
The surface temperatures on the drive can be very high during operation.
Danger of burns.
Let the motor cool down before you start your work.
NOTICE
Improper troubleshooting measures may damage the drive.
Possible damage to property.
144
Use only genuine spare parts in accordance with the valid parts list.
Malfunctions
Motor malfunctions
9.1
Motor malfunctions
Malfunction
Possible cause
Remedy
Replace fuse
Motor power designed for star-star connection but only connected in star
If the delta inrush current is not too high (observe the regulations of the power supplier), start up directly in delta;
Check the project planning and use a larger motor or special version if necessary (consult SEW-EURODRIVE)
Winding defective
Rotor rubbing
Fuses blow or motor protection trips immediately
Motor overload
Voltage drops
Overload
Insufficient cooling
Provide for cooling air supply or clear cooling air passages, retrofit forced cooling fan if necessary. Check the
air filter, clean or replace if necessary
145
Malfunctions
Motor malfunctions
146
Malfunction
Possible cause
Remedy
Excessively loud
Reduce load
Malfunctions
Brake malfunctions
9.2
Brake malfunctions
Malfunction
Possible cause
Remedy
Provide correct connection voltage: brake voltage specifications on the nameplate. Check the cross section of the brake
supply cable, increase cross section if necessary.
Check resistors and insulation of the brake coils (see "Resistors" section for resistance values).
Replace complete brake and brake control (specialist workshop),
Check switchgear, replace if necessary
Rectifier defective
147
Malfunctions
Brake malfunctions
148
Malfunction
Possible cause
Remedy
Noises in vicinity of
brake
Gearing wear on the brake disk or the carrier caused by jolting startup
Malfunctions
Malfunctions when operated with a frequency inverter
9.3
9.4
Customer service
Please have the following information to hand if you require the assistance of our
customer service:
9.5
Assumed cause
Ambient temperature
Humidity
Installation altitude
Dirt
etc.
Disposal
Dispose of the motors in accordance with the material structure and the regulations in
force:
Iron
Aluminum
Copper
Plastic
Electronic components
149
Appendix
Wiring diagrams
10
10
Appendix
10.1
Wiring diagrams
INFORMATION
The motor should be connected as shown in the connection wiring diagram or the assignment diagram, which are supplied with the motor. The following section only
shows a selection of the common types of connections. You can obtain the relevant
wiring diagrams free of charge from SEW-EURODRIVE.
W2
(T6)
[2]
U2
(T4)
V2
(T5)
U1
[3] (T1)
V1
(T2)
W1
(T3)
L2
L3
[1]
U2
(T4)
V2
W2
(T5) (T6)
U1
(T1)
V1
W1
(T2) (T3)
L1
242603147
[1] Motor winding
[2] Motor terminal board
[3] Supply cables
connection
U2
(T4)
[1]
V2
(T5)
W2
(T6)
U1
(T1)
V1
(T2)
W1
(T3)
[3]
W2
(T6)
[2]
U2
(T4)
V2
(T5)
U1
(T1)
V1
(T2)
W1
(T3)
L1
L2
L3
242598155
[1] Motor winding
[2] Motor terminal board
[3] Supply cables
150
Appendix
Wiring diagrams
10
The following figure shows connection for high voltages and connection for low
voltages.
U1
T1
V1
T2
W1
T3
U2
T4
V2
T5
W2
T6
U3
T7
V3
T8
W3
T9
U4
T10
V4
T11
W4
T12
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[3]
L1
[2]
W3
T9
U3
T7
V3
T8
W3
T9
U3
T7
V2
T5
W2
T6
U2
T4
V2
T5
W2
T6
U2
T4
V4
T11
W4
T12
U4
T1
V4
T11
W4
T12
U4
T10
U1
T1
V1
T2
W1
T3
U1
T1
V1
T2
W1
T3
V3
T8
L2
L3
[3]
L1
L2
L3
Motor winding
Motor terminal board
Supply cables
151
Appendix
Wiring diagrams
10
The following figure shows connection for high voltages and connection for low
voltages.
U1
T1
V1
T2
W1
T3
U2
T4
V2
T5
W2
T6
U3
T7
V3
T8
W3
T9
[1]
[4]
W2
T6
U1 U3
T1 T7
[3]
[1]
[2]
L1
U2
T4
V2
T5
W2 W3 U2 U3
T6 T9 T4 T7
[2]
V1 V3 W1 W3
T2 T8 T3 T9
L2
[3]
L3
Motor winding
Motor terminal board
[3]
[4]
V2 V3
T5 T8
U1
T1
V1
T2
W1
T3
L1
L2
L3
[2]
Supply cables
Star point connected in motor
152
Appendix
Wiring diagrams
10
The following illustrations show the connection of the motor protection with TF PTC
thermistor sensors or TH bimetallic thermostats.
Either a two-pole terminal clip or a five-pole terminal strip is available for connecting to
the trip switch.
Example: TF/TH to a two-pole terminal strip
1b
2b
1b
2b
TF/TH
TF/TH
2xTF/TH / with
anti-condensation
heating
1b
2b
3b
4b
5b
1.TF/TH
1.TF/TH
2.TF/TH
2.TF/TH
The following illustration shows the connection of the motor protection with 2 TF PTC
thermistor sensors or TH bimetallic thermostats and Hx anti-condensation heating.
1b
2b
1b
2b
Hx
Hx
1b
2b
3b
4b
5b
1.TF/TH
1.TF/TH
2.TF/TH
2.TF/TH
153
Appendix
Wiring diagrams
10
The following figures show the connection of motor protection with TF PTC thermistor
sensors or TH bimetallic thermostats.
Depending on the version, an "x-pole" terminal strip is available for connection to the trip
switch.
Example: TF/TH to terminal strip
1.TF/ 1.TF/
1.TH 1.TH
154
10
1e
2e
3e
4e
5e
6e
7e
8e
9e
10e
+UB
(GY)
GND
(PK)
A(cos)
(BN)
A(cos)
(WH)
B(sin)
(YE)
B(sin)
(GN)
Appendix
Wiring diagrams
Connection via
M12 plug connector
10
A coding
female
A coding
male
Pin 1 : VB
Pin 2 : GND
Pin 3 : B(sin)
Pin 4 : +VB
Pin 3 : A
2
3
Pin 4 : A
7
8
6
4 5
Pin 5 : B
Pin 6 : B
Pin 7 : TF
Pin 8 : TF
The following figure shows the wiring for BG and BGE brake rectifiers for the AC-side
cut-off as well as the DC and AC-side cut-off.
DC
AC
AC
BGE
BG
BGE
BG
WH
4
RD
5
BU
WH
RD
[1]
[1]
BU
U AC
U AC
242604811
155
Appendix
Wiring diagrams
10
BSG
The following figure shows the DC 24 V connection of the BSG control unit
BSG
WH
5
BU
RD
[1]
- +
24V DC
242606475
[1] Brake coil
BUR
WARNING
Malfunction caused by incorrect connection for frequency operation.
The drive system might be damaged.
The following illustration shows the wiring for the BUR brake control
BGE
BG
RD
[4]
[1]
U~
(VAC )
WH
RD
BU
BU
[2]
BN / BK
[3]
BN / BK
[3]
242608139
[1] Brake coil
[2] UR11/UR15 voltage relay
UR 11 (42-150 V) = BN
UR 15 (150-500 V) = BK
156
Appendix
Wiring diagrams
10
The following figure shows the factory wiring for the BSR brake control
Example: Motor: AC 230 V / AC 400 V
Brake: AC 230 V
BGE
BG
BGE
BG
WH
RD
RD
RD
WH
[1]
[1]
BU
BU
RD
BU
BU
[2]
WH
[2]
WH
WH
W2
(T6)
U2
(T4)
V2
(T5)
U1
(T1)
V1
(T2)
W1
(T3)
L1
L2
L3
L1
WH
W2
(T6)
U2
(T4)
U1
(T1)
W1
V1 (T3)
(T2)
L2
V2
(T5)
L3
242599819
157
10
Appendix
Wiring diagrams
Factory set to in
wiring diagram
R76
The following figure shows the factory wiring for the BSR brake control
Example: Motor: AC 230 V / AC 460 V
Brake: AC 230 V
BGE
BG
1
WH
RD
[3]
BU
RD
BU
[1]
[4]
WH
WH
U2 (T4) V2 (T5)
W3 (T9) U3 (T7) V3 (T8)
U1 (T1) V1 (T2) W1 (T3)
[5]
W2
(T6)
L1
L2
L3
[2]
2319077003
158
Appendix
Wiring diagrams
10
The following figure shows the factory wiring for the BSR brake control
Example: Motor: AC 230 V / AC 460 V
Brake: AC 230 V
BGE
BG
1
WH
RD
[3]
BU
RD
BU
[1]
[4]
WH
(T5)
V2
(T4)
U2
WH
[5]
W2
(T6)
L1
L2
L3
[2]
2337824139
159
Appendix
Wiring diagrams
10
The following figure shows the wiring for the BMP3.1 brake rectifier for the AC-side cutoff as well as the DC and AC-side cut-off.
U AC
U AC
DC
AC
AC
BMP3.1
13
RD
[1]
14
WH
BMP3.1
13
15
BU
14
RD
15
WH BU
[1]
365750411
[1] Brake coil
160
Appendix
Wiring diagrams
10
The following figure shows the wiring of the V forced cooling fan for delta-Steinmetz connection for 1-phase operation
PE L1
U1
(T1)
N
V1
(T2)
W1
(T3)
W2
U2
(T4)
(T5)
U1
V1
(T1)
U2
V2
W2
(T4)
(T5)
(T6)
V2
(T6)
W1
(T2)
(T3)
N
523348491
connection
The following figure shows the wiring of the V forced cooling fan for connection.
PE L1
U1
(T1)
U2
(T4)
L2
V1
(T2)
V2
(T5)
L3
W1
(T3)
W2
(T6)
W2
(T4)
U1
(T1)
U2
(T5)
V1
(T2)
V2
(T6)
W1
(T3)
L1
L2
L3
523350155
connection
The following figure shows the wiring of the V forced cooling fan with connection.
PE L1
U1
(T1)
L2
V1
(T2)
L3
W1
(T3)
W2
U2
V2
(T4)
(T5)
(T6)
V1
W1
U1
(T1)
U2
V2
W2
(T4)
(T5)
(T6)
L1
(T2)
L2
(T3)
L3
523351819
161
Appendix
Wiring diagrams
10
DC 24 V connection
The following figure shows the wiring of the V forced cooling fan for DC 24 V.
A
BU
RD
[2]
M
=
[1]
B
+
DC 24 V
2393384075
[1]
[2]
A
B
Factory wiring
Customer
162
Appendix
Auxiliary terminals 1 and 2
10.2
10
[2]
[A]
[1]
[3]
[B]
[x]
3572208523
1) If auxiliary terminal 2 is not provided, you can install auxiliary terminal 1 in the same position.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[X]
[A]
[B]
Regardless of the terminal box position, auxiliary terminal 1 must always be mounted
parallel to the terminal board.
The terminal structure can vary depending on the terminal box design.
163
Address List
11
11
Address List
Germany
Headquarters
Production
Sales
Bruchsal
Bruchsal
Central
North
East
South
West
Electronics
164
Production
Sales
Service
Haguenau
SEW-USOCOME
48-54 route de Soufflenheim
B. P. 20185
F-67506 Haguenau Cedex
Tel. +33 3 88 73 67 00
Fax +33 3 88 73 66 00
http://www.usocome.com
sew@usocome.com
Production
Forbach
SEW-USOCOME
Zone industrielle
Technople Forbach Sud
B. P. 30269
F-57604 Forbach Cedex
Tel. +33 3 87 29 38 00
Assembly
Sales
Service
Bordeaux
SEW-USOCOME
Parc d'activits de Magellan
62 avenue de Magellan - B. P. 182
F-33607 Pessac Cedex
Tel. +33 5 57 26 39 00
Fax +33 5 57 26 39 09
Lyon
SEW-USOCOME
Parc d'affaires Roosevelt
Rue Jacques Tati
F-69120 Vaulx en Velin
Tel. +33 4 72 15 37 00
Fax +33 4 72 15 37 15
Address List
11
France
Nantes
SEW-USOCOME
Parc dactivits de la fort
4 rue des Fontenelles
F-44140 Le Bignon
Tel. +33 2 40 78 42 00
Fax +33 2 40 78 42 20
Paris
SEW-USOCOME
Zone industrielle
2 rue Denis Papin
F-77390 Verneuil I'Etang
Tel. +33 1 64 42 40 80
Fax +33 1 64 42 40 88
Alger
REDUCOM Sarl
16, rue des Frres Zaghnoune
Bellevue
16200 El Harrach Alger
Buenos Aires
Melbourne
Sydney
Wien
SEW-EURODRIVE Ges.m.b.H.
Richard-Strauss-Strasse 24
A-1230 Wien
Minsk
SEW-EURODRIVE BY
RybalkoStr. 26
BY-220033 Minsk
Assembly
Sales
Service
Brussels
SEW-EURODRIVE
Researchpark Haasrode 1060
Evenementenlaan 7
BE-3001 Leuven
Industrial Gears
SEW-EURODRIVE
Rue de Parc Industriel, 31
BE-6900 Marche-en-Famenne
Sao Paulo
Argentina
Assembly
Sales
Service
Australia
Assembly
Sales
Service
Austria
Assembly
Sales
Service
Belarus
Sales
Belgium
Brazil
Production
Sales
Service
165
Address List
11
Bulgaria
Sales
Sofia
BEVER-DRIVE GmbH
Bogdanovetz Str.1
BG-1606 Sofia
Douala
Electro-Services
Rue Drouot Akwa
B.P. 2024
Douala
Toronto
Vancouver
Montreal
Cameroon
Sales
Canada
Assembly
Sales
Service
Production
Assembly
Sales
Service
Tianjin
Assembly
Sales
Service
Suzhou
Guangzhou
Shenyang
Wuhan
Assembly
Sales
Service
China
166
Address List
11
China
Xi'An
Bogot
Zagreb
KOMPEKS d. o. o.
Zeleni dol 10
HR 10 000 Zagreb
Prague
SEW-EURODRIVE CZ S.R.O.
Business Centrum Praha
Lun 591
CZ-16000 Praha 6 - Vokovice
Copenhagen
SEW-EURODRIVEA/S
Geminivej 28-30
DK-2670 Greve
Cairo
Copam Egypt
for Engineering & Agencies
33 EI Hegaz ST, Heliopolis, Cairo
Tallin
ALAS-KUUL AS
Reti tee 4
EE-75301 Peetri kla, Rae vald, Harjumaa
Assembly
Sales
Service
Lahti
SEW-EURODRIVE OY
Vesimentie 4
FIN-15860 Hollola 2
Production
Assembly
Karkkila
Libreville
Croatia
Sales
Service
Czech Republic
Sales
Denmark
Assembly
Sales
Service
Egypt
Sales
Service
Estonia
Sales
Finland
Gabon
Sales
167
Address List
11
Great Britain
Assembly
Sales
Service
Normanton
SEW-EURODRIVE Ltd.
Beckbridge Industrial Estate
Normanton
West Yorkshire
WF6 1QR
Athens
Hong Kong
SEW-EURODRIVE LTD.
Unit No. 801-806, 8th Floor
Hong Leong Industrial Complex
No. 4, Wang Kwong Road
Kowloon, Hong Kong
Budapest
SEW-EURODRIVE Kft.
H-1037 Budapest
Kunigunda u. 18
Registered Office
Assembly
Sales
Service
Vadodara
Assembly
Sales
Service
Chennai
Vadodara
Dublin
Tel-Aviv
Greece
Sales
Service
Hong Kong
Assembly
Sales
Service
Hungary
Sales
Service
India
Ireland
Sales
Service
Israel
Sales
168
Address List
11
Italy
Assembly
Sales
Service
Solaro
Abidjan
SICA
Socit industrielle & commerciale pour
l'Afrique
165, Boulevard de Marseille
26 BP 1115 Abidjan 26
Tel. +225 21 25 79 44
Fax +225 21 25 88 28
sicamot@aviso.ci
Iwata
Almaty
"-"
., 348
050061 .
Riga
SIA Alas-Kuul
Katlakalna 11C
LV-1073 Riga
Sales
Beirut
Jordan
Kuwait
Saudi Arabia
Syria
Beirut
Alytus
UAB Irseva
Statybininku 106C
LT-63431 Alytus
Brussels
SEW Caron-Vector
Research park Haasrode
Evenementenlaan 7
BE-3001 Leuven
Johore
Ivory Coast
Sales
Japan
Assembly
Sales
Service
Kazakhstan
Sales
Latvia
Sales
Lebanon
Lithuania
Sales
Luxembourg
Assembly
Sales
Service
Malaysia
Assembly
Sales
Service
169
Address List
11
Mexico
Assembly
Sales
Service
Quretaro
SEW-EURODRIVE MEXICO SA DE CV
SEM-981118-M93
Tequisquiapan No. 102
Parque Industrial Quretaro
C.P. 76220
Quretaro, Mxico
Casablanca
Afit
Route DEl Jadida
KM 14 RP8
Province de Nouaceur
Commune Rurale de Bouskoura
MA 20300 Casablanca
Rotterdam
Auckland
Christchurch
Moss
SEW-EURODRIVE A/S
Solgaard skog 71
N-1599 Moss
Tel. +47 69 24 10 20
Fax +47 69 24 10 40
http://www.sew-eurodrive.no
sew@sew-eurodrive.no
Karachi
Lima
Lodz
Morocco
Sales
Netherlands
Assembly
Sales
Service
New Zealand
Assembly
Sales
Service
Norway
Assembly
Sales
Service
Pakistan
Sales
Peru
Assembly
Sales
Service
Poland
Assembly
Sales
Service
24 Hour Service
170
Address List
11
Portugal
Assembly
Sales
Service
Coimbra
SEW-EURODRIVE, LDA.
Apartado 15
P-3050-901 Mealhada
Bucharest
St. Petersburg
ZAO SEW-EURODRIVE
P.O. Box 36
195220 St. Petersburg Russia
Dakar
SENEMECA
Mcanique Gnrale
Km 8, Route de Rufisque
B.P. 3251, Dakar
Beograd
DIPAR d.o.o.
Ustanicka 128a
PC Koum, IV floor
SCG-11000 Beograd
Singapore
Bratislava
SEW-Eurodrive SK s.r.o.
Rybnin 40
SK-831 06 Bratislava
ilina
SEW-Eurodrive SK s.r.o.
Industry Park - PChZ
ulica M.R.tefnika 71
SK-010 01 ilina
Bansk Bystrica
SEW-Eurodrive SK s.r.o.
Rudlovsk cesta 85
SK-974 11 Bansk Bystrica
Koice
SEW-Eurodrive SK s.r.o.
Slovensk ulica 26
SK-040 01 Koice
Celje
Romania
Sales
Service
Russia
Assembly
Sales
Service
Senegal
Sales
Serbia
Sales
Singapore
Assembly
Sales
Service
Slovakia
Sales
Slovenia
Sales
Service
171
Address List
11
South Africa
Assembly
Sales
Service
Johannesburg
Cape Town
Durban
Nelspruit
Ansan-City
Busan
Bilbao
Jnkping
SEW-EURODRIVE AB
Gnejsvgen 6-8
S-55303 Jnkping
Box 3100 S-55003 Jnkping
Basel
Chonburi
South Korea
Assembly
Sales
Service
Spain
Assembly
Sales
Service
Sweden
Assembly
Sales
Service
Switzerland
Assembly
Sales
Service
Thailand
Assembly
Sales
Service
172
Address List
11
Tunisia
Sales
Tunis
Tel. +216 79 40 88 77
Fax +216 79 40 88 66
http://www.tms.com.tn
tms@tms.com.tn
Istanbul
SEW-EURODRIVE
Hareket Sistemleri San. ve Tic. Ltd. Sti.
Bagdat Cad. Koruma Cikmazi No. 3
TR-34846 Maltepe ISTANBUL
Dnepropetrovsk
SEW-EURODRIVE
Str. Rabochaja 23-B, Office 409
49008 Dnepropetrovsk
Sharjah
Production
Assembly
Sales
Service
Corporate Offices
Southeast
Region
SEW-EURODRIVE INC.
1295 Old Spartanburg Highway
P.O. Box 518
Lyman, S.C. 29365
Assembly
Sales
Service
Northeast
Region
SEW-EURODRIVE INC.
Pureland Ind. Complex
2107 High Hill Road, P.O. Box 481
Bridgeport, New Jersey 08014
Midwest Region
SEW-EURODRIVE INC.
2001 West Main Street
Troy, Ohio 45373
Southwest
Region
SEW-EURODRIVE INC.
3950 Platinum Way
Dallas, Texas 75237
Western Region
SEW-EURODRIVE INC.
30599 San Antonio St.
Hayward, CA 94544
Turkey
Assembly
Sales
Service
Ukraine
Sales
Service
USA
Valencia
173
Address List
11
Vietnam
Sales
Hanoi
174
Index
Index
A
Absolute encoder removal .....................................84
AB.., AD.., AM.., AK.., AC.., AS plug connectors ...58
Accessory equipment.......................................32, 63
Additional features
Overview ............................................................19
Add-on encoder .....................................................68
AG7. .......................................................................68
AH7. .......................................................................68
Air filter LF..............................................................32
Ambient conditions.................................................42
Hazardous radiation...........................................42
Ambient temperature .............................................42
Anti-condensation heating .....................................70
Assembly ...............................................................25
Encoder mounting adapter.................................29
Measuring nipple................................................34
XH.A encoder mounting adapter........................30
Assembly, conditions .............................................22
AS7. .......................................................................68
Auxiliary terminals, arrangement..........................164
Brake control....................................................36, 61
BG.................................................................... 156
BGE ................................................................. 156
BMP3.1 ............................................................161
BSG ................................................................. 156
BSR ................................................................. 158
BUR ................................................................. 156
Control cabinet.................................................137
Motor wiring space...........................................136
Brake control system ...........................................136
Brake malfunctions ..............................................148
Brake rectifier combinations ................................ 135
Brakemotor inspection
DR.315............................................................. 113
DR.71-DR.225 ...................................................95
Brakemotor structure
DR.160-DR.225 .................................................94
DR.315............................................................. 111
DR.71-DR.80 .....................................................92
DR.90-DR.132 ...................................................93
Braking torques............................................126, 128
Built-in encoder..............................................69, 155
B
Backstop ................................................................74
Bearing
Reinforced....................................................73, 79
Bearing lubrication .................................................78
BE05-BE2 ..............................................................97
BE1-BE11 ..............................................................97
BE120-BE122 ......................................................112
BE20 ......................................................................98
BE30-BE32 ............................................................98
Blocking direction
Change ..............................................................74
Brake
BE05-BE2 ..........................................................97
BE1-BE11 ..........................................................97
BE120-BE122 ..................................................112
BE20 ..................................................................98
BE30-BE32 ........................................................98
Braking torques................................................126
Work done........................................................126
Working air gap................................................126
Brake connection ...................................................61
C
Changing the brake spring
BE05-BE32 ...................................................... 103
BE120-BE122 ..................................................119
Changing the braking torque
BE05-BE32 ...................................................... 103
BE120-BE122 ..................................................119
Changing the magnet
BE05-BE32 ...................................................... 104
Characteristic safety values .................................144
Condensation drain holes ......................................25
Connecting the diagnostics unit .............................62
Connecting the motor ............................................43
AB.., AD.., AM.., AK.., AC.., AS plug
connectors .........................................................58
IS plug connector...............................................54
KCC terminal strip..............................................59
KC1 terminal strip ..............................................60
Terminal box .......................................... 44, 45, 46
Via plug connector .............................................54
Via terminal block ..............................................44
Via terminal strip ................................................59
175
Index
Connection
Cable..................................................................77
Encoder..............................................................69
Connection variants ...............................................20
Copyright..................................................................7
Corrosion protection...............................................79
Cover .....................................................................33
Customer service .................................................150
D
Delta connection
R13 ..................................................................151
R72 ..................................................................152
Design
DR.160-DR.225 with BE ....................................94
DR.90-DR.132 mit with ......................................93
Designated use ......................................................10
Disposal ...............................................................150
Drying the motor ....................................................23
DUB diagnostics unit..............................................62
DUB (Diagnostic Unit Brake)................................124
Dust........................................................................42
E
EG7. .......................................................................68
EH7. .......................................................................68
EI7........................................................................155
EI7..........................................................................69
Electrical connection ..............................................12
Electrical Installation ..............................................35
Embedded safety notes ...........................................6
EMC .......................................................................38
Encoder..................................................................19
AG7....................................................................68
AH7. ...................................................................68
EG7....................................................................68
EH7. ...................................................................68
EI7......................................................................69
ES7. ...................................................................68
Non-SEW encoder mounting .............................28
Technical data..................................................140
Encoder connection
...........................................................................69
Encoder mounting adapter.....................................29
Encoder removal ..............................................84, 85
EV.., AV.. and XV...............................................84
EV.., AV.. and XV...............................................84
Encoders................................................................68
AS7. ...................................................................68
Equipment, accessory .....................................32, 63
ES7. .......................................................................68
Explosion-proof motors ..........................................21
Extended storage...................................................23
F
Features, additional ...............................................19
Forced cooling fan V..............................................66
Frequency inverter operation.................................36
Functional safety..................................................144
G
Gas ........................................................................42
General safety notes................................................8
Grounding ..............................................................38
H
Hollow shaft encoder .............................................30
Hollow shaft encoder removal ...............................85
HR/HF manual brake release
Retrofit ...............................................................27
I
Improving the grounding ........................................38
Incremental encoder removal ................................84
EV.., AV.. and XV. .............................................84
Input elements, assembly ......................................26
Inspection ..............................................................76
DUB for function and wear monitoring............. 125
DUB for function monitoring............................. 124
DUB for wear monitoring .................................125
Inspection intervals ................................................77
Installation........................................................12, 25
Electrical ............................................................35
In damp locations or in the open........................26
Mechanical.........................................................22
Installation altitude .................................................42
Installation regulations ...........................................35
Insulation resistance ..............................................23
Intervals, inspection and maintenance ..................77
IS plug connector...................................................54
Isolation transformer ..............................................23
Isolation, reinforced ...............................................37
K
KCC terminal strip..................................................59
176
Index
N
Nameplate .............................................................18
Non-SEW encoder mounting .................................28
Notes
Designation in the documentation .......................6
O
Operating currents ...............................................129
Operation with a frequency inverter .......................36
Options ..................................................................19
Electrical ............................................................63
Mechanical.........................................................32
Other applicable documentation ............................11
P
Plug connector.......................................................54
AB.., AD.., AM.., AK.., AC.., AS .........................58
IS .......................................................................54
PT100 ....................................................................65
Pulse voltages .......................................................37
R
Reinforced bearing
.....................................................................73, 79
Relubrication ..........................................................79
Relubrication device ..............................................78
Re-lubrication periods............................................79
Removing the encoder............................... 80, 82, 83
EG7. and AG7. ..................................................82
EH7 and AH7.....................................................83
ES7. and AS7. ...................................................80
Removing the incremental encoder ...........80, 82, 83
EG7. and AG7. ..................................................82
EH7. and AH7....................................................83
ES7. and AS7. ...................................................80
Replacing the brake
DR.315............................................................. 121
DR.71-DR.80 ................................................... 106
DR.90-DR.225 .................................................107
Replacing the brake disk
BE05-BE32 ...................................................... 101
BE120-BE122 ..................................................117
Resistance measurement, brake .................133, 134
Resistors..............................................................132
Retrofitting HR/HF manual brake release ..............27
Rolling bearing types ...........................................138
Rotor designation "J" .............................................73
RS..........................................................................74
177
Index
178
Index
179
SEW-EURODRIVE
Driving the world
www.sew-eurodrive.com
Inductive sensor
rotational speed monitor
DBI10U-M30-AP4X2
Chrome-plated brass
Cable connection
Wiring diagram
Type
Ident-No.
DBI10U-M30-AP4X2
1582231
Hysteresis
Ambient temperature
0.0550 Hz
adjustable via potentiometer
315 %
10 mm
flush
(0,81 x Sn) mm
2%
10 %
15 %, -25 C v +70 C
315 %
-30+85 C
Operating voltage
Residual ripple
1065 VDC
10 % Uss
200 mA
20 mA
Residual current
Rated insulation voltage
Short-circuit protection
Voltage drop atIe
0.1 mA
0.5 kV
yes/ cyclic
1.8 V
yes/ complete
3-wire, NO contact, PNP
Design
Dimensions
Housing material
Material active face
End cap
Tightening torque of housing nut
Connection
Cable quality
Cable cross section
Edition 2011-10-22T11:07:46+02:00
Vibration resistance
Shock resistance
Protection class
3 x 0.34 mm
55 Hz (1 mm)
30 g (11 ms)
IP67
Operating voltage
Switching state
LED green
LED green / yellow / blue
1/3
Functional principle
Hans Turck GmbH & Co.KG D-45472 Mlheim an der Ruhr Witzlebenstrae 7 Tel. 0208 4952-0 Fax 0208 4952-264 more@turck.com www.turck.com
Inductive sensor
rotational speed monitor
DBI10U-M30-AP4X2
minimum distances
2xB
Distance W
3 x Sn
Distance T
3xB
Distance S
1.5 x B
Distance G
6 x Sn
30 mm
Edition 2011-10-22T11:07:46+02:00
Mounting instructions
Distance D
2/3
Hans Turck GmbH & Co.KG D-45472 Mlheim an der Ruhr Witzlebenstrae 7 Tel. 0208 4952-0 Fax 0208 4952-264 more@turck.com www.turck.com
Inductive sensor
rotational speed monitor
DBI10U-M30-AP4X2
Accessories
Type code
Ident-No.
Short text
BST-30B
6947216
Dimension drawing
terial: PA6
QM-30
6945103
Quick-mount bracket with dead-stop; material: Chrome-plated brass Male thread M36 x 1.5. Note: The switching distance of proximity switches can be reduced by the use of
quick-mount brackets.
MW-30
6945005
Mounting bracket for threaded barrel devices; material: Stainless steel A2 1.4301 (AISI 304)
BSS-30
6901319
Edition 2011-10-22T11:07:46+02:00
material: Polypropylene
3/3
Hans Turck GmbH & Co.KG D-45472 Mlheim an der Ruhr Witzlebenstrae 7 Tel. 0208 4952-0 Fax 0208 4952-264 more@turck.com www.turck.com
1
___________________
Introduction
2
___________________
Safety information
1PP6/7/9
3
___________________
Description
4
___________________
Preparing for use
Low-Voltage Motors
1LA5/6/7/9, 1LE1, 1LG4/6, 1LP7/9,
1MA6/7, 1MF6/7, 1MJ6/7, 1PC1/3,
1PP6/7/9
Operating Instructions
5
___________________
Assembly
6
___________________
Electrical connection
7
___________________
Commissioning
8
___________________
Operation
9
___________________
Maintenance
10
___________________
Spare parts
11
___________________
Disposal
A
___________________
Appendix
B
___________________
Technical data and drawings
12
___________________
Notes
06/2011
5 610 00000 02 000
Legal information
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the relevant information is not taken into account.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Trademarks
All names identified by are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Siemens AG
Industry Sector
Postfach 48 48
90026 NRNBERG
GERMANY
Table of contents
1
Introduction................................................................................................................................................ 9
1.1
1.2
Safety information.................................................................................................................................... 11
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
Description............................................................................................................................................... 15
3.1
3.1.1
3.2
Delivery ........................................................................................................................................16
3.3
3.4
3.4.1
3.4.2
3.4.3
3.4.3.1
3.4.3.2
3.4.3.3
3.4.4
3.4.5
3.4.6
3.4.7
3.4.8
Installation ....................................................................................................................................18
Machine design ............................................................................................................................18
Regulations ..................................................................................................................................18
Cooling and ventilation.................................................................................................................19
General ........................................................................................................................................19
Machines with a fan .....................................................................................................................20
Machines without a fan (optional) ................................................................................................21
Bearings .......................................................................................................................................22
Balancing .....................................................................................................................................22
Types of construction/method of installation................................................................................22
Degree of protection ....................................................................................................................25
Optional built-on and built-in accessories ....................................................................................26
Transport......................................................................................................................................27
4.2
Storage.........................................................................................................................................28
4.3
Assembly ................................................................................................................................................. 31
5.1
5.1.1
5.1.2
5.1.3
Installation ....................................................................................................................................31
Safety instructions........................................................................................................................31
Safety instructions: Explosion-proof machines ............................................................................31
Machine installation .....................................................................................................................32
Table of contents
5.1.4
5.1.4.1
5.1.5
5.1.6
5.1.6.1
5.1.7
Cooling ........................................................................................................................................ 33
Ventilation.................................................................................................................................... 33
Machines with type of construction IM B15, IM B9, IM V8 and IM V9 ........................................ 34
Balancing..................................................................................................................................... 35
Mounting and withdrawing output elements................................................................................ 36
Noise emission............................................................................................................................ 37
5.2
5.2.1
5.2.2
Electrical connection................................................................................................................................ 41
6.1
6.1.1
6.1.2
6.1.3
6.1.4
6.1.5
6.1.6
6.1.7
6.1.7.1
6.1.8
6.1.8.1
6.1.8.2
6.1.8.3
6.1.8.4
6.1.8.5
6.1.8.6
6.2
6.2.1
6.2.2
6.2.3
6.3
6.3.1
6.3.2
6.4
6.4.1
6.4.2
6.4.3
6.4.4
6.5
Final measures............................................................................................................................ 64
6.6
6.6.1
6.6.1.1
6.6.1.2
6.7
Commissioning ........................................................................................................................................ 69
7.1
7.1.1
Table of contents
7.2
7.3
Switching on.................................................................................................................................73
Operation................................................................................................................................................. 75
8.1
8.1.1
8.1.2
8.1.3
8.1.4
Safety instructions........................................................................................................................75
Safety instructions during operation ............................................................................................75
Safety instructions for cleaning ....................................................................................................77
Safety information for explosion-protected machines in operation..............................................77
Machines with textile fan covers ..................................................................................................78
8.2
Stoppages ....................................................................................................................................78
8.3
Fault tables...................................................................................................................................79
8.4
Deactivating .................................................................................................................................80
8.5
8.5.1
Class ............................................................................................................................................81
Zone 1 with type of protection Ex de II (Flameproof Enclosure "d" for the machine and
Increased Safety "e" for the terminal box) ...................................................................................81
Zone 1 with Ex e II type of protection (Increased Safety "e") ......................................................81
Zone 2 with type of protection Ex nA II (non-sparking)................................................................82
Zone 21 ........................................................................................................................................82
Zone 22 ........................................................................................................................................83
8.5.2
8.5.3
8.5.4
8.5.5
9
Maintenance ............................................................................................................................................ 85
9.1
9.1.1
9.1.2
9.1.3
9.2
9.2.1
9.2.2
9.2.3
9.2.4
Inspection.....................................................................................................................................87
General inspection specifications ................................................................................................87
Optional built-on accessories.......................................................................................................87
Initial inspection............................................................................................................................87
Main inspection ............................................................................................................................88
9.3
9.3.1
9.3.2
9.3.3
9.3.4
Maintenance.................................................................................................................................89
Maintenance intervals ..................................................................................................................89
Regreasing (optional)...................................................................................................................90
Cleaning .......................................................................................................................................90
Drain condensate.........................................................................................................................91
9.4
9.4.1
9.4.2
9.4.2.1
9.4.2.2
9.4.3
9.4.3.1
9.4.3.2
9.4.4
9.4.4.1
9.4.4.2
9.4.4.3
9.4.4.4
Table of contents
9.4.4.5
9.4.4.6
9.4.4.7
9.4.4.8
9.4.5
9.4.6
9.4.7
9.4.8
9.4.9
10
11
10.2
10.2.1
10.2.2
10.3
Disposal................................................................................................................................................. 109
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
Appendix................................................................................................................................................ 111
A.1
A.2
A.3
12
Reassembling fans...................................................................................................................... 97
Refitting the fan cover ................................................................................................................. 97
Refitting the canopy; incremental encoder under canopy........................................................... 97
Reassembly: Miscellaneous information..................................................................................... 98
Screw-type connections .............................................................................................................. 98
Electrical connections - Termincal board connections................................................................ 98
Cable glands ............................................................................................................................... 98
Terminal boxes, end shields, grounding conductors, sheet metal fan covers ............................ 99
Optional add-on units ................................................................................................................ 100
Table of contents
Introduction
1.1
1.2
Introduction
1.2 Information for the reader
10
Safety information
2.1
2.2
11
Safety information
2.3 Qualified personnel
4. Ground and short-circuit
5. Cover or isolate nearby components that are still live.
To energize the system, apply the measures in reverse order.
2.3
Qualified personnel
All work at the machine must be carried out by qualified personnel only. For the purpose of
this documentation, qualified personnel is taken to mean people who fulfill the following
requirements:
Through appropriate training and experience, they are able to recognize and avoid risks
and potential dangers in their particular field of activity.
They have been instructed to carry out work on the machine by the appropriate person
responsible.
2.4
12
Safety information
2.5 Safety instructions: Explosion-proof machines
WARNING
Hot surfaces
Electrical machines have hot surfaces.
Fatal or severe injuries and substantial material damage can occur if the required covers
are removed or if the machines are not handled, operated, or maintained properly.
Allow the machine to cool down before starting any work on it.
Only remove covers in compliance with the applicable regulations.
Operate the machines properly.
2.5
2.6
13
Safety information
2.7 Special conditions for explosion-proof machines
2.7
14
Description
3.1
Area of application
Overview
The three-phase machines of this series are used as industrial drives. They are designed for
a wide range of drive applications both for line operation as well as in conjunction with
frequency converters.
They are characterized by their high power density, extreme robustness, long service life
and outstanding reliability.
3.1.1
CE marking
Note
Use of machines without CE identification
Machines without
marking are intended for operation outside the European Economic
Area (EEA). Do not use any machines without CE mark within of the EEA!
15
Description
3.2 Delivery
3.2
Delivery
3.3
Rating plates
Rating plate
The rating plate shows the identification data and the most important technical data. The
data on the rating plate and the contractual agreements define the limits of proper usage.
16
Description
3.3 Rating plates
Item
General data
Description
Electrical data
Type of machine
31
50 Hz data
Machine type
32
60 Hz data
33
Standards
34
Winding connections
35
Frequency [Hz]
36
Country of origin
37
Production location
38
39
10
Regulations (optional)
Mechanical data
40
Efficiency class
41
Efficiency
11
Frame size
42
12
Type of construction
43
13
Degree of protection
44
14
45
15
Temperature class
46
16
47
17
48
18
19
Bearing sizes
20
21
(1)
(3)
(7/8)
(14)
(12)
(11)
(4/40)
(4/10)
(13)
(15)
(16)
(10)
(31/43)
(17/18/19/41/46)
(32/43)
(44/45/48)
(6/41/47)
(7)
(15)
(10)
(15)
(19)
(1)
(12)
(11)
(16)
(20)
(4)
(33) (34)
(14)
(18)
(13)
(17)
(21)
(12)
(36)
(3)
(13)
(14)
(37)
(38)
(39)
(31)
(9)
(2)
(11)
(35)
(41)
(32)
(42)
(31)
(32)
(47)
(5)
Figure 3-1
(48)
(6)
(7)
Rating plates
17
Description
3.4 Installation
3.4
Installation
3.4.1
Machine design
Machines of this series are self-ventilated low-voltage three-phase asynchronous drives with
a cylindrical shaft end and featherkey way. They can be supplied as single-speed machines
with different efficiency classes or as pole changing machines for several speeds.
In the case of machines with feet (IM B3 type of construction), the feet are cast or bolted on.
It is possible to change the feet bolted on the housing of the machine, e.g. to change the
position of the terminal box; however, only have this performed by an authorized retrofit
partner.
With the appropriate post working, ensure that the foot mounting surfaces are again on one
plane and parallel to the machine shaft, and shim when required. Professionally touch up
damaged painted surfaces.
3.4.2
Regulations
Machine design
The regulations and standards used as basis to design and test this machine are stamped
on the rating plate. The machine design basically complies with the following standards:
Table 3- 2
Feature
Standard
IEC / EN 60034-1
Degree of protection
IEC / EN 60034-5
Cooling
IEC / EN 60034-6
Type of construction
IEC / EN 60034-7
IEC / EN 60034-8
Noise emission
IEC / EN 60034-9
IEC / EN 60034-12
IEC / EN 60034-14
IEC / EN 60034-30
IEC 60038
18
Description
3.4 Installation
explosion-proof machines
Feature
Standard
IEC / EN 60079-0
IEC / EN 60079-1
IEC / EN 60079-7
IEC / EN 60079-14
IEC / EN 60079-15
IEC / EN 60079-19
IEC / EN 61241-0
IEC / EN 61241-1
3.4.3
3.4.3.1
General
RL94/9/EC
The machines of this series are three-phase asynchronous machines with a closed primary
(internal) cooling circuit and an open secondary cooling circuit (surface cooling). The surface
cooling varies depending on the version.
19
Description
3.4 Installation
3.4.3.2
20
Description
3.4 Installation
Forced ventilation (optional): Cooling method IC 416 in accordance with IEC/EN 60034-6
WARNING
Hot surfaces
Operating the machine without external fan results in overheating. This may result in
personal injury and material damage.
Never commission the machine without an external fan.
Cooling that does not depend on the speed is achieved by means of a separately driven fan
wheel (forced ventilation). Forced ventilation does not depend on the operating state of the
machine.
The fan wheel for the external flow of cooling air is powered by an independent module and
is enclosed by the fan cover.
3.4.3.3
Surface cooling by free convection: Type of cooling IC 410 in accordance with IEC / EN 60034-6
,&,&$$
Figure 3-2
IC410
21
Description
3.4 Installation
Surface cooling by relative movement of cooling air: Type of cooling IC 418 in accordance with IEC /
EN 60034-6
,&,&$$
Figure 3-3
3.4.4
IC418
Bearings
In order to support the machine shaft and maintain its position in the non-moving part of the
machine, only 2 rolling-contact bearings are used. One roller bearing performs the function
of a location bearing that transfers axial and radial forces from the rotating machine shaft to
the non-moving part of the machine. The second roller bearing is implemented as floating
and support bearing in order to allow thermal expansion inside the machine and transfer
radial forces.
The nominal (calculated) useful life of the bearings according to ISO 281 is at least 20,000
hours with utilization of the permissible radial/axial forces. However, the achievable useful
life of the bearings can be significantly longer in the case of lower forces (e.g. operation with
self-aligning couplings).
Avoid rigid couplings.
Roller bearings with permanent lubrication are maintenance-free. For bearings that can be
relubricated, observe the data on the rating plate or lubricant plate.
3.4.5
Balancing
The machines are balanced dynamically with a half featherkey (code "H") in accordance with
ISO 8821.
The balancing quality corresponds to vibration severity grade "A" for the complete machine;
vibration severity grade "B" is possible as an option.
3.4.6
22
Description
3.4 Installation
Table 3- 4
Type of construction
Basic type of
construction code
Graphics-Based
Representation
IM B3 (IM 1001)
Other methods of
installation
Graphics-Based
Representation
IM V5 (IM 1011)
IM V6 (IM 1031)
IM B6 (IM 1051)
IM B7 (IM 1061)
IM B8 (IM 1071)
Basic type of
construction code
Graphics-Based
Representation
IM B5 (IM 3001)
Other methods of
installation
Graphics-Based
Representation
IM V1 (IM 3011)
IM V3 (IM 3031)
Basic type of
construction code
Graphics-Based
Representation
Other methods of
installation
Graphics-Based
Representation
Basic type of
construction code
Graphics-Based
Representation
23
Description
3.4 Installation
Table 3- 5
Graphics-Based Representation
IM V5 (IM 1011)
IM V1 (IM 3011)
24
Description
3.4 Installation
3.4.7
Degree of protection
The degree of protection the machines feature is stated on the rating plate. They can be
installed in dusty or humid environments.
WARNING
Dangerous voltage
Condensation drain holes (optional)
Inserting objects into the condensation drain holes can damage the winding and can result
in death, serious injury and damage to property!
Note the following to maintain the degree of protection:
Switch off the machine so that it is in a no-voltage condition, before you open the
condensation drain holes.
Close the condensation drain holes (e.g. using T-plugs) before commissioning the
machine.
NOTICE
Storage
If the machines are used or stored outdoors, we recommend keeping them under a shelter
or an additional cover.
Avoid exposing them to direct, intense solar radiation, rain, snow, ice, or dust for
extended periods.
If necessary, please consult us or seek advice regarding technical issues.
Environmental requirements
The machines are suitable for operation in tropical climates.
Guide value for the standard version 60 % relative humidity at a coolant temperature (CT) of
40 C.
Ambient temperature: -20 C to +40 C
Installation altitude: 1000 m
Air with normal oxygen content, usually 21 % (V/V)
If the environmental requirements are different from the details listed here, then the values
on the rating plate will apply.
Machines intended for use in Zone 1 (type of protection Flameproof Enclosure "d" or
Increased Safety "e") or in Zone 2 (type of protection "n") are designed with IP 55 degree of
protection.
Machines intended for use in Zone 21 have IP 65 degree of protection. Machines intended
for use in Zone 22 have IP 55 degree of protection and can be used in dusty environments
such as grinders, silos, animal feed plants, and malthouses, as well as in certain areas of the
chemical industry.
25
Description
3.4 Installation
3.4.8
26
Transport
WARNING
Use lifting eyes
The machine must only be transported and lifted using the lifting eyes, in a position that is
appropriate for its type of construction. Otherwise, it could fall over or slip in the lifting
tackle.
This can result in death, serious injury, or material damage.
Use all the lifting eyes on the machine.
Any eyes that are screwed in must be tightly fastened.
Eyebolts must be screwed in right up to their supporting surface.
If necessary, use suitable, sufficiently-sized transport equipment such as lifting straps
(EN1492-1) and lashing straps (EN12195-2).
WARNING
Suspended transport
If several items of transport material are used for fastening, two straps must be able to
carry the whole load.
Use additional, suitable means of support for transport and during installation.
Secure the support equipment to prevent it from slipping.
Remove any transport locks before start-up and either keep them in a safe place or unlock
them. You can then use them again for transporting further items or you can apply them
again.
The machines are packed in different ways depending on how they are transported and their
size. If not otherwise contractually agreed, the packaging corresponds to the packing
guidelines according to ISPM (International Standards for Phytosanitary Measures).
Comply with the images shown on the packaging. Their meaning is as follows:
Up
Fragile
goods
Protect
against
moisture
Protect
against
heat
Center of
gravity
Hand hooks
forbidden
Attach
here
27
4.2
Storage
Storing outdoors
Choose a dry storage location which is safe from flooding and free from vibration. Repair any
damage to the packaging before putting the equipment into storage if this is necessary to
ensure proper storage conditions. In order to ensure protection against ground moisture,
locate machines, equipment and crates on pallets, wooden beams or foundations. Prevent
equipment from sinking into the ground. Do not impede air circulation under the stored items.
Covers or tarpaulins used to protect the equipment against the weather must not come into
contact with the surfaces of the equipment. Use wooden spacer elements to ensure that air
can circulate freely around the equipment.
CAUTION
Take all appropriate precautions under extreme climatic conditions, e.g. salt-laden and/or
dusty, moist/humid atmospheres.
Storing indoors
The storage rooms must provide protection against extreme weather conditions. They must
be dry, free from dust, frost and vibration and well ventilated.
Storage time
Turn the shafts 1x every year to avoid bearing brinelling. Prolonged storage periods reduce
the useful life of the bearing grease (aging).
Open bearings
For open bearings e.g. 1Z, check the state of the bearing grease over 12 months.
Replace the grease if it can be identified that the grease has lost oil content or has
become dirty (ingress of condensation leads to consistency changes of the grease).
Closed bearings
For closed bearings, replace the DE and NDE bearings after a storage time of 48 months
28
4.3
Electromagnetic compatibility
NOTICE
If the torque levels are very unequal (e.g. when a reciprocating compressor is being driven),
a non-sinusoidal machine current will be induced whose harmonics can have an
impermissible effect on the supply system and cause impermissible interference emissions
as a result.
NOTICE
Converter
If operated with a frequency converter, the emitted interference varies in strength,
depending on the design of the converter (type, interference suppression measures,
manufacturer).
Prevent the limit values stipulated by EN 61000-6-3 for the drive system (consisting of
the machine and converter) from being exceeded.
You must observe the EMC information from the manufacturer of the converter.
The most effective method of shielding is to conductively connect a shielded machine
supply cable to the metal terminal box of the machine (with a metal screw connection)
over a large surface area.
On machines with integrated sensors (e.g. PTC thermistors), disturbance voltages
caused by the converter may occur on the sensor cable.
When used in accordance with their intended purpose and operated on an electrical supply
system with characteristics in accordance with EN 50160, the enclosed motors (IP 55 and
higher) comply with the requirements of the current guidelines for electromagnetic
compatibility.
Immunity to interference
The machines fulfill the requirements relating to interference immunity in conformance with
EN 61000-6-2. If machines with integrated sensors (e.g. PTC thermistors) are used, the
operating company must ensure sufficient interference immunity by selecting a suitable
sensor signal lead (possibly with shielding, connected in the same way as the machine
feeder cable) and a suitable evaluation unit.
When operating the machines from a converter at speeds higher than the rated speed, then
the mechanical speed limits must be carefully observed (safe operating speed IEC / EN
60034-1).
29
30
Assembly
5.1
Installation
5.1.1
Safety instructions
WARNING
Hot surfaces
Electrical machines have hot surfaces.
Fatal or severe injuries and substantial material damage can occur if the required covers
are removed or if the machines are not handled, operated, or maintained properly.
Allow the machine to cool down before starting any work on it.
Only remove covers in compliance with the applicable regulations.
Operate the machines properly.
It must be ensured that parts (cables etc.) do not come into contact with the machine
enclosure.
CAUTION
Before start-up, please check that
the customer has set the correct direction of rotation of the machine - e.g. by decoupling
from the driven machine - by taking appropriate measures!
there are no temperature-sensitive parts (cables etc.), which are in contact with the
machine enclosure.
condensation drain holes are always located at the lowest point of the motor!
NOTICE
Please note the technical data on the rating plates on the machine enclosure.
5.1.2
31
Assembly
5.1 Installation
5.1.3
Machine installation
General
NOTICE
After installing, tighten the eyebolts or remove them!
Note
Do not use mounted components (e.g. rotary pulse encoder) to help lift the motor!
For vertical installation, use all of the eyebolts provided and when necessary, hoisting
straps (DIN EN 1492-1) and/or lashing straps (DIN EN 12195-2) to stabilize the position
of the motor.
Prevent foreign bodies from falling into the fan cover! For vertical machine installation
with the shaft end facing downwards, attach a protective canopy.
If the shaft extension is facing upwards, users must prevent liquid from flowing along the
shaft and entering the motor!
Clean bare metal surfaces with anti-corrosion agent using white spirit to ensure proper
installation and / or machine mounting!
Do not obstruct the ventilation! Do not draw off the discharged air directly also from
adjacent equipment!
Avoid exposing them to direct, intense solar radiation, rain, snow, ice, or also dust for
extended periods. Attach a covering structure or an additional cover when using or
storing outdoors.
Do not exceed the permissible axial and radial forces!
Only use explosion-protected machines in appropriate areas in accordance with directive
1999/92/EG .
If the certificate is supplemented by an X, observe the special conditions listed in the EC
type examination certificate. Auto-Hotspot
When installing electrical systems in hazardous zones, carefully observe EN 60079-14
and the corresponding country regulations.
The machine temperature class specified on the rating plate must be equal to or greater
than the temperature class of any combustible gases that may develop.
See also
Special conditions for explosion-proof machines (Page 14)
32
Assembly
5.1 Installation
5.1.4
Cooling
5.1.4.1
Ventilation
CAUTION
Ventilation
Do not obstruct ventilation.
Prevent the air expelled by neighboring equipment from being immediately sucked in
again.
On the vertical type of machine construction with air intake from above, protect the air
inlets from the ingress of foreign bodies and water.
If the shaft extension is facing upwards, liquid must be prevented from entering by
moving along the shaft.
Table 5- 1
Air guidance
Incorrect
Correct
[
33
Assembly
5.1 Installation
Incorrect
Correct
The minimum dimension "x" for the distance between neighboring modules
Table 5- 2
5.1.5
X
mm
63 ... 71
15
80 ... 100
20
112
25
132
30
160
40
45
90
100
110
34
Assembly
5.1 Installation
These machines do not have their own bearing system for the machine shaft at the drive end
(DE). The machine shaft is accepted by the (hollow) shaft or coupling of the plant or driven
machine.
Using the centering flange, the machine is aligned with respect to enclosures, flanges or
driven machines.
Note that the temperature of the machine and machine shaft increases during operation. The
thermal expansion of the machine shaft must be compensated by the customer in the form of
suitable measures.
Use the spring washers provided to locate the NDE bearing without any play.
5.1.6
Balancing
CAUTION
Safety precautions
The general touch protection measures for drive output elements must be observed.
Output elements may only be attached or withdrawn using the correct equipment.
The feather keys are only secured against falling out during shipping. If you commission
a machine without an output element, the feather keys must be secured to prevent them
from being thrown out.
The rotors are balanced dynamically. The balancing quality corresponds to vibration severity
grade "A" for the complete machine as standard. The optional vibration severity grade "B" is
indicated on the rating plate.
The declaration regarding the type of featherkey for balancing is generally marked on the
rating plate and optionally on the face of the shaft end.
Designation:
As a standard measure, balancing is carried out dynamically with a half featherkey (code
"H") in accordance with ISO 8821.
"F" means balancing with a whole featherkey (optional version).
"N" means balancing without a featherkey (optional version).
35
Assembly
5.1 Installation
The featherkey declaration on the shaft and transmission element must indicate the correct
type of balancing in each case and must be correctly mounted.
The balancing quality corresponds to vibration severity grade "A" for the complete machine;
vibration severity grade "B" is possible as an option, i.e. in order to ensure the desired
balancing quality, it must be ensured that the featherkey declarations on the hub and
machine shaft complement each other in the case of a shorter or longer transmission
element.
Note
Measures conforming to ISO 10816 must be taken in order to compensate any offset
between electrical machines and driven machines.
The foundation must be designed according to DIN 4024.
5.1.6.1
36
Assembly
5.2 Alignment and fastening
Note
When mounting output elements (coupling, gear wheel, belt pulley etc. ) use the thread at
the shaft end and - if possible - heat up the output elements as required.
Use a suitable device when withdrawing output elements.
Do not apply any blows when mounting and withdrawing the output element (e.g. with
hammer or similar).
Transfer no more than the radial or axial forces specified in the catalog to the machine
bearings via the shaft extension.
5.1.7
Noise emission
NOTICE
When the noise that is emitted at workplaces of the personnel responsible for operating the
equipment is assessed, it must be borne in mind that the A-weighted sound pressure level,
measured in accordance with ISO 1680, namely 70 dB(A), is not exceeded if the threephase machines are operated with the rated output.
5.2
General
When aligning and fastening the machine, please bear the following in mind:
The machine must be level.
Feet and flanges must be fastened securely.
Alignment must be precise in the case of direct coupling.
Fastening surfaces must be clean
Look out for any damage to paint; this must be rectified immediately and correctly.
37
Assembly
5.2 Alignment and fastening
Look out for traces of anti-corrosion protection agents; these must be removed using
mineral turpentine.
Look out for installation-related resonances with the rotating frequency and double line
frequency; these must be prevented.
Listen for unusual noises when turning the rotor manually.
Check the direction of rotation with the machine decoupled.
Avoid using rigid coupling measures.
Measures
The following measures are required in order to compensate any radial offset at the coupling
and to horizontally adjust the electrical machine with respect to the driven load:
Vertical positioning.
When vertically positioning the machine, place thin metal shins under the mounting feet in
order to avoid tensioning and deforming the machine. The number of shims should be
kept as low as possible i.e. only stack a few shims.
Horizontal positioning
To position the machine horizontally, push it sideways on the foundation and ensure that
the axial position is maintained (angularity error).
When positioning the motor, ensure that a uniform axial gap is maintained around the
coupling.
Smooth running
Stable, vibration-free design of the foundations in accordance with DIN 4024 and precise
alignment of the coupling, as well as a well-balanced output element (coupling, belt
pulleys, fans, etc.), are prerequisites for smooth running with low vibration levels.
Complete balancing of the machine with the output element may be necessary.
For details and evaluation criteria, refer to ISO 10816.
Foot/flange mounting
Use thread sizes specified in EN 50347 for mounting the machine to foundations or to
machine flanges. Attach the machine at four foot or flange holes in a rectangular
configuration with respect to one another. The customer is responsible for selecting the
strength of the fixing elements.
For the fixing elements up to and including frame size 160, property class 5.6 or higher is
recommended, from frame size 180, property class 8.8 or higher.
For IM B14 flanges, select the correct screw length.
Note
Only use authorized retrofit partners to change over the mounting feet bolted to the
machine frame, e.g. in order to change the position of the terminal box.
In order to prevent the machine from being deformed, ensure that the mounting feet
surfaces are located in one plane and parallel to the machine shaft by post working or by
using shims.
38
Assembly
5.2 Alignment and fastening
5.2.1
5.2.2
Flatness
mm
132
0.10
160
0.15
180
0.20
Type of feet
1MA6/1MJ6 FS 180M/L
NOTICE
Maintain the standardized foot dimensions with type of construction IM B3 according to EN
50347!
39
Assembly
5.2 Alignment and fastening
40
Electrical connection
6.1
6.1.1
General
WARNING
Note the following safety information before connecting-up the machine:
Only qualified and trained personnel should carry out work on the machine while it is
stationary.
Disconnect the machine from the power supply and take measures to prevent it being
reconnected. This also applies to auxiliary circuits, e.g. anti-condensation heating.
Check that the machine really is in a no-voltage condition.
Establish a safe protective conductor connection before starting any work.
If the incoming power supply system displays any deviations from the rated values in
terms of voltage, frequency, curve form or symmetry, such deviations will increase the
temperature and influence electromagnetic compatibility.
WARNING
Line supply with non-grounded neutral point
Operating the machine on a line supply system with a non-grounded neutral point is only
permitted over short time intervals that occur rarely, e.g. the time leading to a fault being
eliminated (ground fault of a cable, EN 60034-1).
Observe the information in IEC / EN 60034-1 (VDE 0530-1) regarding operation at the limits
of the A zones (5 % voltage difference or 2 % frequency difference) and the B zones,
especially in respect of temperature increase and deviation of the operating data from the
rated data on the rating plate. Never exceed the specified limits!
Connect up so that a permanently safe electrical connection is guaranteed (no protruding
wire ends); use the assigned cable-end fittings (e.g. cable lugs, end sleeves).
Connect up the line supply voltage and arranged the disconnecting link in accordance with
the circuit diagram provided in the terminal box.
Select the connecting cables in accordance with DIN VDE 0100 and in accordance with the
rated current and the installation-specific conditions (e.g. ambient temperature, routing
method etc. according to DIN VDE 0298 and/or IEC/EN 60204-1).
The technical specifications stipulate the following that have to be taken into account with
respect to the motor connection:
41
Electrical connection
6.1 Connection of the machine
Direction of rotation.
The number and arrangement of the terminal boxes.
The circuit and connection of the machine winding.
The following features make this type of electrical connection different from that for standard
machines:
Maintain the area A in IEC/EN 60034-1 (VDE 0530-1) (5 % voltage or 2 % frequency
deviation, waveform, line supply symmetry) so that the temperature rise remains within
the permissible limits.
Larger deviations from the rated data may result in electrical machines heating up to
impermissible levels. This information must be specified on the rating plate. Under no
circumstances exceed the limits!
Protect every machine with type of protection increased safety "e" in accordance with EN
60079-14 against an inadmissible temperature rise using a current-dependent, delayed
circuit breaker with phase failure protection and asymmetry detection corresponding to
EN 60947 or using an equivalent device in all phases.
For machines with type of protection increased safety "e", select the overcurrent device
with current-dependent delayed trip so that the tripping time, which should be taken from
the characteristic of the switch for the ratio IA / IN of the machine to be protected, is no
longer than the safe-locked rotor time tE. Take the ratio IA / IN as well as the safe-locked
rotor time tE from the rating plate. Set the protective device to the rated current. Use a
certified tripping unit in accordance with RL 94/9/EC.
For machines with increased safety "e" type of protection, in the event of a locked rotor
the protective device must disconnect within the tE time specified for the relevant
temperature class. Protect electrical machines for heavy duty starting (acceleration time >
1.7 x tE time) according to the specifications of the EC-type examination certificate using
a starting monitoring function.
Direct monitoring of the winding temperature is permissible as a means of thermal
machine protection, provided that this is certified and specified on the rating plate.
With pole-changing machines, separate, interlocked protective devices are required for
each speed step. Devices with an EC-type examination certificate are recommended.
42
Electrical connection
6.1 Connection of the machine
6.1.2
Terminal designations
The following definitions apply in principle to the terminal designations of three-phase
machines in accordance with DIN VDE 0530 Part 8 or IEC 60034-8:
Table 6- 1
1
Index showing the start (1) / end (2) or tapping point of the winding (if there is
more than one connection per winding)
x
6.1.3
Designation
Direction of rotation
The standard motors are suitable for clockwise and counter-clockwise rotation.
Connection of the power cables in the phase sequence L1, L2, L3 to U, V, W results in
clockwise rotation (looking at the DE shaft end on the drive side). If two of the connections
are interchanged then the resulting direction of rotation is counter-clockwise (e.g. L1, L2, L3
at V, U, W).
In the case of machines intended for only one direction of rotation, the defined direction of
rotation e.g. for machines with an axial fan, is marked by a direction arrow on the machine.
6.1.4
43
Electrical connection
6.1 Connection of the machine
6.1.5
6.1.6
44
Electrical connection
6.1 Connection of the machine
6.1.7
Cable glands
Nut
O ring
Cable glands with reductions and (sheet metal) nuts (EN 50262)
6.1.7.1
Nut
O ring
O ring
Mounting position of metal-sheet
nuts
Cable glands with connecting thread in the terminal box (EN 50262)
O ring
45
Electrical connection
6.1 Connection of the machine
6.1.8
Terminal box
6.1.8.1
General
DANGER
Dangerous voltage
Electric machines contain hazardous voltages.
If the machine is not de-energized and brought into a no-voltage condition, death or serious
injury will occur.
When work is carried out on the machine with the terminal box open, it must not be
electrically connected!
CAUTION
Damage to property
Note the following information to avoid damage to the terminal box.
Make sure that the components inside the terminal box e.g. terminal board and cable
connections) are not damaged!
It must be ensured that there are no foreign bodies, dirt or moisture in the terminal box.
Cable entries into the terminal box according to DIN 42925.
Close any additional open cable entries with O-rings or suitable flat gaskets, the terminal
box itself must be sealed so that it is dust and water tight using the original seal.
Please observe the tightening torques for cable glands and other screws.
When performing a test run, secure the feather keys without output elements.
NOTICE
The terminal box must be sealed so that dust and water cannot enter.
Frame sizes 80 to 90
WARNING
Dangerous voltage
Loosening the safety torx screw can result in death, serious injury or material damage!
Do not loosen the safety torx screw with respect to the center terminal, as this ensures a
conductive connection between the grounding conductor and frame!
CAUTION
Serious damage to the machine
Failure to observe these measures will result in serious damage to the machine!
Do not rotate the terminal box unless the connection cables have not yet been laid.
If you release the safety torx screw to both sides of the outer connecting terminals, this
can destroy the machine!
Remove the three large snap hooks on the terminal board before rotating the the
terminal box. Keep the snap hooks pressed while rotating the terminal box and use a
screwdriver to re-engage when finished.
1LA5/6/7/9, 1LE1, 1LG4/6, 1LP7/9, 1MA6/7, 1MF6/7, 1MJ6/7, 1PC1/3, 1PP6/7/9
46
Electrical connection
6.1 Connection of the machine
6.1.8.2
Versions
Standard design
It is possible to turn the top side of a machine terminal box 4 x 90 degrees (if screwed on).
The terminal box can be turned 4x90 degrees on the terminal base of the machine's housing
in the case of a terminal board with 6 terminal studs (standard design).
Frame sizes 80 to 90
For machines with frame sizes 80 to 90, it is possible to rotate the terminal box continuously
through 360 degrees.
Installation instructions
1. Press the three large snap hooks over the flange of the terminal box towards the
inside.
2. Hold the snap hooks pressed inwards, detach the terminal box, raise it slightly and
rotate it to the required POSITION. Observe the arrow for the position of the terminal box
.
3. Press the terminal box lightly towards the machine housing. Use a screwdriver to allow
the large snap hooks to engage over the flange of the terminal box.
Flange
Terminal box positioner
Snap hooks
Safety Torx screws
47
Electrical connection
6.1 Connection of the machine
CAUTION
Arcing at the optional terminal board can destroy the machine
Failure to observe this information can result in destruction of the machine as a result of
arcing.
To change the operating mode, always press the jumper fully into the base of the slot and
use the red locking lever to ensure that it is engaged.
Installation instructions
1. Open the red locking lever and remove the jumper from the slot.
2. Release the snap hook on the compartment and remove the jumper .
3. Press the jumper fully into the base of the slot and engage the locking lever at its end
position.
4. Press the jumper into the compartment and allow the snap hooks to re-engage at the
compartment.
48
Electrical connection
6.1 Connection of the machine
Explosion-protected machines (with the exception of machines for Zone 22) are equipped
with terminal boxes with type of protection increased safety "e".
For 1MJ machines, terminal boxes with type of protection flameproof enclosure "d" with
explosion group IIC are available as an option.
Please note in this regard design, connection options and spare parts.
Note the explosion protection information designated with
6.1.8.3
49
Electrical connection
6.1 Connection of the machine
6.1.8.4
Figure 6-1
Figure 6-2
50
Electrical connection
6.1 Connection of the machine
The temperature sensor / anti-condensation heater is connected in the terminal box.
Table 6- 2
Aluminum
Cast iron
Flat-head screwdriver
Sensor cable
Tension spring
51
Electrical connection
6.1 Connection of the machine
6.1.8.5
Cable entry
Knockout openings
NOTICE
Knockout openings
Knockout openings in the terminal box must be knocked out using appropriate methods.
Take care not to damage the terminal box or its interior components (the terminal board,
cable connections, and so on).
52
Electrical connection
6.1 Connection of the machine
6.1.8.6
71 ... 90
1MJ6
71 ... 90
1MJ6
1LA6
1MA6
1MJ6
1MJ6
160
1LA6
1MA6
160M/L
1MJ6
160
1MJ6
180
1MA6
1MJ6
180
1MJ6
180
1LG4
1LG6
200
1MA6
1MJ6
200
1MJ6
Type of protection/Zone
Standard thread
Size
Number
M 25x1.5
M 16x1.5
2
1
M 25x1.5
Number
M 20x1.5
M 32x1.5
M 16x1.5
M 32x1.5
M 16x1.5
2
1
M 20x1.5
M 32x1.5
M 40x1.5
M 16x1.5
M 40x1.5
M 16x1.5
M 40x1.5
M 20x1.5
M 40x1.5
M 16x1.5
M 40x1.5
M 20x1.5
M 40x1.5
M 20x1.5
M 50x1.5
M 16x1.5
M 50x1.5
M 20x1.5
53
Electrical connection
6.1 Connection of the machine
Frame size
(BG)
200
225
Type
1LG4
1LG6
1LG4
1LG6
1MA6
1MJ7
1LG4
1LG6
1MA6
1MJ7
Type of protection/Zone
Standard thread
M 50x1.5
M 20x1.5
M 50x1.5
M 20x1.5
M63 x 1.5
M 20x1.5
Zone 22
Increased safety "e"
Non sparking "n"
Zone 21
Zone 22
Increased safety "e"
Non sparking "n"
Zone 21
Zone 22
54
Electrical connection
6.1 Connection of the machine
Table 6- 4
Frame size
(BG)
Type
Type of protection/Zone
Standard thread
Size
63 ... 90
1LA7
1LA9
1MA7
71 ... 90
1MJ6
1LA7
1LA9
1MA7
1MJ6
160
1LA7
1LA9
1MA7
160M
1MJ6
180
1LA5
180
1LG4
1LG6
180
1MA6
1MJ6
1LA5
200
1MA6
1MJ6
200
1LG4
1LG6
225
1LG4
1LG6
1MA6
Additional threads
with mounting
parts
Number Size
Number
M 16 x 1.5
M 25 x 1.5
1
1
M 25x1.5
M 32x1.5
M 32x1.5
M 40x1.5
M 40x1.5
Zone 22
Increased safety "e"
Zone 21
M 16x1.5
M 16x1.5
M 16x1.5
M 40x1.5
M 16x1.5
M 40x1.5
M 20x1.5
M 40x1.5
M 16x1.5
M 50x1.5
M 16x1.5
M 50x1.5
M 16x1.5
M 50x1.5
M 20x1.5
M 50x1.5
M 20x1.5
55
Electrical connection
6.2 Tightening torques
6.2
Tightening torques
6.2.1
Table 6- 5
M 3,5
M4
M5
M6
M8
M 10
M 12
M 16
min
0,8
0,8
1,8
2,7
5,5
14
27
Max.
1,2
1,2
2,5
13
20
40
Nm
6.2.2
Cable glands
NOTICE
Take care not to damage the cable jacket.
Tightening torques must be adapted to suit the type of cable jacket material in use.
You should refer to the table in order to find the correct tightening torque for any metal and
plastic cable glands that are to be mounted directly on the machine, as well as for any other
screw-type connections (such as adapters).
Table 6- 6
Plastic
10%
Nm
10%
Nm
Clamping range in mm
Cord
mm
Standard
-30 C ... 100 C
Ex
-30 C ... 90 C
Ex
-60 C ... 105 C
M 12 x 1,5
1,5
M 16 x 1,5
10
M 20 x 1,5
12
M 25 x 1,5
M 32 x 1,5
18
6
M 40 x 1,5
M 50 x 1,5
M 63 x 1,5
20
O ring
The cable glands must have an EC-type examination certificate and be certified for the
respective hazardous zone.
56
Electrical connection
6.2 Tightening torques
Any openings that are not being used must be sealed using using the appropriate
certified plugs.
Please observe the manufacturer's specifications when fitting cable glands.
6.2.3
Terminal boxes, end shields, grounding conductors, sheet metal fan covers
Note
The specified tightening torques are applicable unless other values are indicated.
Table 6- 7
Tightening torques for screws on the terminal box, end shields, screw-type grounding conductor connections
Thread
M4
M5
M6
M8
M 10
M 12
M 16
M20
min
3.5
16
28
46
110
225
max
24
42
70
165
340
Nm
Table 6- 8 Tightening torques for self-tapping screws on the terminal box, end shields, screw-type grounding
conductor connections, sheet metal fan covers
Thread
M4
M5
M6
min
7,5
12,5
Max.
9,5
15,5
Nm
57
Electrical connection
6.3 Conductor connection
6.3
Conductor connection
6.3.1
Table 6- 10
56 ... 90
1,5
2.5 with cable lug
4,0
132
6,0
16,0
200
25,0
225
120,0
315
240,0
Max. conductor connection for explosion-proof machines (with the exception of Zone 22
and 1MJ) and VIK standard version
Frame size
(BG)
56 ... 112
4,0
132
6,0
160
16,0
180
10,0
16,0
50,0
120,0
315
240,0
1LA5/6/7/9, 1LE1, 1LG4/6, 1LP7/9, 1MA6/7, 1MF6/7, 1MJ6/7, 1PC1/3, 1PP6/7/9
58
Electrical connection
6.3 Conductor connection
Table 6- 11
6.3.2
71 ... 80
4,0
90 ... 160 M
6,0
160 L
16,0
180
25,0
50,0
120,0
315
240,0
Type of connection
If a connection is made with a DIN cable lug, then this must be angled downwards. DIN 46 234
25 mm 2
10 mm 2
Connection of two conductors of approximately the same thickness with terminal clamp.
25 mm 2
Link rail
Power supply cord
Motor connection cable
Cover washer
59
Electrical connection
6.3 Conductor connection
If a connection is made with a DIN cable lug, the latter must be angled downwards.
10 mm 2
1MA618.
35 mm 2
1MA620.
25 mm 2
25 mm 2
2,5 25 mm 2
10 95
mm 2
25 135
mm 2
1MA631.
50 300 mm 2
1MA631. + L00
16 mm 2
35 mm 2
70
mm 2
1MA631.
mm 2
1MA631. + L00
120
16 50 mm 2
50 120
mm 2
95 240
mm 2
120 400 mm 2
1MA631.
1MA631. + L00
60
Electrical connection
6.3 Conductor connection
Connecting terminal
0
1P
0
1P
2,5 ... 25 mm 2
1MJ618.
2,5 ... 25 mm 2
1MJ62. /
1MJ722.
10 ... 95 mm 2
25 ... 135 mm 2
1MJ731.
16 mm 2
1MJ62. /
1MJ722.
35 mm 2
0
1P
70
01P
01P
01P
01P
01P
01P
mm 2
1MJ731.
16 ... 50 mm 2
1MJ62. /
1MJ722.
50 ... 120 mm 2
95 ... 240 mm 2
1MJ731.
Cable lugs DIN 46237 with insulating sleeve (round and open)
Rigid cable (insulation removed at ends 8 mm)
End sleeves DIN 46228 8 mm
If air gaps 5.5 mm (up to 690 V) are observed between non-insulated components, you can also use
alternative connection elements without insulating sleeve, for example cable lugs acc. to DIN 46234 .
61
Electrical connection
6.4 Connecting the ground conductor
6.4
6.4.1
6.4.2
Type of connection
10 mm 2
Where a connection is made using a DIN cable lug under the external grounding bracket. DIN 46 234
25 mm 2
External grounding
... 25 mm 2
... 35 mm 2
1MJ6160 L
',1
62
Electrical connection
6.4 Connecting the ground conductor
01P
01P
... 35 mm 2
1MJ618.
... 50 mm 2
1MJ620.
01P
01P
',1
6.4.3
S 16
mm2
16 < S 35
16
S > 35
0.5 S
63
Electrical connection
6.5 Final measures
6.4.4
Frame size
(BG)
63 ... 90
M3.5 / M4
M5
M6
M8
2x M6
2x M8
Table 6- 16
6.5
Frame size
(BG)
71 ... 180
2x M6
2x M8
Final measures
Before closing the terminal box/terminal base of the machine enclosure, check the following:
Establish the electrical connections in the terminal box in accordance with the details in
the sections above and tighten with the correct torque.
The clearances between non-insulated parts have been maintained:
5.5 mm to 690 V, 8 mm to 1000 V.
Avoid protruding wire ends!
In order not to damage the cable insulation, freely arrange the connecting cables.
Connect the machine corresponding to the specified direction of rotation.
Keep the inside of the terminal box clean and free from trimmed-off ends of wire.
Ensure that all seals and sealing surfaces are undamaged and clean.
Correctly and professionally close unused openings in the terminal boxes.
The pressure relief device is undamaged (depending on the type of terminal box, this
involves either cast-in slots or an overpressure diaphragm). Only repair damage after
prior consultation with the person responsible for the safety of the equipment and use
only original parts.
64
Electrical connection
6.6 Connection of optional add-on units
Before closing the terminal box, check that
the air clearances for explosion-protected machines (with the exception of machines for
Zone 22) between non-insulated parts are maintained: 10 mm to 690 V.
the minimum creepage distance for explosion-protected machines (with the exception of
machines for Zone 22) between non-insulated parts is maintained: 12 mm to 690 V.
6.6
6.6.1
6.6.1.1
Mounting a brake
Table 6- 17
Frame size
Brake type
(BG)
6.6.1.2
100
2LM8 0405NA10
12
4,8
112
2LM8 0606NA10
14
12
132
2LM8 1007NA10
16
12
160
2LM8 2608NA10
20
23
180
2LM8 3150NA10
20
23
200
2LM8 4000NA10
25
23
225
2LM8 4000NA10
25
23
250
KFB 63
63
40
280
KFB 100
100
40
315
KFB 160
160
40
65
Electrical connection
6.7 Connection to the converter
6.7
66
Electrical connection
6.7 Connection to the converter
Explosion-protected motors in Zone 1 with type of protection "de" (motor series 1MJ)
Motor type
frame size
2-pole 1)
4-pole
6-pole
8-pole
nmax
fmax
nmax
fmax
nmax
fmax
nmax
fmax
rpm
Hz
rpm
Hz
rpm
Hz
rpm
Hz
1MJ6
71 M
1MJ6 07.
6000
100
3000
100
2000
100
1500
100
80 M
1MJ6 08 .
6000
100
3000
100
2000
100
1500
100
90 L
1MJ6 09 .
6000
100
3000
100
2000
100
1500
100
100 L
1MJ6 10 .
5400
90
3000
100
2000
100
1500
100
112 M
1MJ6 11 .
5400
90
3000
100
2000
100
1500
100
132 S/M
1MJ6 13 .
4800
80
3000
100
2000
100
1500
100
160 M/L
1MJ6 16 .
4500
75
3000
100
2000
100
1500
100
180 M/L
1MJ6 18 .
5100
85
3000
100
2000
100
1500
100
200 L
1MJ6 20 .
5100
85
3000
100
2000
100
1500
100
225 S/M
1MJ7 22 .
4500
75
3000
100
2000
100
1500
100
250 M
1MJ7 25 .
3900
65
3700
100
2000
100
1500
100
280 S
1MJ7 28 .
3600
60
3000
100
2000
100
1500
100
315 S/M
1MJ7 31 .
3600 2)
60 2)
2600
87
2000
100
1500
100
1MJ7
67
Electrical connection
6.7 Connection to the converter
Table 6- 19
Motor-
Explosion-proof motors in Zones 2, 21 and 22 with type of protection "n" or protection against dust explosions
(motor series 1LA, 1LG)
Motor type
2-pole 1)
frame size
nmax
fmax
rpm
Hz
4pole
nmax
rpm
6-pole
8-pole
fmax
nmax
fmax
nmax
fmax
Hz
rpm
Hz
rpm
Hz
1LA7/1LA9
05.
6000
100
3000
100
2000
100
1500
100
63 M
1LA7/1LA9
06.
6000
100
3000
100
2000
100
1500
100
71 M
1LA7/1LA9
07.
6000
100
3000
100
2000
100
1500
100
80 M
1LA7/1LA9
08.
6000
100
3000
100
2000
100
1500
100
90 L
1LA7/1LA9
09.
6000
100
3000
100
2000
100
1500
100
100 L
1LA6/1LA7/1LA9
10.
5400
90
3000
100
2000
100
1500
100
112 M
1LA6/1LA7/1LA9
11.
5400
90
3000
100
2000
100
1500
100
132 S/M
1LA6/1LA7/1LA9
13.
4800
80
3000
100
2000
100
1500
100
160 M/L
1LA6/1LA7/1LA9
16.
4500
75
180 M/L
1LA5/1LA9
18.
200 L
1LA5/1LA9
20.
225 S/M
1LA5
22.
5100 4)
85 4)
180 M/L
1LG4/1LG6
18.
4500
200 L
1LG4/1LG6
20.
225 S/M
1LG4/1LG6
22.
250 M
1LG4/1LG6
280 S/M
315 S/M/L
3000
100
2000
100
1500
100
85
3) 4)
3000
100
2000
100
1500
100
85
3) 4)
3000
100
2000
100
1500
100
3000
100
2000
100
1500
100
75
3000
100
2000
100
1500
100
4500
75
3000
100
2000
100
1500
100
4500
75
3000
100
2000
100
1500
100
25.
3900
65
3000
100
2000
100
1500
100
1LG4/1LG6
28.
3600
60
3000
100
2000
100
1500
100
1LG4/1LG6
31.
2600
87
2000
87
1500
100
5100
3) 4)
5100
3) 4)
1LG4, 1LG6
3600
1)
60
1)
1)
2)
3)
For 1LA9 motors, frame sizes 180 M/L and 200 L, nmax= 4500 min-1and fmax= 75 Hz.
4)
Frame size
Nmax
fmax
rpm
Hz
180 M/L
3300
55
200 L
3100
51
225 S/M
3000
50
68
Commissioning
7.1
Insulation resistance
7.1.1
WARNING
Working on electrical power installations
Only appropriately trained personnel may carry out this work.
Before starting commissioning, install all covers that are designed to prevent active or
rotating parts from being touched, or which are necessary to ensure correct air guidance
and thus effective cooling.
WARNING
Hazardous voltage at the terminals
Dangerous voltages are sometimes present on the terminals during and immediately after
measurement of the winding insulation resistance. Contact with these can result in death,
serious injury or material damage.
If any power cables are connected, check to make sure line supply voltage cannot be
connected. Once you have measured the insulation resistance, discharge the winding by
connecting to the ground potential.
69
Commissioning
7.1 Insulation resistance
NOTICE
If the critical insulation resistance is less than or equal to this value, the windings must be
dried or, if the fan is removed, cleaned thoroughly and dried.
Please note that the insulation resistance of dried, clean windings is lower than that of
warm windings. The insulation resistance can only be properly assessed after conversion to
the reference temperature of 25 C.
NOTICE
If the measured value is close to the critical value, you must check the insulation resistance
at suitably frequent intervals.
500 V
10 M
0,5 M / kV
70
Commissioning
7.2 Measures before start-up
Note the following:
If the measurements are performed at winding temperatures 25 C, convert the
measured value to the reference temperature of 25 C in order to be able to compare the
values with the table above.
The insulation resistance halves every time the temperature rises by 10 K.
The resistance doubles every time the temperature falls by 10 K.
Dry, new windings have a typical insulation resistance of more than 100 ... 2000 M
depending on the winding size, design and rated voltage. An insulation resistance value
close to the minimum value could be due to moisture and/or dirt accumulation.
During operation, the insulation resistance of the windings can fall to the critical insulation
resistance due to ambient and operational influences. The critical insulation resistance
value for a winding temperature of 25 C can be calculated by multiplying the rated
voltage (kV) by the specific critical resistance value (0,5 M / kV).
Example:
Critical resistance for rated voltage UN = 690 V:
690 V x 0,5 M / kV = 0,345 M
NOTICE
Critical insulation resistance reached or fallen below
If the critical insulation resistance is reached or fallen below, this can result in damage to
the insulation or voltage flashovers.
Contact your Siemens Service Center.
If the measured value is close to the critical value, you must check the insulation
resistance at suitably frequent intervals.
See also
SIEMENS Service Center (Page 111)
7.2
71
Commissioning
7.2 Measures before start-up
The bearings have been lubricated as appropriate for the version used. Rolling-contact
bearing machines which have been in storage for more than 24 months have been
relubricated.
Any supplementary machine monitoring equipment has been connected correctly and is
functioning as it should.
For versions with bearing thermometers, the bearing temperatures must be checked
during the machine's first period of operation. The warning and shutdown values are set
on the monitoring device.
Appropriately configured control and speed monitoring functions ensure that the machine
cannot exceed the permissible speeds specified on the rating plate.
The output elements have the correct settings for their type (e.g. alignment and balancing
of couplings, belt forces in the case of a belt drive, tooth forces and tooth face clearance
in the case of toothed-wheel power output, radial and axial clearance in the case of
coupled shafts).
The minimum insulation resistance and minimum clearance values have been adhered
to.
The grounding and equipotential bonding connections have been established correctly.
All fixing screws, connection elements, and electrical connections have been tightened to
the specified torques.
Lifting eyes that were screwed in have been removed following installation or secured to
prevent them becoming loose.
The rotor can turn without coming into contact with the stator.
All touch protection measures for both moving and live parts have been implemented.
In cases where the shaft extension is not being used and is, therefore, exposed, it has
been covered and the feather key has been secured to prevent it from being thrown out.
If being used, the external fan is ready for operation and connected so that it rotates in
the direction specified.
The flow of cooling air is not obstructed.
If a brake is being used, it is functioning correctly.
The specified mechanical limit speed n max is adhered to.
If the design of the machine requires the converter to be assigned in a particular way, the
relevant information will be provided on the rating plate or an additional label.
Note
It may be necessary to perform additional checks and tests in accordance with the specific
situation on site.
72
Commissioning
7.3 Switching on
7.3
Switching on
73
Commissioning
7.3 Switching on
74
Operation
8.1
Safety instructions
8.1.1
Machine operation
WARNING
Line supply with non-grounded neutral point
Operating the machine on a line supply system with a non-grounded neutral point is only
permitted over short time intervals that occur rarely, e.g. the time leading to a fault being
eliminated (ground fault of a cable, EN 60034-1).
WARNING
Do not remove covers when the motor is running
Rotating or live parts are dangerous. Death, serious injury, or material damage can result if
the required covers are removed.
De-energize the machine and bring it into a no voltage condition before removing any
covers.
Ensure that any covers, which are designed to prevent active or rotating parts from
being touched, which are necessary to ensure correct air guidance and thus effective
cooling, or which guarantee the degree of protection of the machine, remain closed
during operation.
CAUTION
The surfaces of the machines can reach high temperatures, which can lead to burns if
touched.
75
Operation
8.1 Safety instructions
CAUTION
Minimum load for cylindrical roller bearings
Be sure to comply with the minimum radial load of 30% of the cylindrical roller bearings in
accordance with catalog data.
WARNING
Faults during operation
Deviations from conditions during normal operation, such as an increase in power
consumption, temperatures or vibrations, unusual noises or odors, tripping of monitoring
devices, etc., indicate that the machine is not functioning properly. This can cause faults
which can result in eventual or immediate death, severe injury or material damage.
Immediately inform the maintenance personnel.
If you are in doubt, immediately switch off the machine, being sure to observe the
system-specific safety conditions.
CAUTION
Risk of corrosion due to condensation
When changing machines and/or ambient temperatures, air humidity can condense within
the machines.
If available, remove the screw plugs to drain the water depending on the ambient and
operating conditions.
Reinsert them afterwards.
If the machine is equipped with drainage plugs, the water can drain away automatically.
WARNING
Machines with textile fan covers
The machine fan is not completely protected against contact.
The customer must put suitable measures in place, e.g. housings or protective grating, to
prevent manual intervention.
76
Operation
8.1 Safety instructions
8.1.2
Cleaning
To ensure problem-free machine cooling, the air ducts (ventilation grilles, channels, cooling
fins, tubes) must be free of pollution.
DANGER
Explosion hazard
This electrical equipment is not suitable for operation in a hybrid explosive environment.
This may result in death, serious injury and material damage.
Usage in atmospheres where there is a risk of explosion caused by both gas and dust is
prohibited.
DANGER
Explosion hazard
It is forbidden to clean the machine in an explosive atmosphere!
This can result in death, serious injury or material damage.
Surfaces can become statically charged and discharge to ignite potentially explosive
atmospheres.
8.1.3
77
Operation
8.2 Stoppages
8.1.4
8.2
Stoppages
Overview
If the machine remains out of service for an extended period of time (> 1 month), it should be
commissioned regularly (around once a month) or, at the very least, the rotor should be
turned. Please refer to the instructions in the section titled "Switching on" before
recommissioning the machine. If a rotor locking device has been fitted to the machine, you
must remove it before the rotor starts to turn.
CAUTION
If the machine is to be out of service for a period in excess of 12 months, you must take
suitable anti-corrosion, mothballing, packaging, and drying measures.
78
Operation
8.3 Fault tables
8.3
Fault tables
Overview
NOTICE
Before rectifying any faults, please read the information in the section titled Safety
information (Page 11).
Note
In the event that electrical faults occur while the machine is being operated with a converter,
please also refer to the operating instructions for the frequency converter.
The tables below list general faults caused by mechanical and electrical influences.
Table 8- 1
X
X
X
X
X
Remedial measures1)
Overload
Reduce load
Check connections
(1) As well as eliminating the cause of the fault (as described under "Remedial measures"),
you must also rectify any damage the machine may have suffered.
79
Operation
8.4 Deactivating
Table 8- 2
Grinding noise
Overheating
Radial vibrations
X
X
Axial vibrations
Possible causes of faults
Remedial measures1)
Poor alignment
X
X
Adjust/repair gearing
Resonance in the overall system (comprising machine Reinforce foundation following consultation
and foundation)
Changes in foundation
(1) As well as eliminating the cause of the fault (as described under "Remedial measures"),
you must also rectify any damage the machine may have suffered.
2) Note any changes that take place while the temperature is rising.
8.4
Deactivating
Note
Switch off the machine and disconnect it from the power supply!
80
Operation
8.5 Class
8.5
Class
8.5.1
8.5.2
II
Ex
IIC
T4
CE marking
Identification number of designated testing agency
Code for prevention of explosions
Device group: II For hazardous areas, except mines
Device category: 2 For occasional danger, and for use in Zone 1
Atmosphere: G For gas
Explosion protection: International
Type of protection: "d" Flameproof Enclosure of machine
Type of protection: "e" Increased Safety of terminal box
Explosion group: IIC For acetylene
Temperature class: T4 For maximum surface temperature of 135C
II
Ex
II
T3
CE marking
Identification number of designated testing agency
Code for prevention of explosions
Device group: II For hazardous areas, except mines
Device category: 2 for occasional danger
Atmosphere: G For gas
Explosion protection: International
Type of protection: "e" Increased Safety
Device group: II For hazardous areas, except mines
Temperature class: T3 For maximum surface temperature of 200C
81
Operation
8.5 Class
8.5.3
8.5.4
Ex
nA
II
T3
CE marking
Declaration of conformity no. for designated testing agency
Code for prevention of explosions
Device group: II For hazardous areas, except mines
Device category: 3 For infrequent, short-term danger
Atmosphere: G For gas
Explosion protection: International
Type of protection: "nA" For non-sparking
Device group: II For hazardous areas, except mines
Temperature class: T3 For maximum surface temperature of 200C
Zone 21
158
II
II
Ex
tD
21
IP65
T125C
CE marking
Identification number of designated testing agency
Code for prevention of explosions
Device group: II For hazardous areas, except mines
Device category: 2 For occasional danger
Atmosphere: D For dust
Explosion protection: International
Type of protection: "tD" For protection by enclosure
Version: A For process A to EN 61241-1
Zone in which the equipment can be used: 21 For Zone 21
Degree of protection of enclosure: IP 65
Maximum surface temperature: T 125 C or T 135 C
82
Operation
8.5 Class
8.5.5
Zone 22
II
Ex
tD
22
IP55
T125C
CE marking
Code for prevention of explosions
Device group: II For hazardous areas, except mines
Device category: 3 For infrequent, short-term danger
Atmosphere: D For dust
Explosion protection: International
Type of protection: "tD" For protection by enclosure
Version: A For process A to EN 61241-1
Zone in which the equipment can be used: 22 For Zone 22
Degree of protection of enclosure: IP 55
Maximum surface temperature: T 125 C or T 135 C
83
Operation
8.5 Class
84
Maintenance
9.1
85
Maintenance
9.1 Preparation and notes
9.1.1
Underwriters Laboratories
9.1.2
9.1.3
Repainting
WARNING
Repainting explosion-proof motors
The paint coat can become electrostatically charged where there is a thick coat. A
discharge may occur, e.g. by diversion of the charge to ground when a person approaches.
There is a risk of explosion if potentially explosive mixtures are also present at this moment.
This can result in personal injury or damage.
You must comply with one of the following requirements when you repaint painted surfaces:
86
Maintenance
9.2 Inspection
Limit the total paint coating thickness according to the explosion protection group:
IIA, IIB: Total paint coating thickness 2 mm
IIC: Overall coating thickness 0.2 mm for motors of group II (gas)
Limit the surface resistance of the paint used:
IIA, IIB, IIC, III: Surface resistance 1 G for motors of groups II and III (gas and
dust)
Breakdown voltage 4 kV for explosion group III (dust only)
9.2
Inspection
9.2.1
9.2.2
9.2.3
Initial inspection
Inspection interval
The first inspection after installation or repair of the three-phase machine is, under normal
circumstances, conducted after approx. 500 operating hours, but at the latest after 1/2 year.
87
Maintenance
9.2 Inspection
Procedure
While the motor is running, check that:
The electrical parameters are maintained.
The permissible bearing temperatures are not exceeded.
The smooth running characteristics and noise of the three-phase machine have not
deteriorated during operation.
With the machine at a standstill, check that:
The motor foundations have no indentations or cracks.
NOTICE
Further tests are also necessary in line with the additional instructions assigned or in
line with the particular system-specific conditions.
NOTICE
Immediately correct any impermissible deviations that are determined in the inspection.
9.2.4
Main inspection
Inspection interval
1x yearly
Procedure
While the motor is running, check that:
The electrical parameters are maintained.
The permissible bearing temperatures are not exceeded.
The smooth running characteristics and noise of the three-phase machine have not
deteriorated during operation.
With the machine at a standstill, check that:
The machine foundation has no indentations or cracks.
The three-phase machine is aligned within the permissible tolerance ranges.
All of the fixing bolts/screws for the mechanical and electrical connections are tight.
88
Maintenance
9.3 Maintenance
The winding insulation resistances are sufficiently high.
Cables and insulating parts and components are in a good condition and are not
discolored.
NOTICE
Immediately correct any impermissible deviations that are determined in the inspection.
9.3
Maintenance
9.3.1
Maintenance intervals
General
The machines have grease-lubricated, rolling-contact bearings. A regreasing device is
optional.
Carry out careful and regular maintenance, inspections, and revisions to detect faults at an
early stage and eliminate them before they can cause further damage.
Operating situations and characteristics can vary widely. For this reason, only general
maintenance intervals can be specified here. Maintenance intervals should therefore be
scheduled to suit the local conditions (dirt, starting frequency, load, etc.).
NOTICE
In the event of faults or extraordinary conditions that lead to the three-phase machine being
overloaded either electrically or mechanically (e.g. overload, short circuit, etc.), immediately
carry out an inspection.
Measures, intervals
Measures after operating period intervals have elapsed:
Table 9- 2
Measures
Intervals
Initial inspection
Relubrication (optional)
Clean
Main inspection
Drain condensate
89
Maintenance
9.3 Maintenance
9.3.2
Regreasing (optional)
General
As a standard feature, the machines have rolling-contact bearings which are permanently
lubricated with grease (UNIREX N3, made by ESSO). A regreasing device is possible as an
option. In this case, you can find information about relubrication intervals, quantities and
types of grease, and, if required, additional data on the rating plate or lubricant plate.
Note
Do not mix different types of grease!
Prolonged storage periods reduce the useful life of the bearing grease. Check the condition
of the grease if the equipment has been in storage for more than 12 months. If the grease is
found to have lost oil content or to be contaminated, the machine must be immediately
relubricated before commissioning. For information on permanently-greased bearings,
please refer to the section titled Storage (Page 92).
Note
Regreasing
1. Clean the grease nipples at the drive end and non-drive end.
2. Press in the type and quantity of grease specified (see rating/lubricant plate data).
Please observe the information on the rating and lubricant plates.
Regreasing should be carried out when the machine is running (max. 3600 rpm)!
The bearing temperature rises sharply at first, then drops to the normal value again when the
excess grease is displaced out of the bearing.
9.3.3
Cleaning
90
Maintenance
9.3 Maintenance
See also
Safety instructions for cleaning (Page 77)
9.3.4
Drain condensate
If there are condensate drain holes present, these must be opened at regular intervals,
depending on climatic conditions.
NOTICE
To maintain the degree of protection, any condensation drain holes need to be closed.
91
Maintenance
9.4 Corrective maintenance
9.4
Corrective maintenance
9.4.1
Qualified personnel
Only appropriately qualified persons should be deployed to commission and operate
equipment. Qualified persons, as far as the safety instructions specified in this manual are
concerned, are those who have the necessary authorization to commission, ground and
identify/tag equipment, systems and circuits in accordance with the relevant safety
standards.
See also
Preparing for use (Page 27)
9.4.2
Storage
Take the bearing used up to frame size 90 only for special versions, and generally for frame
size 100 and higher from the rating plate.
Bearing lifetime
Prolonged storage periods reduce the useful life of the bearing grease. In the case of
permanently lubricated bearings, this leads to a shorter bearing lifetime.
Bearing or grease replacement is recommended after a storage time of 12 months, for
longer than 4 years, replace the bearings or grease.
92
Maintenance
9.4 Corrective maintenance
Replacing bearings
Recommended interval after which bearings are to be replaced under normal operating
conditions:
Table 9- 3
Coolant temperature
Principle of operation
40 C
40 000 h
40 C
20 000 h
Note
Special operating conditions
Examples of factors that can reduce operating hours are vertical machine installation, high
vibrational and impact loads, frequent reversing, higher coolant temperature, higher speeds,
etc.
NOTICE
Do not reuse bearings that have been removed.
93
Maintenance
9.4 Corrective maintenance
9.4.2.1
Changing bearings
Replacing bearings
9.4.2.2
9.4.3
Dismantling
NOTICE
Before commencing disassembly, you should mark how each of the fastening elements has
been assigned, as well as how internal connections are arranged, for re-assembly
purposes.
Fan
Take care not to damage the snapping mechanisms on fans that are equipped with these.
To ensure this, the fans should be heated to a temperature of approximately 50 C around
the area of the hub. If any damage is caused, request new parts.
94
Maintenance
9.4 Corrective maintenance
Fan cover
Carefully lever the snap openings on the cover out of the snap-in lugs one after the other;
do not apply the lever directly under the web (risk of breakage).
Do not damage the snap mechanisms. If any damage is caused, request new parts.
9.4.3.1
Bearing bushes
Note
Protect the bearings against the ingress of dirt and moisture!
9.4.3.2
Links
Links
Replace any corroded screws.
Take care not to damage the insulation of live parts.
Document the position of any rating and supplementary plates that have been removed.
Avoid damaging the centering edges.
9.4.4
Assembly
Notes on assembly
If possible, assemble the machine on and alignment plate. This ensures that the mounting
feet surfaces are all on the same plane.
95
Maintenance
9.4 Corrective maintenance
9.4.4.1
Assemly
NOTICE
Avoid damaging the windings protruding out of the stator enclosure when fitting the end
shield.
9.4.4.2
Assemly
Apply Fluid-D to the centering edge.
Check the terminal box seals and if required, replace.
Repair any damage to the paint (also on screws/bolts).
Take the necessary measures to ensure compliance with the applicable degree of
protection.
Do not forget the foam cover in the cable entry (seal all holes completely and prevent
cables from touching any sharp edges).
For flameproof machines, apply just a small amount of acid-free, non-resinous grease to the
centering edges. Do not use any sealing agents.
See also
Terminal boxes, end shields, grounding conductors, sheet metal fan covers (Page 99)
9.4.4.3
9.4.4.4
Reassembling bearings
96
Maintenance
9.4 Corrective maintenance
Table 9- 4
6 0,8
7 1
11 1
225
(1LG, 1LE; 2-pole)
9.4.4.5
X
mm
13,5 1,2
225
(1LG, 1LE; 2-pole)
11 1
13,5 1,2
13,5 1,2
Reassembling fans
Fans
Take care not to damage the snapping mechanisms on fans that are equipped with these.
To ensure this, the fans should be heated to a temperature of approximately 50 C around
the area of the hub.
If any damage is caused, request new parts.
9.4.4.6
Fan cover
When fitting the cover, do not overstretch it (risk of breakage).
First engage two snap openings positioned next to one other, then carefully press the
cover into position with the two openings situated opposite these using the snap-in lugs,
and snap it into place.
Latch all snap openings cleanly into the snap-in lugs.
9.4.4.7
97
Maintenance
9.4 Corrective maintenance
9.4.4.8
Miscellaneous
Number and position of rating plates and additional labels as in original condition
If necessary, fix cables in place.
Check the tightening torques of all screws, as well as those of screws which have not
been unscrewed.
The number on the EC-type examination certificate for machines with flameproof enclosure
"d" type of protection is represented by an X, since the flameproof joints deviate from IEC
standard 60079-1, Table 2. Only perform repairs following consultation with the manufacturer
and be sure to use original parts.
9.4.5
Screw-type connections
9.4.6
Table 9- 5
M 3,5
M4
M5
M6
M8
M 10
M 12
M 16
min
0,8
0,8
1,8
2,7
5,5
14
27
Max.
1,2
1,2
2,5
13
20
40
Nm
9.4.7
Cable glands
NOTICE
Take care not to damage the cable jacket.
Tightening torques must be adapted to suit the type of cable jacket material in use.
You should refer to the table in order to find the correct tightening torque for any metal and
plastic cable glands that are to be mounted directly on the machine, as well as for any other
screw-type connections (such as adapters).
1LA5/6/7/9, 1LE1, 1LG4/6, 1LP7/9, 1MA6/7, 1MF6/7, 1MJ6/7, 1PC1/3, 1PP6/7/9
98
Maintenance
9.4 Corrective maintenance
Table 9- 6
Plastic
10%
Nm
10%
Nm
M 12 x 1,5
Clamping range in mm
O ring
Cord
mm
Standard
-30 C ... 100 C
Ex
-30 C ... 90 C
1,5
Ex
M 16 x 1,5
10
M 20 x 1,5
12
M 25 x 1,5
18
M 32 x 1,5
M 40 x 1,5
M 50 x 1,5
20
M 63 x 1,5
The cable glands must have an EC-type examination certificate and be certified for the
respective hazardous zone.
Any openings that are not being used must be sealed using using the appropriate
certified plugs.
Please observe the manufacturer's specifications when fitting cable glands.
9.4.8
Terminal boxes, end shields, grounding conductors, sheet metal fan covers
Note
The specified tightening torques are applicable unless other values are indicated.
Table 9- 7
Tightening torques for screws on the terminal box, end shields, screw-type grounding conductor connections
Thread
M4
M5
M6
M8
M 10
M 12
M 16
M20
min
3.5
16
28
46
110
225
max
24
42
70
165
340
Nm
99
Maintenance
9.4 Corrective maintenance
Table 9- 8 Tightening torques for self-tapping screws on the terminal box, end shields, screw-type grounding
conductor connections, sheet metal fan covers
Thread
M4
M5
M6
min
7,5
12,5
Max.
9,5
15,5
Nm
9.4.9
Table 9- 9
Frame size
Brake type
100
2LM8 0405NA10
12
4,8
112
2LM8 0606NA10
14
12
132
2LM8 1007NA10
16
12
160
2LM8 2608NA10
20
23
180
2LM8 3150NA10
20
23
200
2LM8 4000NA10
25
23
225
2LM8 4000NA10
25
23
(BG)
250
KFB 63
63
40
280
KFB 100
100
40
315
KFB 160
160
40
Tightening torque applied to the fastening screws used for attaching external fans to the
housing, see Terminal boxes, end shields, grounding conductors, sheet metal fan covers
(Page 57)
100
10
Spare parts
10.1
General
In addition to the exact part designation, please specify the machine type and the serial
number in all orders for spare parts. The part designation should be identical to the
designation stated in the list of spare parts and specified together with the appropriate part
number.
Table 10- 1
Ordering example
Machine type *
1LA7163-4AA60
ID no. *
E0705/1234567 01 001
Table 10- 2
Ordering example
Machine type *
1LE1002-1DB43-4AA0
ID no. *
E0605/0496382 02 001
Take the type and serial number from the rating plate and the machine documentation.
When replacing rolling-contact bearings, in addition to the bearing identification code, the
replacement code for the bearing version is required. Both of these codes are specified on
the rating plate and in the machine documentation. They are also shown on the installed
bearings.
The graphical representations in this chapter show schematic diagrams of the basic
versions. They are used for spare parts definitions. The supplied version may differ in details
from these representations.
101
Spare parts
10.2 Spare parts
10.2
Spare parts
Part
Description
1.00
DE bearings
Part
Description
1.31
5.30
1.40
End shield
5.31
1.43
5.32
Angle (1MA618.-20.)
1.44
Bearing cover
5.33
Washer (1MA618.-20.)
1.46
Cover ring
5.43
Cable gland
1.47
O ring
5.44
1.56
Spacer washer
5.48
1.58
Spring washer
5.52
Cable gland
1.60
Roller bearing
5.53
Sealing plug
1.61
5.54
O ring
1.64
3.00
Rotor, complete
3.88
5.70
Terminal clamp
5.72
Contact bracket
5.76
Terminal Board
5.78
5.79
Bolt
4.00
Stator, complete
5.82
O ring
4.07
Housing foot
5.83
Seal
4.08
5.84
4.09
5.86
Protection mark
4.10
5.88
4.12
Nut
5.89
Bolt
4.14
Nut
5.90
4.18
Rating plate
5.92
4.19
Self-tapping screw
5.93
Seal
4.20
Cover
5.95
4.30
Contact bracket
5.96
Sealing plug
4.31
Grounding bracket
5.97
Nut
4.37
Terminal board
5.98
Metal-sheet nut
4.38
5.98
Seal
4.39
5.99
Adapter plate
5.00
6.00
NDE bearings
5.02
spacer
6.10
Roller bearing
5.03
Seal
6.11
5.04
Seal
6.20
End shield
5.08
Spacer sleeve
6.23
5.10
6.24
5.11
6.26
Cover
5.12
6.64
Nut
5.13
Link rail
6.30
102
Spare parts
10.2 Spare parts
5.14
5.15
Plug (1MJ6)
7.00
Complete ventilation
(not applicable for 1LP6, 1LP7, 1LP9, 1PP6, 1PP7,
1PP9, 1MF6, 1MF7)
5.16
7.04
Fan
7.40
Fan cover
5.20
7.41
bracket
5.22
Connecting terminal
7.47
Sleeve
5.23
7.48
5.18
Tools for mounting and withdrawing roller bearings; fans and output elements cannot be supplied!
Part Description
Part Description
1.00 DE bearings
5.97 Nut
4.20 Cover
Tools for mounting and withdrawing roller bearings; fans and output elements cannot be supplied!
103
Spare parts
10.2 Spare parts
Part Description
10.2.1
Table 10- 3
Part Description
Part Description
1.00
DE bearings
5.21
Screw (drilled)
1.40
End shield
5.44
1.43
5.49
Self-tapping screw
1.44
DE bearing cover
5.70
Terminal clamp
1.46
Cover ring
5.79
Self-tapping screw
1.49
Self-tapping screw
5.83
Seal
1.58
Spring washer
5.84
1.60
Roller bearing
5.89
Self-tapping screw
1.61
T plugs
5.96
Sealing plug
4.00
Stator, complete
6.00
NDE bearings
4.08
6.10
Roller bearing
4.09
6.11
4.18
Rating plate
6.20
End shield
4.19
Self-tapping screw
6.23
4.20
Cover
6.24
4.31
Grounding bracket
6.25
Lubrication sleeve
4.37
Terminal board
6.29
Self-tapping screw
4.35
Spacer ring
6.65
Grease nipple
4.39
5.00
7.00
Complete ventilation
5.03
Seal
7.04
Fan
5.10
7.40
Fan cover
5.19
Self-tapping screw
104
Spare parts
10.2 Spare parts
10.2.2
Description
Part
Description
1.00
DE bearings
6.00
NDE bearings
1.40
End shield
6.10
Roller bearing
1.43
6.20
End shield
1.58
Spacer washer
6.23
1.60
Roller bearing
6.24
1.61
Sealing plug
6.25
Grease tube
1.65
6.26
1.67
6.65
Grease nipple
1.68
6.67
Rubber bush
1.69
Compression spring
6.72
Grease slinger
3.00
Rotor, complete
7.00
Complete ventilation
7.04
Fan
4.00
Stator, complete
7.40
Fan cover
4.07
Housing foot
7.41
Bracket
4.18
Rating plate
7.49
Bolt
4.35
Disk
4.41
Grounding lug
5.00
5.03
Seal
5.10
5.12
5.19
5.22
Clamp
5.23
5.44
5.45
Housing
5.47
Entry plate
5.51
Nut
5.52
Link
5.70
Terminal clamp
5.83
Seal
5.84
5.95
Terminal
5.96
Mounting rail
5.97
Strut, complete
5.99
Contact plate
Tools for mounting and withdrawing roller bearings; fans and output elements cannot be supplied!
105
Spare parts
10.3 Standardized parts
10.3
Table 10- 4
No
Standardized parts
Standardized parts are to be obtained from free trade outlets in accordance with their necessary dimensions,
materials and surface finish.
Standard
Picture
No
DIN 471
3.02
6.02
7.12
Standard
Picture
DIN 939
DIN 6912
DIN 472
DIN 580
4.04
DIN 582
1.60
6.10
DIN 625
3.38
DIN 6885
1.33
6.30
EN ISO 4032
1.30
1.32
1.45
1.49
4.11
5.09
5.17
5.19
5.24
5.42
5.49
5.79
5.87
5.89
5.91
5.94
6.29
6.45
7.49
DIN 7964
EN ISO 4014
EN ISO 4017
EN ISO 4762
EN ISO 7045
EN ISO 7049
4.05
7.48
EN ISO 7089
EN ISO 7090
Note
1MJ spare parts
Use screws of property class 8.8 and in the case of nuts, 8.
106
Spare parts
10.3 Standardized parts
Table 10- 5
Standardized parts are to be obtained from free trade outlets in accordance with their necessary dimensions,
materials and surface finish.
No
Standard
6.02
DIN 472
(frame size 160)
Picture
No
1.49
(frame size
132/160)
Standard
Picture
EN ISO 4014
EN ISO 4017
4.11
4.04
DIN 580
6.29
(frame size
132/160)
EN ISO 4762
3.38
DIN 6885
4.05
EN ISO 7089
EN ISO 7090
107
Spare parts
10.3 Standardized parts
108
11
Disposal
11.1
Introduction
Protecting the environment and preserving its resources are corporate goals of the highest
priority for us. Our worldwide environmental management system to ISO 14001 ensures
compliance with legislation and sets high standards in this regard. Environmentally friendly
design, technical safety and health protection are always firm goals even at the product
development stage.
Recommendations for the environmentally friendly disposal of the machine and its
components are given in the following section. Be sure to comply with local disposal
regulations.
11.2
11.3
109
Disposal
11.4 Disposal of components
11.4
Disposal of components
Components
The machines consist for the most part of steel and various proportions of copper and
aluminum. Metals are generally considered to be unlimitedly recyclable.
Sort the components for recycling according to whether they are:
Iron and steel
Aluminum
Non-ferrous metal, e.g. windings
The winding insulation is incinerated during copper recycling.
Insulating materials
Cables and wires
Electronic waste
Packaging material
If necessary, contact a suitable specialist disposal company.
Wooden packaging for sea transport consists of impregnated wood. Observe the local
regulations.
The foil used for water-proof packaging is an aluminum composite foil. It can be recycled
thermically. Dirty foil must be disposed of via waste incineration.
110
Appendix
A.1
Service numbers
Table A- 1
Time zone
Telephone
Fax
Internet
Europe / Africa
http://www.siemens.com/automation/support-request
(http://www.siemens.de/automation/support-request)
Americas
mailto:techsupport.sea@siemens.com
Asia / Pacific
mailto:support.asia.automation@siemens.com
A.2
111
Appendix
A.3 Further documents
A.3
Further documents
These operating instructions can also be obtained at the following Internet site:
http://www.siemens.com/motors
General Documentation
1.517.30777.30.000
1XP8001 encoder
5.610.70000.02.015
External fan
5.610.70000.10.020
Spring-loaded brake
112
[
,0%
B.1.1
Exploded drawings
B.1
,0%
113
114
,0%
,0%
B.1.2
%*
%*
,0%
,0%
B.1.3
115
,0%
,0%
B.1.4
116
B.1.5
%*
117
118
,0%
,0%
%*6/
%*0/
%*0/
%*6/
%*
B.1.6
%*6/
%*/([H
%*([G
B.1.7
%*0([H
119
B.1.8
%*0/([H
PP
PP
120
B.1.9
%*
%*
PP
PP
121
122
,0%
B.1.10
,0%
%*
,0%
,0%
B.1.11
123
,0%
,0%
%*
%*
B.1.12
124
%*
%*
%*
%*
B.1.13
125
B.1.14
gk 430
gt 320
gt 420
126
B.1.15
gt 421
5.16
gt 520
gt 540
127
B.1.16
gt 640
gt 791
gt 791
128
Notes
12
129
Notes
Glossary
AS
DE
Drive end (DE)
BA
EC type-examination certificate
Operating instructions
BG
EMC
Frame size
Electromagnetic compatibility
CE
Ex
CE marking
Code F
Balanced with whole featherkey
(full)
Code H
Balanced with half featherkey (half)
IC
International Cooling (standard)
IM
International mounting standard
design
CSA
Canadian Standard Association
Internet
www.siemens.com/motors
CSA E
Canadian Standard Association
Energie Efficiency Verification
CT
Coolant temperature
IP
Degree of protection
ISPM
International Standards for
Phytosanitary Measures
130
Index
N code
Zone 22
Balanced without featherkey (non)
NDE
Non-drive end
NE/NDE
Non-drive end
SH
Shaft height
UL
Underwriters Laboratories
VIK
Verband der industriellen Energieund Kraftwirtschaft e.V. (German
Association of Industrial Energy
Users and Self-Generators)
Zone 1
Atmosphere: Gas; Danger level:
Occasional danger; Type of
protection: Increased Safety "e" +
Flameproof Enclosure "d"
Zone 2
Atmosphere: Gas; Danger level:
Infrequent and short-term danger;
Type of protection: Non-sparking
"n"
Zone 21
Atmosphere: Dust; Danger level:
Occasional danger; Type of
protection: Protection by enclosure
"tD"
131
Index
132